Are buzzing yellow jackets making it impossible for you to relax in the garden even for a while?
We understand your concern. Finding loads of yellow jackets foraging now and then can be a headache indeed. And when you have children and pets at home, this can be all the more worrisome since these insects leave really painful stings.
Hence, controlling these yellow jackets becomes essential. In this guide, we have compiled all the various ways in which you can tackle these insects. We have also included some essential information that you need to know about yellow jackets and their habits.
So, without further ado, let’s get started.
How to Deal With Yellow Jackets
Yellow Jacket - The Insect
The insect, which is known to people around the world as a “wasp” is also referred to by the name yellow jacket. Native to North America, this insect got such a nickname due to its striking yellow color with black stripes.
In fact, this is why you might mistake it for a bee, which is much gentler in nature and is a more endangered insect. The hornet is another similar looking wasp which is often mistaken to be the yellow jacket.
These insects have a slightly smaller size than the regular bee or wasp and are only around 12 mm long. However, queen yellow jackets can grow to a length of 19 mm.
What makes them dangerous is the fact that they can repeatedly sting without being affected, unlike the bee which will die as the stinger is attached to its heart. They generally tend to build nests in protected areas in a garden which are not directly exposed to rain, sunlight or wind.
What Do They Feed On?
Yellow jackets also have similarities with wasps in their food habits, since they prey on several other insects and arthropods. As such, if these insects are present in small numbers and keep away from any human activity, they can be useful in controlling other pests.
Yellow jackets also look out for food items which are rich in carbohydrates and sugar. You will often spot them around flowers, on tree barks, and on fruits. Also, the larvae require protein to grow, for which the larger worker insects search for fish and meat to feed them.
Life Cycle and Habits Of The Yellow Jacket
These insects have a similar life cycle as that of other bugs. Starting off as an egg, they gradually become a larva, then change to pupa, and ultimately develop into the adult wasp. A queen yellow jacket finds a nest site and makes a small nest from paper where it lays the eggs.
The queen insects can generally lay upto 50 eggs at once. When the eggs hatch, the tiny insects are fed up to 20 days until they develop into small versions of the fully matured wasp.
These insects eventually take over from the queen and keep on feeding the rest of the larva. You would usually find them maturing into adults during the summer.
Habits
Yellow Jackets are social wasps and belong to the Vespula genus. A surprising as well as worrisome fact is that a season is enough for these insects to produce several thousand workers.
The genus has a total of 18 species, which consists of several types of yellow jackets. These differ according to their growth habits and are identified by the area they are found growing in. Identifying them is important so that you are able to deal with the insects properly and effectively. In the next section, we have categorized yellow jackets according to the place where they build their nests.
Types of Yellow Jackets and Yellow Jacket Nests
The German Yellow Jacket
Yellow Jackets Found in Structures
The German yellow jacket, which has its origins in Europe, is located across the midwestern and northeastern regions of the United States. These are widely distributed throughout many temperate areas of the country. They are usually found in wall voids, attics, cracks and crevices in a building surface, and crawl spaces.
The Southern Yellow Jacket
Found in Both the Ground and Structures
The yellow jacket found most commonly is Vespula vularis and occurs in many states in the USA. Their nests are found both below and above the ground level. Eastern yellow jackets or Vespula maculifrons is another type that has ground nests mostly but can also have aerial nests. Vespula squamosa or southern yellow jackets also have terrestrial as well as aerial nests.
The Western Yellow Jacket
Found in the Ground
The Eastern yellow jackets or vespula maculifrons and the western yellow jackets or vespula pensylvanica make nests in the ground. They are commonly referred to as “meat bees”. Such yellow jackets also make their nests in rodent burrows and enlarge the cavity as the colonies grow.
Aerial Habitat
A few yellow jackets, like the D. maculata and D. areanara build nests that are attached to the eaves of structures or hang from a tree. These are not as aggressive as other types.
Dealing With Yellow Jackets
When these insects forage in large numbers in areas of human activity or even are nesting nearby, they can create a lot of problems. Most types of yellow jackets become quite aggressive if their colony is disturbed and may sting anyone they find nearby.
In such circumstances it becomes necessary to control the infestation. There are several ways of dealing with yellow jackets, depending on the severity of the situation. These include some preventive control measures that can be taken beforehand.
Sanitation
You must keep in mind that if yellow jackets find food in an area, they would continue foraging that area at intervals. You can face this even after the original food source is dealt with. Hence it is important to maintain some sanitation practices even prior to noticing yellow jackets in any area. This will also help in dealing with the problem without having to kill them. Here are some methods:
Keep Garbage Cans Sealed
Make sure you have no food sources kept outside for yellow jackets to live off from them. Un-emptied cans, animal food or leftover food lying outside can attract these insects and their larva. So, keep the garbage in sealed cans and put your pet food inside instead of the backyard.
Keep Sugary Foods and Drinks Inside
You must not forget that these insects feed on anything sugary. So, in case you are having dinner on an outside table and are thinking of bringing dessert along, dump that idea. You can have it to your heart’s content indoors.
Keep Sliced Cucumber Pieces
It might seem surprising, but cucumbers can indeed be helpful in keeping away yellow jackets. This vegetable contains an acid which yellow jackets don’t like, so you can slice some and scatter them all around your garden before any outdoor gathering.
Killing the Nest
If you are tired of the frequent foraging of yellow jackets and may even have been stung sometimes, you can consider removing the nest itself. But this should be carried out carefully and slowly.
You should also be aware of the nesting habits of these insects which we have discussed earlier in this article. Remember that though all wasps would defend their nests, hornets and yellow jackets turn specifically aggressive for protecting the queen.
If you disturb the nest, these bugs may swarm out from the colony and attack what they consider to be the disturbance. So, you need to take the necessary protective measures and proceed in the right way. Here is a guide for how you should proceed to kill a nest of yellow jackets:
Locate the Nests
You should do this during the daytime, so that you can identify the worker insects entering and leaving the points of entry. Search for multiple entry points and make sure you mark them.
Treatment
Treat the nest only when it is dark. Yellow jackets don’t have a strong vision, which reduces the chance of getting stung. Besides, at night the entire colony will be there in the nest which would make the treatment most effective.
Use a Pyrethrum Aerosol
You should treat the nest with pyrethrum aerosols such as CV-80D, Stryker 54 Contact Aerosol and PT 565. It is the pyrethrum that forms a gas and fills the cavities in the nest to kill these insects on contact. Use a good-quality sprayer to spray the aerosol in areas hard to reach.
Apply Insecticide Dusts
Wait for about 10-15 minutes for the aerosol to become dry and then dust the opening with insecticide dusts like Tempo Dust. This dust will stop any future hatch outs. You must also dust the entrance, the whole nest and surrounding areas.
Check the Nests
After a day, you must go and check the nest to see if the insects are dead. This can be verified by the lack of any activity in and near the spot. Repeat the process if you find some of them are still alive.
Use of Baits
Baits for yellow jackets can either be made using available resources at home or may be purchased from the market or online shopping sites. Here are two such baits that can effectively control yellow jackets:
DIY Protein Bait
Using this innovative method often helps to keep away yellow jackets. Fill some 5-gallon buckets with soapy water. Then use a string of some length to secure a protein food as bait such as a small piece of ham.
In this way, the bait will dangle a few inches above the water. Finally, cover the bucket with a wide mesh that allows the jacket to enter. The insects which want to take the bait will fly within the water and drown. Also, make sure that the traps are well away from any patio or picnic areas.
Alpine Yellow Jacket Bait Stations
These bait stations can be purchased online and are designed for use with Onslaught Insecticide. First, you have to supply the station with fresh meat along with the Onslaught. This lures the insects into the bait station, after which they ingest the mixture of meat with insecticides. It kills the yellow and black bugs then and there.
This bait is widely used during the summer and spring months to kill the most common yellow jackets which consume meat and protein.
These include the German yellow jackets and western yellow jackets. Remember that during the months of fall, yellow jackets prefer carbohydrates to meat, so this bait may not be effective.
Trapping
You will find yellow jacket traps useful if you cannot locate the nest. Using a lure such as meat or fruit juice with a trap like the Advantage Yellow Jacket Trap works perfectly in such cases.
You can put up such traps by some simple steps mentioned in a guide along with the pack or on the product label itself. This trap is really beneficial during cookouts and picnics, as it draws the insects away from you. Keep in mind these points while you put up the trap:
Ensure the trap is placed away from where you will be. It is then that they will be lured into it.
Meat works well as a lure during early season, while fruit juice works better in the fall months and summer.
The Winter Months
In case some of the bugs enter into the walls when it is cold, some reproductive yellow jackets may survive in the walls. In the spring, they would come out to venture outside.
The reproductive insects won't sting, so there is nothing to worry about that. However, if the nest is located in a warm place, then it may survive the winter in its entirety. To kill the nests you can use the Stryker 54 on the entrance during the dark.
Treating Yellow Jacket Stings
Usually, you will know straight away when a yellow jacket has stung. The symptoms of such a sting are really unpleasant but can be treated. First of all, you will feel the pain, and within a while, the area will redden and start swelling.
To treat a sting at home, you can mix one spoonful of baking soda in water and apply on the sting with a cotton ball. This would help in neutralizing the venom of yellow jackets. To reduce itching, put a little vinegar on cotton and pat on the area.
However, for a small section of people who are more allergic, the sting has life risks. This is known as anaphylaxis and leads to dangerous symptoms such as itchiness, swelling of tongue and skin rashes. Immediate medical consultation and treatment are needed in such cases.
Conclusion
So, if you have been struggling to get rid of these aggressive insects from your garden, we hope this article has been of some help to you.
You may have assumed earlier that it would be a herculean task, but it’s not so difficult after all. You just need to be careful at every step and make sure you are protected when going near the nests.
Wearing gloves and boots, shirts with long sleeves, and trousers with sealed cuffs would help to prevent stings and disturbances.
So, now that you know all about it, go ahead and bring your garden back to its old glory!
There aren’t many of us who haven’t wondered at the marvelous material that is wood. Undoubtedly, this is one of nature’s greatest gifts.
Wood has been helping humans since time immemorial. Whether it’s the fundamental operation of lighting a fire or the more luxurious function of acting as furniture, wood has a permanent presence in our lives.
Naturally, woodworking is a craft that is much in demand, and woodworking professionals often conjure up images of saw-wielding workmen. But the truth is, using a saw is just one of the many ways in which wood can be cut.
Don’t believe us? Well, to clear all your doubts, we’ve brought a list of the different ways by which you can cut wood without using a saw. Once you go through the following, you’ll know that when it comes to woodcutting, a saw isn’t the only option.
But before going into that detail, let’s take a quick look at how a saw works.
The Secret Of The Saw
Saws come in various shapes and sizes, but broadly they can be divided into the manual and motorized varieties. Motorized saws are exactly what they sound like, i.e., they make use of a motor to rotate the saw blade.
Manual saws, on the other hand, rely on human skill and muscle power to get the job done. While both types of saws have their own features and utilities, the one thing that is common among them is the blade.
The saw blade is the most essential part of the device. Usually made of durable metal such as iron or steel, this consists of a serrated edge that is teethed to make cuts. The shape, size, and closeness of the teeth change depending on the saw type.
And it’s using these teeth that the saw achieves its woodcutting magic. The process is rather simple if you put some thought into it. And for both motorized and manual saws, the process is the same; only the power source differs.
A saw mainly works by a continued abrasive motion of the toothed edge against the wood. Through vigorous action, the serrated and sharp edge of the saw bites into the wood material, thus making cuts.
These cuts are intensified with the application of manual or mechanical force. Eventually, the wood material gives way to the razor-sharp edges, and the wood is cut.
Other Tools To Cut Wood
From the above, it can be easily understood that cutting wood is not rocket science. With the right sharp edge and proper force, many tools can achieve the same results. And that’s what we’re going to take a look at now. Following are some tools that can cut wood with as good results as a saw.
This is the first, and undoubtedly the most straightforward device that can be used for cutting wood. Knives are one of the oldest tools known to humankind, and woodcutting is one of the many uses that this device can be put to.
But remember, not every knife is suitable for cutting wood. For a knife to cut wood, it needs to be very sharp. So the first thing that you must do before setting out to cut wood with a knife is to sharpen it to the fullest. This can be easily achieved using a file.
Once you’re sure that the knife is sharp enough, now you need to set the wood for cutting. It’s usually seen that wood cannot be cut with a knife at straight positions. So you’ll need to hold the wood at an angle, and then come in with the knife for sharp, swift cuts.
Another method that you can use to cut the wood with a knife is to use the sharp end of the blade to score into the wood surface. Once the scoring is deep enough, you can snap the wood in two. Either way, remember to trim the cut once you’re done to ensure a smooth finish.
Who would’ve thought, eh? But it’s true: you really can use a drilling machine to cut wood. All it takes is a bit of ingenuity, common sense, and a whole lot of precision.
The first step to cutting wood with a drilling machine is to understand how a drilling machine works. A drill is a device for making holes, not straight cuts. So you shouldn’t expect to take the direct route and cut through the wooden piece.
Instead, what you need to do is first draw a straight line in the wood along the length that you want the wood to be cut. This straight line is going to act as a reference line for the operation.
Next, make very close perforations on the line using the drill. Once you start doing this, the wood will get weakened along that line. And as closely made holes essentially act as a single, straight line cut, this gives similar results to sawing.
Finally, once the wood is weak enough, you can simply break it using your hands. However, remember to trim the edges using a sharp knife for that perfect finish.
Nope, we’re not talking about the fictional movie character (though he’d do well too, we guess!), but a real machete blade. Think of it as a knife but on a larger scale. Using a machete, you can easily cut any type of wood, and with better style than a saw will ever achieve.
Even easier, since with a machete, you have the advantage of momentum. Many of the same principles apply to cutting wood with a machete as with a knife. First, you’d have to sharpen the blade as well as you can. Use a file for this purpose, or a whetstone if you have one.
Once your blade is sharp enough, mark the wood along the line where you want to make the cut. Make sure to use a vice to hold the wood at a slanted angle, as you’d do when cutting it with a knife.
Now, you need to make deep enough cuts in the wood along the preferred line. For rough cuts, you can even use a hacking motion as with an ax (coming up next). Once you’ve made a cut deep enough, the wood will break along the cut. Then it’s simply a matter of smoothening the edges with the blade.
This is one of the oldest and most ideal methods of cutting wood. And although it requires significant labor, the results can be quite satisfying.
The first step that you have to take, as usual, is to sharpen the ax blade. Using an ax, you can easily go for cutting larger pieces of wood. But you need to take certain precautions before going for the initial swing.
First, you need to ensure that the wood is on a firm base, such as a tree stump. Also, the wood should be positioned at such a height that you don’t have to bend over to make the cuts. That’ll help you to deliver even swings that cut equally well on each blow.
Remember, if you’re using an ax for the first time, it might take some getting used to; so be sure to practice well. For best results, try to make a V-shaped notch on each strike, as this allows the blade a larger striking area.
Finally, once you’re down to the last strip holding the wood together, deliver the final blow, and separate the pieces. If you are an experienced ax-wielder, you can even snap the two pieces apart by hand.
A hatchet is, essentially, a smaller ax. Equipped with a shorter shaft and blade than a regular ax, this tool is meant to be used one-handed. Hatchets are excellent for chopping up smaller wood pieces.
Besides making kindling sized cuts, hatchets can make small tinder savings, and even work well to cut down small trees. And though they are nowhere near as powerful as an ax, they still get the job done rather well.
There’s not much difference between using an ax and a hatchet. Both must be carefully sharpened before commencing the operation, and both require the wood to be held at a comfortable height.
For best results, make sure to practice a few swings of the tool before setting out to cut the actual wooden piece. And if possible, make a marking to indicate the line along which you’d like the cut to be made.
This is yet another centuries-old technique for cutting wood. And though it’s not meant to give you elegant, precise cuts, still, it gets the job done rather well. Also, this combination ensures that you don’t take a larger chunk from the wooden piece than you intended.
With the chisel also, you need to first sharpen the blade using a file or whetstone. Once done, you then need to secure the wood on a firm surface. Ensure that it doesn’t slip, or else this might lead to accidents.
Now, hold the chisel at an angle of about 20-degrees from the wood surface. While doing so, make sure that the bevelled side faces up, and the flat side is pressed against the wood.
Now, hit the chisel with the hammer to cut into the wood. This is going to be like striking a pretty large nail. For best results, make a mark along the wood where you want the cut to be made.
You’ll need to repeat the process and follow up with multiple strikes of the hammer for the wood to be cut. When it’s done, you’ll get a wood chip which you can easily lever-up with the chisel. Finally, use the sharp edge of the chisel to smoothen the rough edges once you’ve separated the cut piece.
A word of caution: this is an expert level process, so make sure you practice a bit before setting out on the final cut.
A router is an electric tool that can be used for a wide variety of woodworking tasks, including the cutting of wood. For this purpose, make sure you select a quality device with the right bits; this is essential for the operation to succeed.
The process is pretty simple. First, you need to attach the router bit that has the right gauge for making the required cut. The gauge of the bit you select is usually determined by the depth of the cut needed, so choose carefully.
Then, pull the router trigger up, set the device into the wood, and push down the trigger to begin the cutting process. With steady hands, move the trigger carefully in the direction of the cut.
And once you’re done, release the trigger and remove the device! It’s that easy. However, to get the required depth, you might need to make several passes. This is necessary as cutting too deeply on a single pass may damage the router and break the bit.
What’s more, you can even use a finer gauge bit to smoothen the cut edges. Just be prepared to handle a lot of wood chips along the way.
Surprised you again, have we? Although a lathe is mostly known for working on metal, it can work on wood with equal efficacy. Using a lathe, you can shape and cut wood, create intricate patterns, and make attractive wooden pieces for a variety of applications.
To shape and cut wood with a lathe, you need first to prepare the wood. This is essential to ensure that it doesn’t come off the lathe while paring down. In case you’re starting work on a rough piece of wood, clean it thoroughly before commencing.
Now, lay the piece in place and firmly fasten the faceplate. Take care not to place the screws along the grain, as this may split the wood unevenly. Finally, mark the center of the wood piece, and place it between the lathe centers.
After this, you need to select the right chisel for the job. It’s best to go with one that’ll give you the required depth of indentation. You need to place the chisel on the tool, and slowly advance it towards the turning wood. Over multiple passes, push the tool more deeply into the wood.
Towards the final stage of cutting, increase the lathe speed, and take greater care not to make mistakes. Once done, remove the cut pieces carefully.
The final tool on our list, this is a device that you’re sure to have seen in any carpenter’s workshop. A plane is used to cut wood in long strokes that shave off thin strips from the wood. Here also, the primary requirement is a sharp-edged blade.
While sharpening, take care to stick to an angle of 25-degrees for most wood types. For certain soft varieties of wood, you may use a 20 to 23-degree sharpening angle. Also, adjust the depth wheel based on the depth of the cut required.
Finally, plane through the whole length of the wood for making the cut. While doing so, make sure you go in the direction of the grain. This is essential so that you get a smooth surface and don’t damage the wood.
Plane the wood from one side to the other. Typically, cutting wood with a plane requires multiple passes, and the job can be a strenuous one. So be confident that you’re up for it before starting on the task.
Conclusion
And there you have it, folks! The top tools that you can use to cut wood without a saw. Now, that wasn’t too difficult, was it?
Cutting wood is one of the basic operations that any DIY enthusiast or woodwork professional needs to carry out in the course of a project. And while a saw is always the primary choice for cutting wood, it may not always be available.
But able professionals are not daunted by the lack of a tool. Instead, they improvise and make do with what they have. The above were just examples of the many ways in which tools, which we usually associate with other tasks, can be used to cut wood.
A word of advice for those just starting, however. All the tools described here are sharp instruments and need careful handling. So before you set out to cut wood, make sure that you take the required precautions for your safety.
And if you can think of any other tool that can be used to cut wood, then don’t hesitate to let us know. We’re always happy to hear what you have to say.
Till then, cut away! And don’t forget to improvise.
Cleaning a carburetor is not as difficult as you may perceive. If it looks and sounds dangerous, read on.
Are you under the impression that lawnmowers need to be taken to garages or a repair store every time you need to get it cleaned? Let us break the bubble. With a few essential pieces of equipment, you can do the job at home itself.
But again, you must take specific precautionary measures beforehand. If there are problems with the mower, it is best to let an expert handle the job. But if the mower is working fine, then you can do the job yourself.
Let’s proceed to the tools that are required for this process, and we will also be giving you tips along the way so as to not go wrong. The engines will be purring perfectly by the end of this guide.
How to Clean the Lawn Mower Carburetor Without Removing It?
Required Tools for Cleaning
Now that you have decided to clean the machine instead of taking it apart, you will need the following sets of equipment for partial cleaning.
Air compressor gun
First, before using any other tool, an air compressor gun needs to be used to remove any visible dirt from the machine. There are chances that lumps of grass or soil may be stuck with grease in some areas of the machine. Use this device to blow off the dirt, and then rags can be used to clean it further.
Screwdriver
A screwdriver is essential in any place where screws need to be removed. Here you can choose a Philips product for opening the filter. It can also be used for opening snapped on parts of the machine. Again, if you feel you do not know how to go about using a screwdriver, opt for a plastic card, which is a safer choice and will help in the process.
Aerosol cleaner
For those who do not know what an aerosol cleaner is, it is a liquid solution that is generally used to clean electrical equipment. It can be used on all the parts as well as any other device which runs on fuel. This solution works wonders for machines and keeps them free from rust and other forms of discharge.
Rags
Cotton rags are a must while working with machinery and machine parts. You will be soiling your hands multiple times, and would not want the grease to remain on the fingers for long. So, make sure that you carry a piece of cloth to clean your hands as well as to clean the carburetor.
Flashlight or headlamps
It is essential to have the inner parts of the carburetor visible to the naked eye. So, make sure that you have a flashlight or headlamp while working because even if the room is well lit, the parts may not be visible. A headlamp is a better choice, as this will keep both your hands from being occupied.
Kinds of Lawn Mowers
There are mainly three types of lawn mowers presently available.
Traditional
The traditional lawnmower is one that is devoid of any engine. It works on kinetic energy that is produced when the blades of the wheels inside keep turning. It is a pretty basic machine and cannot be expected to run very efficiently.
Walk-behind
The walk-behind lawn mowers work very smoothly, and you only have to push it where you want the grass to be cut. It slices off the grass and leaves a neat looking lawn. Blades below this machine, which is powered with the help of a carburetor, are the main tools that cut through your lawn.
Ride-on
The last type is the ride-on lawnmower, and yes, it is fun to operate. One just has to sit on it and steer it in the right direction. This is essential for larger fields where walking would be very tiresome. In such cases, this machine cuts off grass efficiently and quickly.
Steps to Have a Clean Carburetor
Before starting this process, you need to assess the condition of the mower. If you are using it on a daily basis and it is maintained well, then we are assuming it is in good condition.
Have you left your gadget in the garage for long, and there is rust on its body, or the mower has seen a lot of rain and is filled with dirt? If that is the case, this process will not work. The mower would be needing professional servicing and has to be taken down to the repair shop to be deep cleansed.
We will now begin with the steps to take care of a machine that is in good working condition.
Step 1
Firstly, to prevent any kind of mishap or injury, make sure the device is switched off. We will require you to switch it on in the middle, but it has to be shut down to begin with.
Step 2
Your second work would be to analyze every part of the unit that is visible to you. This is a required step before proceeding further. For instance, if you see a wire which has been torn off, it may have been a rodent’s doing.
If you see any parts which are rusted, there is a chance that the machine was damp and did not dry up instantly. This led to rusting inside the device. Making a note of these points is important because it will help you decide if you want to go forward with partial clean up or if disassembly is required.
We would advise you here to take some pictures of how the carburetor looks presently. This will help you in the end when you are trying to put everything back in place.
Step 3
We will begin with the air filter. Remember that this can be partially dirty or extremely dirty, depending on your usage. All the air that is pulled in passes through the filter, and thus there is a high chance that it would be very dirty. You could use a rag to clean this, or you may choose to do it with a vacuum cleaner.
See if the air filter is removable as it can be better to remove and clean both sides of it.
Step 4
Focus on all the internal parts of the cleaner with a flashlight or headlamp. There can be an exposed wire, and you do not want to be touching it or having any other wire touch the end. Also, a slight pull may tear a wire. So be very careful while working with the parts.
Any exposed wire should not come in contact with another wire or lumps of grass. This could cause a fire as the grass is inflammable.
Also, since carburetors have dark paint, it may be difficult to see rust, discoloration, or grass stuck inside. A light source will guide you to find these.
This is actually an excellent habit to pursue if you want to become a DIY mechanic or an expert at fixing/cleaning parts. This helps you gain knowledge about the parts.
Step 5
This is where the air compressor gun comes into use. The machine must have seen a lot of grass and dirt throughout its lifetime, and there will be specks of it in the inside of your device.
There are parts which you can only reach with a lot of difficulties, and we would suggest not to do so with your bare hands. It could turn out to be a dangerous endeavor. Use an air compressor gun to clean out the dirt and debris from inside.
A word of caution here. Do not use the highest setting to do this activity. It may end up dislodging a part of a wire. Use it on medium mode for best performance.
Step 6
Now it's time to take out the aerosol cleaner. Do not use water or spray water on the parts. This may cause some portions to rust, and the machine would break down completely. Aerosol cans have a solution which tends to stick to parts and are made to be used explicitly with electrical devices.
Turn on the machine now as every component inside has been cleaned. The cleaner has to move inside the engine completely, and so it is essential to be turned on.
Spray aerosol liquid in the middle of the carburetor in 10 -15 pulses. It is time to let the machine work for another minute. This ensures that the liquid spreads throughout the device, and we can attain full coverage.
After a minute, turn it off and spray the liquid on to the throat of your machine properly. This ensures that you cover the lower plate, which may also have accumulated grime and moss. Make sure it is absolutely clean before proceeding.
Step 7
Now that you have allowed the air compressor gun and aerosol liquid to work their magic on the device, it is time to use your rag for complete cleaning. First, dampen the rug and then use it to wipe off leftover grime.
The rug should be damp and not dripping, as that may lead to damaging parts. Keep rinsing the cloth once in a while, so dirt does not get transferred from one region to another. Continue doing this until every part is visibly clean.
Step 8
After you have completed the job, inspect every part using a light source. View the pictures that you had initially taken of your machine to compare and see if the parts are in order.
To test if the product is working alright, start the engine and keep it running for a few minutes. It should start smoothly without much sound. If it is vibrating less or you hear no chugging, kudos! The job is done.
Why does a carburetor stop working?
The engine can face blockages because of the constant dirt and grass it collects. Also, it may so happen that the machine accumulates a lot of dust and dirt if kept idle for an extended period.
Gasoline deposits, varnishes, and oil deposit may be other materials which can lead to the formation of blockages inside the machine. This directly affects the functioning, and the machine works slower or makes a lot of sounds while it operates.
Tips
If your machine is under warranty, first call up customer care and see if the device can be cleaned up for free. If that is the case, it is best to send it off for professional cleaning.
It is vital that you keep cleaning every part once in a while. This will keep the device running and in good condition, and you would not have to take it to the store for deep cleaning often.
You must know the exact problem that your device is facing before taking the gadget to a store for deep cleansing. Shops tend to make money out of it as they are not expecting someone to know a lot about the working of the device.
The aerosol cleaner has to be of the right variety. If you get a wrong type of cleaner, it may lead to malfunctioning. The bathroom’s disinfectant cleaner is not the right choice and cannot be used as an alternative. You will find a specific product dedicated to lawnmowers.
Final Words
We will again want to reiterate the fact that deep cleansing is not replaceable. You will have to take the mower for deep cleansing once in a while. But partial cleaning at home can be done once a week or once in two weeks, depending on your usage. This will keep the mower working well and the interiors free from rust.
We are sure that you are now ready to clean your own lawn mower. For added help, you can also look up some YouTube tutorials regarding this topic. Let us know how it worked out for you in the comments section below.
Are you fascinated by the waterfall river table that you just watched on YouTube?
It’s time you create such a masterpiece all by yourself using epoxy resins. Epoxy resins are fun to work with but are tricky to handle. They can either create exquisitely beautiful pieces or lead to a terrifying mess.
However, if you’re a DIY lover just like us, then epoxy resins must be your favorite too. They add life to your otherwise dull surfaces and make them bright and shiny. Unfortunately, epoxies turn yellow over time. Thus, what once was bright and shiny is now unpleasant and ugly.
Therefore, colored epoxies are the best for all your DIY work. We decided to pen down a complete guide on “how to color clear epoxy resin” for all the newbies out there. Read on to know how you can create stunning artwork by adding colors to clear epoxy resins and start your own DIY business.
How to Color Clear Epoxy Resin – Coloring Resin 101
Coloring Resin
If you’re a DIY enthusiast going with the trend, we bet you know how intimidating it is working with resins. However, once you get the hang of it, you’ll find it easy to work with it. Clear and colorless epoxy resins are versatile and offer a plethora of applications.
Nevertheless, adding a dash of color to your clear and colorless epoxy resin will let your creativity flow. You can create stunning artwork such as jewelry, keychain charms, pendants, coasters, and much more.
Whether filling cracks on an old table or designing a river tabletop, colored epoxies can help you create stunning DIY artwork that you can sell online for thousands of dollars.
Now, there are a variety of pigments available on the market that you can use to add colors to clear epoxy resin. But, not all of them get along well with epoxy resins. So, which epoxy resin will work best for you? We’ve got all the answers for you in this section.
If you want to give a unique look to your DIY artwork, adding pigment powders to clear epoxy resins will transform the look of every project. Pigment powders’ bright, vivid hues are perfect for jewelry making.
When mixed with epoxy resin, they produce subtle color changes that enhance the aesthetic appeal of the finished product. Simply add a pinch of pigment powder to your epoxy resin, and stir well to make sure no lumps are formed. This is it. You’re done! Now pour it onto the jewelry molds or the canvas for geode art.
While searching for ways to color your clear epoxy resins, you might have stumbled upon resin dyes. Haven’t you? If you don’t know yet, let me tell you that resin dyes are compatible with almost all kinds of resins.
After mixing Part A and Part B epoxy resins, add a few drops of resin dyes to the measuring cup. Also, make sure to stir the mixture properly until you’re confident that the dye has mixed evenly with the epoxy resin.
They are most popular among DIY enthusiasts, mainly because they are easy to mix with epoxy resins. Moreover, they are available in both paste and liquid forms. Also, you can find both transparent and opaque pigments according to your needs.
While light can pass through the casting, transparent dyes add color to your epoxy resins. Hence, you may use them for making pendants, jewelry, coasters, or charms. Meanwhile, the opaque ones do not let the lights pass through them. Therefore, they’re perfect for geode canvas, wall clocks, river tabletops, and the list goes on!
If you’re a newbie with epoxy resins, resin dyes will be the perfect pick for you, mainly because they are easy to mix and work with. However, if you’re looking for more options, then keep reading, for the list goes on!
For all your DIY countertops, tabletops, or waterfall river table, mica resin powder is a must-have in your DIY resin kit.To be honest, this is one of our favorites, too. Mica resin powders add an exquisite and subtle shine to your projects.
Whether you want to create riverbed tables or fill the cracks of your old coffee table, mica resin powders will be a perfect choice for creating stunning masterpieces. Also, it mixes easily with resin without forming lumps into the mixture.
While working with molds, you can even brush the corners of the molds with mica powders to coat the borders. However, you must keep in mind to swirl the mixture with a toothpick after pouring it into the molds. That will surely yield amazing results. But, remember this is slightly more expensive than others.
Another popular resin colorant is alcohol ink. Its beautiful, rich saturation makes it a perfect pick for creating resin petri dish art. After mixing part A and part B resin, add a few drops of ink in the mixture and stir well.
However, you can also add a few drops of alcohol ink after pouring the resin on the molds. Alcohol inks also work best for designing tumblers. Simply cover the tumbler with epoxy resin, and pour a few drops of ink on the tumbler. And your gorgeous marbled cup is ready for use.
Ever thought of pairing acrylic paints with epoxy resins? If not, now is the time to try it. Because of their wide variety of colors, acrylic paints are best to enhance the aesthetic appeal of your objects.
It is an excellent colorant choice because of its abrasion and water-resistant properties. Plus, they are highly durable. However, you must mix acrylic paint and epoxy resin together with great care. It’s best to stick to a ratio of 1:10.
We recommend going for acrylic paints only if you’re a pro at handling epoxy resins. Otherwise, it’s futile to choose acrylic paint as a colorant for epoxy resins. For all newbies, we suggest sticking to other colorants.
If you’re a DIY enthusiast who loves to add a dramatic effect to DIY projects, it’s time you lay hands on glitter powders. From holographic to classic metallic, there are limitless varieties to let your creative juices flow.
Although they don’t really add colors to epoxy resin, they add stunning effects to your pieces. With just a pinch of glitter, you can transform your dull object into a bright, eye-catching one.
How To Color Clear Epoxy Resin
While you know which colorants go along well with epoxy resins, adding colors perfectly to clear epoxy resins still remains a challenging task. When you add any colorant to epoxy resin, the mixing ratio between the hardener and resin is altered. Therefore, it is important you work carefully to avoid creating any mess.
So, herein, we’ve laid down the steps on how to color clear epoxy resin just for you! Take a look -
Step 1| Keep Things Handy
We all are aware of the fact that resin cures pretty quickly. Therefore, keep things handy to avoid any last-minute rush. Resin, hardener, mixing cups, ice cream sticks, blow torch, and everything you may need.
Step 2| Mix Hardener And Resin
Whether you’re about to create a stunning countertop or a beautiful two-tier cake stand, the first thing you need to do is to prepare the epoxy resin mixture. Therefore, the most important step to creating your masterpiece is to mix the hardener and resin in the proportion recommended by the manufacturer.
Most epoxy resins mix at a ratio of 3:1 or 2:1. However, we recommend you follow the instructions given by the manufacturer for an error-free experience. To ensure you mix accurate proportions, you should use a resin calculator and a weighing machine.
Step 3| Add Colorant To The Mixture
After mixing hardener and resin in equal proportion, it’s time to add colorants to them. If you’re using pigment powder or glitters, add no more than a pinch to the mixture. Stir it well to mix the pigment evenly with the resin. Also, make sure lumps aren’t formed.
However, if you go for the liquid pigments or resin dyes, you need to pour just a few drops. Stir it well to mix the color evenly. Alternatively, follow the 1:10 ratio with acrylic paints. As a rule of thumb, add no more than 5% colorant to your epoxy resins because adding more will hamper its functionality. Also, you must use only high-quality branded colorants for epoxy resins because they yield better results.
Coloring Epoxy Resin| Tips And Tricks
Working with epoxy resin is quite a challenge. Hence, you must work with utmost caution to avoid making artsy-craftsy a messy affair. Therefore, we’ve mentioned a few tips and tricks for you. Check them out.
Opt for highly pigmented colors because they do not tamper much with the mixing ratio of epoxy resin.
Always mix the colorant with epoxy resin in a small batch to see whether it is compatible with it or not.
Add colorants to only those epoxy resins that you’ve handled in the past, as it will be easier for you to control the reaction - if any occurs.
Using water-based colorants with epoxy resins is a big no-no!
Choose only colorants that are sufficiently lightfast because this will ensure the longevity of your project.
Remember, resins dislike moisture, so avoid adding more than what is necessary.
Safety Measures To Take While Coloring Epoxy Resin
A Well-Ventilated Space
First off, a well-ventilated space is important for working with epoxy resins. Its fumes are carcinogenic, and of course, you wouldn’t want to inhale them. Therefore, work outdoors.
However, if you work indoors, make sure you work near the windows. Switch on the ceiling fan to ensure proper ventilation.
Wear Safety Glasses
Resins don’t splash because of their thick viscosity. However, it’s better to wear safety glasses to protect your eyes while working with epoxy resins.
Put On A Plastic Apron
Spills and drips are inevitable while working with epoxy resin. And let’s be honest, who would want to ruin their beautiful shirt with epoxy resin stains? Of course, no one! That’s why we recommend you wear a plastic apron while working on your masterpiece. You can either clean it after work or toss it in the bin.
Wear Gloves
Epoxy resins are chemicals, and you need to protect yourself from them. Therefore, you must wear a pair of gloves to keep your hands safe. We recommend you use nitrile gloves against latex ones that obstruct curing.
But, what should you do if resin accidentally gets on your hands? Baby wipes are great for wiping resin from your skin, so keep that handy.
Next, wash your hands with soap and water. Pumice soap works great for sticky resins. Also, keep acetone or alcohol handy to avert the reaction of resin on your skin.
Use A Respirator
After following every safety measure, don’t forget to put on a respirator. To be precise, you’re dealing with chemicals. And so, it’s better to be safe than sorry. If you think fumeless resin isn’t dangerous just because they don’t smell, you’re wrong. All epoxy resins are harmful and so put on a respirator while working.
Use Epoxy Resin Formulated For Art Purposes
You must buy only those epoxy resins that conform to ASTM D-4236 because they are safe for DIY use. However, this does not mean they are non-toxic, location-safe, or food-safe. We recommend you read the instructions along with the do’s and don’ts of the product you’ll be using to understand the product better. Also, don’t forget to use protective gear.
What Can You Do With Colored Epoxy Resin
Adding colors to epoxy resin allows you to turn your imagination into reality. One of the best things that you can create with epoxy resin is river tabletops. Adding them to your living room is sure to enhance the aesthetic appeal of your home.
Moreover, if you’re into DIYs, you’ll love creating this masterpiece. Also, you can open up your DIY crafts store and make hundreds of bucks by selling these online. Simply add a few drops of blue pigment to the resin mixture and pour it on the wooden tabletop.
From pouring colored epoxy in the center coupled with wood planks on the sides to a live edge table with irregular pieces of wood with colored epoxies, you can create anything you want. Not only do the colored epoxies add aesthetic beauty to the table, but they also act as an adhesive to bond the wood strongly.
Also, you can use them to design countertops, tabletops, geode artwork, wall clocks, and decorating tumblers. They are best for all your DIY projects. One of the benefits of using colored epoxy is that they don’t turn yellow over time, unlike clear epoxy resins. As such, your objects and surfaces remain bright and shiny for years. Thus, they age much better than clear epoxies.
How to Color Clear Epoxy Resin FAQ
1. Is Painting Epoxy Resin In Color Possible?
Yes, it is possible to paint epoxy resin in color. However, we recommend you use premium-quality two-component paint or car paints. However, adding color directly to the mixture during the casting process will yield a better result than painting it afterward.
2. What Doesn’t Work To Color Resin?
Epoxy resin is challenging to deal with. Therefore, you must avoid using nail polish, oil paints, and latex paints.
Nail polish will turn your epoxy resin into a hideous amber. Oil paints will form lumps and create a mess. To be honest, we’ve tried latex paint and found that it makes resin stringy. So, make sure you never make the mistake of adding these to your epoxy resin.
3. Are Colored Epoxy Resins Heat-Resistant?
Yes, they are heat-resistant up to 100 degrees celsius. However, it also depends upon the brand, the colorants, and the products used. Therefore, we recommend you layer the colored resin tabletops with a layer of transparent resin to add extra protection.
4. Are Protective Gears Necessary While Working With Epoxy Resin?
Of course, it is necessary for you to wear a respirator and safety glasses while working with epoxy resin. Epoxy resins are no doubt chemicals, and are therefore toxic. To keep yourself safe from health hazards, you must always use a respirator.
Final Words
From aesthetically pleasing countertops to pendants and tumblers, colored epoxy resin lets you create whatever you want. Add colors to epoxy resins and create all that you want. Live edge and waterfall table tops are fun to create but don’t forget to follow safety measures.
However, handling epoxy resin is no child’s play. Therefore, if you’re a newbie, we recommend you experiment with epoxy resin crafts under the guidance of an expert because epoxy resins aren’t forgiving.
With that, we come to the end of our informative guide. We hope we were able to answer your questions regarding coloring epoxy resins. In case you have any queries, reach out to us. We’ll be glad to help you.
Hope you have a fun time experimenting with epoxy resin!
To clean a screen printing machine, a few tools like a pressure washer, emulsion remover, and spray tank are essential. The cleaning process includes three key steps - removing ink, reclaiming, and degreasing or you can also use a dip tank.
A screen printing machine is an amazing tool for creating cool prints and merchandise, especially if you run a screen printing shop, but cleaning it is a daunting task.
However, over time I have found a few hacks to get the job done easily, so today, I am going to share those helpful tips with you in this handy guide. Keep reading to find out how to clean screen printing screens effortlessly!
How To Clean Screen Printing Machines
Let’s discuss what you will need to clean your screen printing machine and how to go about it.
Pressure washer
Emulsion remover
Wax paper
Paper towels
Spray tank
Scrubbing brush
Dip tank (optional)
Gloves
Protective goggles
Cleaning solution
Cleaning Screen Printing Screens
Wear your protective gear before following the steps mentioned in this section -
1. Remove The Tape
Remove any plastic or tape from the surface or sides of the screen to make sure that all the ink is removed. Remember to be thorough because leftover tape can prevent some of the ink from washing out.
2. Remove Excess Ink
Next, you have to remove the excess ink deposited on the screen using a squeegee. You can also use wax paper for ink removal, as it is a straightforward method that doesn’t involve any chemicals. So, wipe off as much ink as possible using a tool of your choice.
A lot of ink will come out during this step and since I don’t like wasting the leftover ink, I usually scrape it off in a container to use later.
3. Reclaim Screens
Reclaiming screens is the most crucial step and needs to be carried out very carefully. If not done properly, you might need to repeat the whole process, as the dirty screen won’t get cleaned entirely.
Lay the screen on a horizontal surface with the print side facing upwards, then spray a generous amount of reclaimer on it and let the screen sit for 2 minutes. Note that the waiting time can vary for different screen reclaimers, so refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for an accurate estimate.
But your screen printing screens can get damaged if the cleaner is left on for too long, so do pay attention to the sitting time.
If you don’t want to use a reclaiming spray, you can also get the job done by soaking the screen in isopropyl alcohol. To do that, soak paper towels or a rag in alcohol, wrap them around the screen and let them sit for a couple of minutes. There are fewer chances of damaging your screen through this method, but on the other hand, it is slower and not as effective.
4. Scrub The Screen
After letting the reclaimer sit for a while, you will have to break the emulsion by scrubbing the screen printing screens using a brush or emulsion remover. Once that’s done, use a pressure washer (preferably ranging between 1,500 and 2,000 PSI) to wash off the reclaimer and residue.
5. Increase The Tension Of The Mesh
If the ink buildup isn’t cleaned even after using a power washer, you will need to check the tension of your screen. Screen prints with loose tension collect ink very quickly and unnecessarily, so, for retensionable screens, you can increase the mesh tension to make cleaning easier.
6. Degrease
Repeat the previous steps on both sides of the screen before finally degreasing it. When all the ink is out, apply a degreaser on the screen to remove any leftover stains. If you miss this step, the emulsion might not stick to the screen printing frames, and also remember to pressure wash the degreaser after 3-5 minutes.
7. Get Rid Of Any Ghost Image
Lastly, keep your screens near a window or at a spot where there is plenty of sunlight to let them dry quickly. Here’s a simple hack to avoid stencil damage of pinholes - do not dry your screens in a humid room. And if you see any ghost images, get rid of them using a haze remover.
How To Clean Screen Printing Machine FAQs
Can a Cricut machine screen print?
If you are wondering can a Cricut machine screen print, let me tell you that it can efficiently screen print. But it is a little tricky to use, and you will need special supplies for it. However, the good part is these supplies are fairly cheap, and the outcome is much more beautiful than regular screen prints.
If you plan to use a Cricut machine, be sure to keep the following items handy:
Speedball screen and ink
Permanent vinyl
Masking and transfer tape
Squeegee
Weeding tools
What are dip tanks?
Dip tanks are handy little containers that allow you to reclaim your screens. You can simply leave your screen in the tank to loosen up the stencil, as they make the cleaning process hassle-free and prove efficient alternatives to manual cleaning.
But if you are worried about the chemicals, I have good news. Dip tanks are made from polyethylene as opposed to heavy plastic containers sold at craft stores, which makes screens resistant to the chemicals present in the dip tank solution.
Your screen printer can automatically insert the used screen in the tank and after about 5 minutes, the ink will wash off from the screen into the solution. It is then sprayed with a power sprayer to get rid of residual ink and emulsion.
What is a screen printing machine used for?
For people wondering what is a screen printing machine used for, it’s one of the most versatile printing techniques used to design goodies and merchandise of all shapes and sizes. Some of its applications are:
Designing clothes
Producing stickers and decals
Printing product labels
For textiles and fabric designs
Printing logos on merchandise, sports products, medical equipment
How To Clean Screen Printing Machine Final words
Now that you know how to clean screens, your next print job might be easier than you think. With the help of the right tools, accurate timing, and a little patience, cleaning screens becomes more manageable.
First, remove the tape and wipe off the extra ink before you use a screen reclaimer to remove the image stain. Once that’s done, pressure wash it, scrub it, and degrease it to make the printing screen spotlessly clean.
Tip
If you want to save money on your future prints, invest in a dip tank, as you will need only a dip tank solution rather than different reclamation chemicals. The solution can be used multiple times in the tank, so overall it’s a very cost-effective option.
It can be irritating to get paint off your brush. However, there is a way to avoid this tedious process, and we have the solution.
If you are into DIY painting projects, you must have dealt with many hardened brush sets. While you might buy a quality brush, you may not be able to maintain it well.
Whether you are using polyurethane, house, or oil paints, the bristles need to be taken care of. They should not be exposed to strong chemicals directly without proper consultation. Also, if the bristles are made of natural hair, then they have a higher chance of breaking off or getting diluted in chemicals.
We were facing the same problem when we decided to do our research on it. After that, we decided to create our own guide about how to clean polyurethane brush kits.
So, dive in!
How To Clean Polyurethane Brush Kits
What Are The Supplies Needed For Cleaning Polyurethane From A Brush?
Before you can get the paint off, you will need to keep all the required materials in one place. Remember that just washing the brush with hot water along with soap is not enough. Dried polyurethane can be quite tough to remove, and you will require a set of supplies for it.
Moving on, you might find some of the ingredients in your house while others need to be bought. You will be needing:
Paper towels
Brush cleaner
Mineral spirits
Plastic containers or glasses
Plastic Bag
Some people use fabric softeners for cleaning dried paint, but you cannot fully trust it. If you have used water-based paints, then soap will not be able to remove it. Plus, you cannot wash it in a basin as all those chemicals could damage your drainage system.
Moreover, if the chemicals reach the sewer system, it could cause more damage. Hence, try purchasing mineral spirits and consult your local hardware store to learn about how to dispose of the chemicals.
Cleaning Process
Step 1| Cleaning With Paper Towels
To begin with, you will need mineral spirits in a container for dipping the towel. In case you cannot get it, use lacquer or paint thinner for this job. These thinners can remove polyurethane and oil paints. But be careful if you are using anything other than mineral spirits as they might remove the paint from good quality brushes as well as damage them.
Next, take the mineral spirit and dip a paper towel in it. Then the brushes can be cleaned with a paper towel soaked in mineral spirits. It should work well with the brush bristles and release some of the polyurethane from a brush. However, you will still have paint on the brush after soaking.
It will only make the process easier and ensure that the paintbrush has less paint on it. Please remember to wear gloves while working to prevent mineral spirits from touching your skin. Additionally, ensure that all windows are open and the area is very well ventilated because the fumes need to leave the room as fast as possible.
Step 2| Using Mineral Spirits
Next, take a good amount of mineral spirits in a container. Again, you can use a paint thinner but be very careful with it. Then dip your paintbrush in the solution so that all the bristles are in the spirit solution. You can get it for both a natural brush and a synthetic brush.
Typically, the brush bristles that are covered with polyurethane paint need to completely emerge, while the upper part of the ferrule needs to be kept away from the paint thinner.
Step 3| Keeping It Soaked
Once some of the polyurethane has come off, you can fill another container with mineral spirits and put your polyurethane brush in it. The dried polyurethane will slowly come off as you swirl the hard paintbrush inside the container. You can then leave the brush in the fluid overnight. Do not wash polyurethane brushes at this time.
Take it out of the liquid to check before you dip it again. This is based on your judgment, and you can handle it accordingly.
Step 4| Taking Out Dirty Mineral Spirits
Remember that harsh chemicals like mineral spirits cannot be thrown in the sink or on the ground outside your house. You will need to take the dirty mineral spirits and ensure that it reaches a hazardous recycling plant. The spirit, paint thinner, or oil paint mixed with the remaining polyurethane can be caustic and harmful for drain pipes.
Step 5| Repeat The Process
Cleaning polyurethane brush sets can be a difficult job, and the bristles deserve to be completely free from it. Now, you might want to repeat the entire process as the polyurethane coating may not disappear completely.
So, go forward and take some mineral spirits to repeat the entire process. Swirl the cleaning brushes in the formula before you leave it for a few hours. Then clean again to see if the paint has been more or less removed. The second attempt should ensure maximum cleaning power and should make your brush cleaner.
Also, please avoid vigorous scrubbing as that could lead to the breakage of natural hair bristles.
Step 6| Rinse well
Once you have removed most of the polyurethane from the brush, it is time to bring out hot water. Keep your brushes in hot water for a while to loosen excess paint. You can also use dish soap along with water to create a soapy water mixture. This should make it easier to wash polyurethane brush kits.
Your brush bristles deserve proper care, and hence, you need to be very gentle with the brushes. After washing it thoroughly, you will need to use a brush comb. A brush comb will slowly clean polyurethane off the bristles.
Step 7| Dry The Brushes Well
Next, you will need to clean the brushes well with paper towels and check if all the dried polyurethane has been removed. Make sure that you do not tear the bristles while you are taking out the polyurethane from a brush. You might also end up loosening the bristles, which will create further problems. Gently wipe with a towel and then keep them dry.
Once the brushes are dry, you will need to store them. If you have used natural brushes, then you will need to keep them wrapped in paper. Use old newspapers for this purpose. However, if synthetic brushes need to be taken care of, you can wrap them up in a plastic sheet. Both the materials will keep brush bristles dry and prevent them from breaking or bending in time.
How To Clean Oil-Based Polyurethane Brush: An Alternative Method
If you are using oil-based polyurethane, then you can try working with water, dish soap, and paint thinner. It is best if you wear gloves as well as well-ventilated masks before starting work. Keep the area well-ventilated so that all the toxic fumes can leave the house immediately.
Using A Thinner
First of all, you will need to get hold of paint thinners. This can be bought from any local store. Once you have it, pour some into a cup. Ensure that there is enough fluid in the bowl to cover the hard paintbrush bristles. There is no need to fill it to the top.
Next, you will need to dip the paintbrush in the paint thinner and keep it in the same way for the next 20 minutes or so. This will help the paint in loosening up slowly.
After 20 minutes or half an hour, start bending and moving the brush from one side to another. It should be bent in such a way that the thinner touches the metal area of the brush. This will keep it from drying or hardening up.
Then it is time to take the brush out. Wring it gently so that the remaining paint thinner leaves the brush along with the paint. You can repeat the process till the paint comes off well, and you have a clean polyurethane brush.
Cleaning The Paint Brush
Wear your gloves before beginning the process. You will need clean gloves to keep your skin safe while washing the brush. Then put some dishwashing soap on the brush and work it well. Ensure that the natural or synthetic bristles are covered with it before rinsing them out.
We will recommend rubbing it well to get all the dried or dissolved paint out. Then rinse and wash out the soap. Wash for some time to make sure that all the soap has left the bristles. If any of it remains, it will only harden up, and you might face difficulty in cleaning it.
Drying The Brush
Now, it is time to dry the brush well without letting it harden up. You can take a microfiber brush to clean the bristles well. Do it until no water drips from the body. Once it is done, you can let the brush rest for a while.
If you want to paint with oil paint, then there are ways to clean a brush without paint thinner.
Storage And Care Guide
Now that you know how to clean polyurethane brush kits, there are a few things that you must keep in mind when it comes to brush care. Be very careful with the brushes and ensure that bristles do not come out of the metal part. Permanent breakage would lead to damage of the entire brush, which is not needed.
Short Breaks
If you are painting a large space, you might need to take breaks in between. Generally, one would keep the brush on a newspaper, paper towel, or an old rag while they take a break. Remember that even if you leave it for half an hour, the brush could be spoiled. There are more efficient ways to store the brush, and you can try them out.
In case of a short break, it is best to leave the brush in the paint tub itself. Ensure that one-third of the bristles are inside the paint can. Then the paintbrush will not dry up at all, and you can begin painting as soon as you return.
Short Breaks
If you are going to take a longer break, then leaving the brush inside the paint may not be a good idea. Some would want to wrap the brush in a sheet of plastic and store it. But again, if you leave it in this way for a long period, then the plastic may stick to the brush as the paint dries.
The plastic wrap will contain air inside, and that aids in the process of drying up the extra paint. Also, plastic will let moisture get inside, hardening it up.
A good alternative to plastic is aluminum foil. This foil will keep the brush dipped in polyurethane paint safe and prevent it from drying up fast. However, remember that you need to wrap the brush well with aluminum leaving no space in between. Then you can cut off the remaining foil bits. This should prevent hardened bristles, and you can go on long breaks.
Water-based and Oil-Based Polyurethane
If you are using oil-based polyurethane, then it is best to choose natural brushes. Natural bristles are better suited, and the oil-based paint will be applied evenly. Also, it is easier to clean oil-based polyurethane from natural bristles.
However, if you are working with water-based polyurethane, then synthetic brushes will fit the bill. Synthetic bristles will not hold on to the water-based paint and will help you remove the hardened polyurethane easily.
Moving on, you should know that both oil-based and water-based polyurethane is used for floor finishing. It provides a lovely shine, and now, you can clean the brushes well too.
Conclusion
Once you learn a good clean-up technique, it should save you a lot of money in the long run. You should be able to make a brush last longer, and you do not have to pay for a new one. Some people even use a fabric softener to keep the brushes clean.
Also, do not try to scrub the hard paint from brushes as that might have a detrimental effect. Just follow all the instructions above carefully. That should make the paint leave the bristles by itself.
It is finally time to wrap up, and you can let us know how you clean brushes in the comment section below. We will come back soon with another comprehensive guide for you.
Although having clean gutters sounds easy, it is not quite a simple task. Some might believe that installing gutter guards takes care of the problem once and for all.
However, the truth is that even the best gutter guards need cleaning. But, if the system is better, it doesn’t have to be cleaned as frequently. The job of the gutter guard is to protect gutters from twigs, leaves, and other debris, all the while allowing water to pass through them unhindered.
But, over time, debris does start accumulating in the gutters and needs to be hosed out. Although it is an easy task, it should not be left unattended if you wish to avoid damage to the house.
So, the important question here is - how should you effectively clean gutter guards? Let us get into the details without any further delay.
Why Do We Need Gutter Guards?
Although we’ve touched upon it briefly, a gutter guard can be defined as something which protects our gutters from debris and dirt. It could become problematic if these accumulated too much. Most gutter guards work in the same way; they catch small leaves and the castoffs of trees, allowing us to blow them away once they’re dry. Further, they allow the rainfall to pass down the roof before going into the gutter.
There are various designs when it comes to these guards, and homeowners can easily install them too. Alternatively, you can hire professionals to take care of the installation. Apart from keeping gutters clean, these guards also help in various other ways.
Firstly, gutter guards prevent animals from making nests or homes. There’s no need to frequently climb up a ladder to clean the gutter, making it safer. The guards can easily be attached to existing gutters, and they prevent water from getting pooled. In turn, this stops too many bugs from accumulating around stagnant water.
Not only do the guards protect the gutters and keep them functional for a longer time, but they also help in rainwater harvesting, for those interested.
How to Clean Gutter Guards?
First off, you should do away with the notion that gutter guards eliminate the need to clean gutters at all. Several products might claim to do so, but it merely means that you don’t have to constantly clean them out after every storm or when leaves fall in autumn. That aside, it is recommended that you check them annually and clean them as needed.
Now, before we get to the steps of cleaning the gutter guard, here’s what you’ll need. Grab a drop cloth, a ladder to reach the higher places, hand protection, and a hose if you have someone assisting you.
Finally, this brings us to the step by step cleaning process.
Place the Drop Cloth
Placing the drop cloth should be the first thing to do since it serves as a safety net of sorts. It should ideally be under the area where you’ll be working. This way, the cloth can catch the debris that might fall during the cleaning process.
It saves you from the hassle of having to clean out your lawn or garden bed just to remove the debris from cleaning your gutter guard. Moreover, it protects the bushes or shrubs that might be in the way of the falling debris.
Securing the Ladder
In order to clean the gutter guard, you’ll be on your ladder for a long time. Usually, these guards run along the roof, which means the altitude is rather high, and a fall from that height is most likely to hurt you.
Therefore, it is best to take all possible precautions. Secure the ladder before using it, and take any other additional safety measures that you see fit. If possible, have someone hold the base of the ladder for an additional degree of safety and stability.
Using Hand Protection
Since cleaning the gutter guard requires you to work with your hands, it is best to use protection. We recommend wearing gardening gloves so that you don’t accidentally stab yourself in the hand with a twig or something sharp while cleaning out the gutter.
We recommend keeping the gloves on before climbing the ladder so that you can use both hands for the cleaning process.
Remove Materials Off Guards
Once you’ve put on the gloves and climbed up the ladder, it is time to get to work. First, you should remove all the debris that the guard has caught. Normally, this is a simple enough task. The leaves, twigs, or branches can be swept off with a single stroke of the hand. If something feels stuck, then it is advisable to pull at it gently until the object becomes loose.
Remove the Guard
Notably, this step is only applicable to those who have hinged guards or removable ones. After everything on top of the guard has been cleaned off, you can open it up completely. In the event that you feel the openings are blocked, or if it is a brush style guard, then you might choose to rinse it off.
This opens things up. Further, you can look inside the gutter to see if there are things accumulated that the rainwater hasn’t rinsed. It is ideal for removing anything that can be grasped and keeps the gutter clean too.
Hose Down the Guard
If you see that your gutter guard is not removable, we recommend using a hose. Let the water flow freely through the openings and then go through the gutter. This clears out any possible blockages by removing the dirt that might have accumulated there.
Replace the Guards and Secure Them
In the event that you might have removed the guards, be sure to secure them and put them back in the correct manner. After that, perform a quick check to see if anything is caught in them or blocking them, despite the rinsing or hose down. If everything looks fine, then clean up the site.
Kinds of Gutter Guards and How to Maintain Them
Though there are different kinds of gutter guards, maintaining them and keeping them clean and debris free is rather similar. All the guards are designed to keep debris from getting into the gutter itself. So, occasionally, a branch, twig, or leaf might need removal.
These usually work with your pre-existing gutters. They are very budget-friendly and are easy to install, as well. The bristled brushes almost appear as a large brush that might be used for bottle cleaning. It fits directly into the gutter and allows the water to pass through while catching the larger debris.
To maintain this, you have to clean out some of the debris that might get stuck and also check for the dirt that hasn’t been completely washed through.
These are made of metal, and they fit over the gutter. Thus, water can pass through, but understandably, the perforations stop the debris from doing the same. Here, the debris is accumulated on top, so it is extremely easy to sweep them clean once they are dried up.
These are actually quite similar to the perforated variants. Here, a super fine mesh is placed over the gutter. Thus, the water can flow through easily, thanks to the many open spaces. At the same time, no debris is allowed into the gutters.
Here too, debris might get accumulated at the top. At this time, it would be easy to clean the screen by wiping the top of the gutter guard completely clean.
One might choose to set these into the gutters to allow the water to flow through easily. Although the foam is well equipped to prevent debris from entering, the dense nature of these guards ensures that you have to rinse them from time to time.
Sometimes, you also have to remove some bits that get stuck to the surface, like twigs or a pine needle. This is one of the more inexpensive guards, which is also simple to maintain.
These designs often fit over existing gutters through attachments to the roof. Sometimes, they serve as an entire gutter system, which allows rainwater curving down the gutter and washing the debris away at the same time. Overall, this is considered to be extremely effective, and if installed in the right manner, little to no maintenance is needed for this system.
Final Words
At the end of the day, you have to remember that a clogged gutter can turn into a nightmare for homeowners. The roofs might get damaged as well, so it would be smart to clean the gutters occasionally.
Here, we have shown the different kinds of gutter guards you can install to minimize the hassle of cleaning the gutter itself. But, each of these has to be maintained too. Routine inspections work best, especially after storms or during times when you know the gutters might be exposed to debris.
Hopefully, following the guide here, you will have an easy time cleaning out your gutters. It is best to follow the safety measures we’ve recommended. As an additional tip, we should mention getting a bucket during the cleaning process to keep the debris for later disposal.
If you have any other questions about keeping the gutters and the gutter guards clean, feel free to reach out to us. Adios!
While Gas Stoves definitely have plenty of advantages over electric cook-tops, they fall short when it comes to maintenance.
Gas Stoves have a tendency to get quite greasy and dirty, thanks to all the food spills and high-heat, and getting them cleaned thoroughly can be a really tough job!
Just wiping your stove down and making it shiny is not enough. In order to get your stove really cleaned, you need to take things apart and clean out all the nasty stuff that accumulates in the interiors.
Not only is a clogged gas burner unsanitary, but it can also ruin your burner's efficiency by giving off a weak flame, and hence cause you to incur more costs.
So, if you're struggling to clean your gas burner or have no idea where to start, we are here to help you out! This article will guide you through the entire process of cleaning your gas burner, and give you tips on how to better maintain your gas stove burners.
So let's get started!
Gas Stove Cookware
Before we get started with the actual cleaning process, naturally, you have to declutter first but before that let's first discuss an elementary thing that you can do to ensure your stove doesn't get as messy.
One of the most important but overlooked things that you can do not to create a mess is getting good cookware for cooking On the Gas ! This is not only necessary to maintain better hygiene, but also has a great deal of impact on the quality of your cooking.
You can have the most high-tech kitchen with all the fancy attachments and equipment, but if you don't have good cookware, all that is pretty much useless!
Bad quality pots and pans can entirely ruin the cooking experience for you by causing uneven heat distribution, and often causing your food to burn! Plus, they are much more prone to food spills which are one of the biggest contributing factors towards clogged burners.
So, do yourself a favor, and buy some good quality pots and pans for your kitchen if you haven't already. We promise it will prove to be a great investment!
How to Clean Gas Stove Burners
Cleaning your Gas Stove Burner can be a complicated process, and I have no shame in admitting that I myself struggle with it sometimes. But, by following the steps described below, this chore can become a hell lot easier.
1. Read the Instruction Manual Provided by the Manufacturer
This is the first thing that you need to do before you get started. It helps a lot to know what kind of care is best for your stove and also things that you should avoid.
Different manufacturers have somewhat different mechanics when it comes to Gas Stoves, and knowing which parts are safe to remove and which are not can help you avoid causing serious damage to your gas burner.
If you are confused about how to start your cleaning process, the product manual is a good starting point. They usually come with pretty detailed instructions, and sometimes even recommendations about which cleaning products to use.
2. Assemble the Cleaning Materials
After you have read through the manual and have an idea regarding the process, go ahead and gather all the products and materials that you'd need to get started. Make sure you keep all of them handy and readily available. You don't want to be fumbling around all over your kitchen looking for your cleaning cloths.
You'll need the following items -
Dish Soap
Baking Soda
Cleaning Cloths
Paper Clip or a Straight Pin
Lots of Water
3. Prepare your Stove for Cleaning
Before you start with cleaning, make sure your stove is cool. Turn off all the burners on your oven and give it some time to cool off properly before you start removing the parts. Cleaning a hot stove can result in your hands getting burnt, and that's not good!
Once your burners are cooled down, you can start removing the parts of the stove that can be removed. This includes the burner grates and the caps, along with any other part that can be removed as per the product manual.
Next, you need to fill up your sink with hot water and add a few drops of dish soap into it. If a sink is not available, you can also use a large bucket or a wash basin.
You then need to place your burners and other removable parts into your sink and make sure they are fully submerged. Let them stay there while you clean up the other parts of the stove.
If there is a lot of grease buildup, simply submerging these parts will not be sufficient. To clean up excessively greasy burners, prepare a paste of one part water and one part baking soda. Use a brush to gently scrub the parts to remove the grease and then proceed to rinse them up thoroughly.
4. Unclogging the Burners
This is a task that you need to be very careful with. High heat and food residues often cause the buildup of grease and other nasty stuff inside the tiny little holes on your burner from where the flame comes out. The burners need to be cleared out in order for your stove to function optimally.
For this purpose, use a small straight pin or a paper clip and gently unclog each small hole on your gas burner. In case you own an older cooktop that has a standing pilot light, make sure you shut off the gas valve before you being.
Removing blockages will substantially restore the function of your stove burner. However, you need to exercise caution while performing this procedure. First of all, you need to make sure you do not clean the ports using toothpicks! This is a very common mistake that people make, and end up further adding to their problem.
It very often happens that the wooden pick breaks while trying to unclog the pores and gets stuck inside the hole, clogging it further. You also do not want to dig too deep inside the little holes.
5. Use a damp cloth to clean the gas burners
While cleaning up the gas burners, you need to ensure that no water seeps inside the little holes of your burner. Use a slightly damp cloth that is not wet to wipe the burners. Also, never spray any type of cleaning product directly onto the burners as that can be really dangerous.
To clean around the burners, using a brush is a good idea as it is hard to reach these places with rags. Use a toothbrush to get into the small openings and crooks around the burners, and then finally wipe the entire stove clean with a clean cloth.
6. Turn on the Pilot Lights
Once you're done with cleaning up the burners and placing all the parts in their respective places, give your stove one final shine by cleaning it up with a cloth. Now follow the instructions provided on your product manual to turn the pilot lights back on, and that's it!
You're done cleaning up your Gas Stove Burner, and can now proceed to cook some delicious meals!
Conclusion
There is nothing better than a nice and clean gas stove to cook on! Plenty of experienced chefs swear by gas stoves and refuse to cook on anything other than gas burners. Thus, taking good care of your gas stove is essential, and it's not that hard to achieve.
We hope our little guide on how to clean Gas Stove Burners has been helpful to you!
The most frustrating thing to see when cleaning an electric kettle is mineral buildup or kettle furring. While it is annoying, it's not something to be too worried about.
In this comprehensive guide, we will go through the steps and how you should clean your kettle using household items, as well as how to prevent large amounts of mineral deposits from forming.
We will go through a few easy steps you can take to make sure that you can keep your trusty electric kettle clean. Here are the materials, equipment, and steps you need to take.
What You'll Need To Clean Your Electric Kettle
Here are the equipment and materials you'll need to perform the steps we'll be running through.
Equipment
A non-abrasive sponge or a bottle brush
A good quality microfiber cloth
Materials
Dish soap or dishwashing liquid
Distilled white vinegar, lemon juice, baking soda, or citric acid powder
Using a 3:1 ratio of water and vinegar, fill it to the half-full level. Don't put too much, or it might overflow when boiling.
If you don't have white vinegar, you can substitute it for either lemon juice or citric acid powder. We'll explain how to use these substitutes properly in a later section.
Then, quickly boil water inside the kettle. You can either start by putting the vinegar and water mixture in and then boiling, or bringing cold water to a boil and then adding vinegar.
Once you see confirmation of boiling water, turn it off if your electric kettle doesn't have an automatic shutdown function.
Before you spend more energy cleaning, you should unplug and disassemble the electric kettle from the other electrical components that might get damaged by the leftover water.
Check out the manufacturer's directions in the owner's manual of your kettle to find out how to safely disassemble the kettle.
First, you'll want to clean the water filter. Most are metal and can be cleaned in a solution of hot water and vinegar, similar to the one used for the kettle itself.
Next, you'll want to get a non-abrasive, soft sponge or a soft-bristled brush to scrub the inside of the kettle. This will dispel the mineral buildup left inside, which should come off quickly.
Tip
If you're struggling with a tough limescale buildup, you might want to use a vinegar and water solution to help break it down.
When you're done scrubbing, the next step is to rinse the kettle. First, you'll want to fill the kettle with hot water to remove any remaining scrubbed-off mineral build-up.
Next, you should rinse the kettle using cold, fresh water or soapy water to clean it further. While there's dish soap inside, you should also thoroughly scrub it.
Finally, you should clean the electronic and non-washable parts of the electric tea kettle using a damp cloth. This includes parts like the heating element.
You can even use olive oil and a microfiber cloth to wipe the exterior of the kettle and keep it looking shiny and clean.
Why is it Important to Descale a Kettle?
Here are two reasons why you should always keep your electric kettle clean. The first reason is to prevent a decrease in heating performance.
The limescale buildup can cause electric kettles to be less effective. It may take longer to heat water, which can be annoying if you need to make a cup of coffee or tea quickly.
The mineral build-up can also affect how your coffee or tea tastes. While it isn't hazardous to your health, seeing sediments floating around your tea cup can be annoying.
How Often Should You Descale Your Electric Kettle?
You should be descaling your electric kettle at least once a month if you use it every day, or more if you notice build-up already happening.
If you don't use your electric kettle as much, you can get it by giving it a rinse once every two or three months, which is very low maintenance.
If you live in an area with hard water, you should wash and boil to clean your kettle more often.
Methods for Cleaning Your Electric Kettle
If you don't have white vinegar in your cabinet, then there are a few alternative methods for cleaning your kettle.
Baking Soda
First, fill up a kettle with enough water to reach 3/4 full. Add a heaping tablespoon of baking soda to your clean water, then follow the same instructions as mentioned previously.
However, the difference is that you should boil the kettle again with fresh water to ensure no excess baking soda is left afterward.
Lemon Juice
The second alternative is using a 1 to 1 ratio of water and lemon juice, filling the kettle with the same amount, and then heating it to a boil.
Citric Acid
The last alternative cleaning solution that you can use is citric acid. Use the same amount of water but two tablespoons of citric acid powder and heat that to a boil.
One consistent process between these alternative methods is letting it sit before you rinse, wipe, and perform the rest of the cleaning process.
Tips for Keeping Your Electric Kettles Clean
To prevent any limescale buildup from happening too often, you can do a few things to keep your kettle clean.
Don’t Let Water Sit For Too Long in the Kettle
If you always fill the kettle and let the water stay inside overnight after using it, the minerals will have a faster build-up as they have more time to settle.
Whether you have an electric or stovetop kettle, you should always rinse the kettle after use, as it can affect both kettle types.
Wipe and Rinse the Kettle After Every Use
Another thing that applies to both electric and stovetop tea kettles is cleaning them after each use.
This will remove any buildup that has already formed without you needing to boil water.
Use Distilled Water Instead of Tap Water
You should use distilled water if you live in an area with heavy water. This is because your tap water may have more minerals that can cause build-up in the first place.
Boil to Clean Regularly
If you don't want to do the whole cleaning process over and over again, you should consider boiling water in the kettle, even when not making coffee or tea.
This heat will help remove any vinegar taste from previous cleaning or mineral residue.
Cleaning Electric Kettle FAQs
What is the Best Way to Clean an Electric Kettle?
The best way to clean an electric kettle is by using a solution with water and vinegar for the inside and using a soft cloth and olive oil to wipe the outside and heating element.
What Is a Limescale Catcher?
A limescale catcher is a metal ring that you place inside of the kettle that absorbs and catches any minerals that would have caused build-up.
What Are the Common Issues of Electric Kettles?
The two most significant issues aside from mineral buildup are leaking and the heating element malfunctioning. This could be because the electric kettle switch doesn’t work.
If you have any of these issues, you should contact the manufacturer of your electric kettle. Most cover these factory defects under warranty.
Hopefully, our article has helped you clear any build-up of minerals from your electric kettle or stovetop model. Whichever method you use should work well.
However, if you really want to have low maintenance, you should not leave any water in the kettle and clean it after each use to prevent any buildup from actually happening.
Owing to their distinct looks, Calathea plants are popular houseplants. If you're considering getting one, here are some care tips that can help them thrive.
This plant goes by several intriguing names - the Prayer Plant, Peacock Plant, Zebra Plant, and even Cathedral Plant. The Calathea plant is easy to spot - with its distinct green, red, and cream leaves dissected by white veins.
It’s a compact-sized indoor plant that thrives with indirect sunlight and periodic watering. Calathea can be slightly fussy and tricky to care for, but don't let that dissuade you. Once you know more about this plant and understand its needs, caring for it will be effortless.
With their beautiful, aesthetic appeal and ability to purify indoor air, these plants make the perfect plant pets for most people. Typically, they grow slowly, reaching just about 3 feet in height. So, if you're ready to know more about these wonderful plants, go through this detailed guide thoroughly.
Let us begin!
Calathea Plant Care 101
Caring For A Calathea Plant
Caring for these beautiful plants can give you a sense of fulfillment and richness. Keeping just a few essential factors in mind, you will be able to care for and raise these beautiful plants with striking looks and enrich the environment of your home. Here are a few important things to keep in mind when dealing with Calatheas.
Sunlight
The Zebra plant ideally thrives in a space that receives bright but indirect sunlight. This is one of the primary reasons why it makes such a good houseplant. You can decorate the Calathea in the bedroom, bathroom, living room, and it will do just fine, as long as it gets light.
That being said, this plant can also survive in low, indirect light. A shaded spot in a sunny room is the perfect environment for it.
Another important thing to keep in mind is that the Calathea thrives in medium to bright (and even low) sunlight; however, it doesn't do well in direct sunlight. Keeping your plant under direct sunlight will cause it to lose its wonderful coloring and slowly wilt.
Humidity
A Calathea plant prefers high humidity. There are several ingenious ways in which you can provide humidity to your water-hungry plant. However, if you live in a place that already has a high level of humidity, don't bother.
Place a humidifier in the room where you keep the Calathea - it will thank you for this! An alternative to buying a humidifier is to place the potted plant on top of a saucer filled with water and pebbles. The functionality of the pebbles is to provide a stable and slow flow of water to the plant through the pot.
Another cheap and easy alternative is to lightly mist the plant once every few days. You can change the frequency of doing this according to how much humidity you are facing and the plant's needs.
Temperature
The ideal temperature range for your beautiful Peacock plant is 65°F to 85°F or 18°C to 30°C. In case the temperature dips below 60°F, or 15°C, you will observe the plant reacting visibly to this change.
To maintain a stable temperature for it, try and keep the windows shut in cooler climates. Avoid allowing cold drafts to enter your home, or at least the room in which you keep the plant.
Water
Although this plant loves humidity, it isn't a huge fan of overwatering. The best rule to keep in mind is to keep the plant's soil moist but not soggy.
Ideally, you should water the plant once every 1 to 2 weeks. Allow the soil to half-dry in between watering sessions. You might have to water it with variable frequency depending on the situation (brighter light, less humidity, high temperatures, etc.)
To understand whether to water or not, insert your finger into the soil about 2.5cm down, and test the dryness of it. If the soil is moist, avoid watering the Calathea, as it will react negatively. However, if the soil is dry, feed it at room temperature, preferably with distilled water.
That being said, if feeding it distilled water is problematic, tap water will work just fine. Remember to let the water sit out overnight before feeding it. This small trick will ensure that the chlorine content in the water dissipates naturally and doesn't harm your plant.
If you are ever in doubt about how much you should water this plant, just remember one thing: It is better to underwater Calathea than overwater it.
Fertilizer
When it comes to using fertilizer for the Calathea, it isn't too fussy. You can opt for a liquid fertilizer diluted to just ½ strength. Feeding it this additional nourishment is only required during the growing season. You can entirely skip doing this during the fall and winter seasons.
An important tip - Water the plant well before fertilizing, diluting the strength of the fertilizer thoroughly. Otherwise, you risk burning the roots of the delicate Calathea.
You can opt for a multi-use marine fertilizer for the Calathea. These fertilizers are completely safe for the plant and pets, children, and your family. Moreover, it doesn't create unnecessary mineral buildup in the soil, which is vital for a plant.
This fertilizer is also eco-friendly, which makes it an ideal option for the environmentally conscious. However, you can also opt for other fertilizers. Ensure that you research them thoroughly, so it doesn't end up harming the Calathea.
Container & Soil
Coming to the soil type for this plant, you need to be mindful of what you use. Here, the Calathea can be slightly fussy again. It prefers well-draining soil that also has the inherent ability to retain water.
Look for a well-draining but the light potting mix for it. This ensures that the plant's roots remain moist, and it can seep water as and when it requires.
As for the container, it is best to get one with adequate draining holes. It ensures that the soil doesn't get too soggy or have stagnant water collecting in it. Furthermore, it encourages air circulation and ventilation for the plant.
You can also opt for a terrarium, as they add an aesthetic value to the room while acting as the ideal environment for a Calathea. If you are creative enough, you can try a DIY project to cut up a bottle or paint it. Place your Calathea plant in the DIY bottle for a perfect home.
Pruning
The maintenance of this plant is relatively straightforward and effortless. Since it is a slow-growing plant, it doesn't require excessive amounts of pruning. Simply trimming the stems and doing away with the dead and wilted leaves is enough.
When pruning the leaves, ensure to cut the leaf at its base, where the plant joins with the stalk. This gives the leaf a clean cut, adding aesthetic value. It makes the plant look more presentable, which is fantastic.
If you notice that there are yellowing or brown bits only on the leaf's edges, don't worry. You shouldn't cut the entire leaf away in this case. Simply trim the leaf with scissors or a small pruning tool along its natural edges and curves.
Another essential tool to keeping this plant looking fresh and healthy is to dust it regularly. Every once in a while, use a damp cloth to wipe the beautiful Zebra plant's leaves. It removes the fine layer of dust and pollution from its surface, allowing the plant to breathe easily.
Repotting
Not many people are aware of the fact that Calathea plants propagate through division. In fact, propagating the plant during its repotting is one of the best and most convenient ways of growing it.
Once every few years, repot your Calathea at the beginning of its growing season. Remember, you can use a diluted fertilizer during this time to ensure that it grows and matures well.
The compelling reason why you should divide and propagate the plant during repotting is that the process puts the plant under high stress. The more times you repot or divide the plant, the more stressed out it becomes, eventually refusing to grow well.
By dividing the plant during its repotting sessions, you put less stress on it in the long run. Observe the plant's roots, looking for the natural separation in them. Gently split the plant and repot it in its appropriate soil mix and container.
Why Should You Get A Calathea Plant?
Calathea plants are one of the most unique and aesthetic looking houseplants. They are immensely popular due to their peculiar looks. Moreover, they are relatively easy to care for - as long as you know their needs.
Aside from the apparent beauty that the plant adds to your home, there are several other benefits of choosing one for your home. A Calathea plant instantly brightens up any room it is kept in, owing to its bright, beautiful leaves with unique textures and patterns.
They don't require too much sunlight and can tolerate medium to low levels of light. This makes them apt for growing in almost any room of your home. Furthermore, they don't require too much watering or maintenance as well.
Moving over to the health benefits, this plant is known for its ability to purify indoor air. The leaves efficiently filter out pollutants, all the while increasing the level of oxygen in the house. They also boost the humidity content of a room.
Caring for plants and watching them grow is exceptionally fulfilling, even for the new plant parents. People experience a boost in serotonin levels with these wonderful plants around their homes.
Common Problems, Causes & How To Fix Them
In general, the Calathea plant is known for being low-maintenance. It doesn't beg for excessive amounts of attention and care, unlike many other houseplants. That being said, there are a few common signs and symptoms that let you know how the plant is feeling.
Here are the most common problems it faces, how to recognize them and fix them:
Wilting & Curling Leaves, Dry Potting Mix
Ideally, this plant has bright leaves with white veins running through its surface. The leaves can be found in various beautiful shades of red, green, and even pale shades. If you notice your plant's leaves starting to wilt or curl, it is a clear symptom of something. Observe the potting mix as well, whether it is dry or moist.
This is a common issue with Calathea plants, and it is caused due to underwatering it. We recommend watering the plant once every week for the next couple of weeks, or until you see the plant recover its coloring.
The dry potting mix is also a clear symptom of underwatering. Fortunately, this problem has an easy solution, so don't worry about it too much.
A Black Base & Yellow Leaves
The base of your Calathea plant should be bright green. Any other shade can be worrisome and must be looked into at the earliest. The same goes for its leaves. Although these plants are known to have pale leaves, if the majority of the plant is green and some leaves start to turn yellow, it is a symptom of overwatering.
Yellowing and wilting leaves can also be a symptom of excessive sunlight. However, it is relatively easy to fix this problem, with a little patience and effort.
Consider watering your plant just once in 2 weeks, or even lesser, depending on its requirements. If you keep the plant in a room where it receives too much bright, direct sunlight, move the plant to a shaded spot.
Remember that even though this plant likes sunlight, it only likes indirect light.
Leaf Spots
Another symptom to look out for is leaf spots. You may notice peculiar colored spots - pale shades of yellow or white, or even darker shades of brown and black. These leaf spots indicate a fungal infection. However, it may also indicate mineral buildup.
To remedy this problem, water your plant with distilled water only. Using tap water can be one of the primary issues that lead to mineral buildup. If you have no way of using distilled water, keep a glass of tap water out overnight, so the chlorine content dissipates naturally.
Feed water directly into the surrounding soil area to bring the natural, beautiful coloring back. It is best to keep the plant out of reach from children or pets.
Varieties Of Calathea Plants
If you have ever Googled "Calathea Plants," you would have been stunned to find several varieties of this plant. As a matter of fact, each variety comes with its unique textures, shape, designs, size, and color.
Curious to know a little more about this eye-catching plant? Here are some of its most popular varieties:
Pinstripe Calathea
One of the most popular Calathea varieties, this plant has stunning leaves that grow at least a foot long. However, the plant itself never grows beyond 2 feet, making it an ideal indoor houseplant.
The leaf features a beautiful deep shade of green, with white, pink, and emerald swirls forming a feather-like pattern on its surface.
Peacock Calathea
As the name suggests, this Calathea variety has foliage that looks as stunning as a peacock feather. With a reddish-purple or maroon underside, the leaves feature dark green and white patterns on their edges, top, and sides. This contrasting color scheme gives it a particularly striking appeal.
Each leaf is oval-shaped and grows up to 12-inches in length. The plant itself, however, reaches just 2 feet in total.
Rattlesnake Calathea
This variety of Calathea has massive leaves that can grow over 2 feet long. The plant doesn't grow beyond 2 feet, just like its other varieties. The excessively long leaves with the smaller body of the plant give it the appearance of rattlesnakes.
The leaves of this plant have intricate designs over its body. You will find them sporting various shades of green that overlap each other. The leaves are spotted with their iconic green dots all over.
With a unique, red underside and wavy-shaped leaves, this variety of Calathea is immensely popular. Proper care and maintenance will ensure that the plant retains its stunning color and patterns.
White Fusion Calathea
This particular variety of Calathea is slightly more finicky than its green counterparts. Due to its white coloring, it is unable to photosynthesize light as well as the others. If you decide to get one of these rare species in your home, you will need to provide it with adequate water, sunlight, and care to keep it thriving.
The White Fusion Calathea reaches only about 12-inches in height. It can be an excellent option for those looking for a more compact species to keep on their desks or in their offices.
Although this species requires more effort than the others, eventually, the effort is worth it. The White Fusion is one of the most popular and aesthetically striking species of Calathea.
Zebra Plant
Its name makes it quite clear to us how this variety of Calathea looks. With a dark green body and lighter, emerald-colored stripes, the plant species resembles a zebra. This evergreen perennial is one of the few species of Calatheas that reach 3 feet in height. The leaves, however, measure just 1 foot.
Conclusion
If you have been contemplating getting a houseplant, the Calathea might be the best one to start with.
With minimal effort and supervision, these plants can grow to look stunning, adding value to any room they are placed in. We hope this detailed guide helped you understand the specific needs of this plant better.
And with that, we are finally at the end of our guide. Wishing you all the best on your plant parenting journey.
It can be challenging to get water everywhere in your yard, where it might be needed, especially if you have more than one faucet to work with.
If you have to cover a large area, where gardens, livestock tanks, and yards are located in different parts of the property, then watering might be a tough task. Many have found it to be quite painful if they have to drag a heavy hose to the required areas each day.
Instead, it is much smarter to bury various hoses for their individual purposes. It makes the task more efficient, and you can wrap up quickly too.
So, taking your needs into account, we have highlighted how you can bury your garden hose. At the same time, we will also tackle whether it is advisable to bury your garden hose and the various factors you need to consider for the same.
Without further ado, let us get to all the details.
Steps for Burying a Garden Hose
Gather the Necessary Tools
First, you have to get the materials and tools needed to bury the garden hose. So, of course, apart from the garden hose you choose, you’ll also need a hose bib, a combination tee for the water to flow out, clamps for pipes to be fitted. You’ll also need hydrant caps, concrete tiles, rake, shovel, heavy-duty hoe, screwdriver, tools for clamping, hacksaw, and a propane torch.
After assembling the tools, you are left with two choices. Either you can dig the trench and then fit the pipe, or you can tackle it in sections. While we normally recommend choosing the method which works best for you, it is necessary to take the sectional approach if you need to use the hose before the entire process of burying it is complete.
Dig the Trench
You have to use your tools to dig the trench, but you must also make sure that you have leveled off the bottom. This will help you achieve uniform depth. Since hydrants are nearly a foot high, this should be your average depth when it comes to digging.
Install the Fittings and Pipes
Once your trenches are dug, you have to unroll the pipe and put it inside. If you feel the pipe is rolling up again, you should use some items to weigh it down. After that, you have to install the faucets and valves along this pipe when you feel the need.
Wherever you want a hydrant, you have to put in a combination tee. Sometimes, you’ll find it rather difficult to get this tee in the pipe. But, applying soap in the area of the connection will make it easier.
You also have to screw in your hose bib while ensuring that the orientation of the hose is maintained all through the trench.
Closing the Hydrant and Filling the Trench
Now, you have to make a hole in the cover for the hydrant. This is essential for the hose to move in and out. When you keep the hose open, it is best to be careful that it doesn’t interfere with mowing, gardening, or movement in general.
You’ll find that filling trenches is a lot easier if you have soft soil with little-to-no rocks. It is best to use the front end of a loader or a back-hoe for the job. You should avoid putting rocks back since this might apply undue pressure on the hose. Understandably, you’ll be losing soil, so try to find more in order to compensate for this loss.
After you find that the trench has reached ground level, try to put back the turf. Be sure to pay attention to the areas around your hydrant. You don’t want to fill in the hydrant spaces because it’ll be more difficult to attach a garden hose.
Tips for Burying Garden Hose
Avoiding Underground Connections
When burying the hose underground, you should keep some things in mind. First and foremost, you have to avoid connections underground. So, try getting a hose that’s a little longer than the length you want it to run for.
We understand that getting shorter hoses might seem more practical, as they’re easier to store, but making connections only works fine above the ground. Since most of these connections are made of metal, there’s a good chance of rust due to damp soil conditions.
There’s nothing worse than discovering that the pipe might have sprung a leak, only to dig up the ground to see that a connection has actually come loose. To avoid such situations, we recommend doing away with connections for underground hoses.
Get the Right Length
There’s nothing worse than when your hose pipe falls short of expectations. You wouldn’t want to dig up a trench only to find out that the hose is too short. We recommend measuring it beforehand and acquiring one accordingly. If you still have doubts, it is best to err on the side of more, in this case.
Quality Matters
As with most things, you will see that quality matters here as well. Get a hose which has a thicker wall. This will help you if you plan on burying it. After all, the dirt has an amount of weight. The deeper the trench, the more the weight on the hose.
If you buy a cheaper one, the risks of it collapsing are much more. On the other hand, a thick-walled hose is likely to have better insulation against cold weather, and it won’t get bent out of shape either.
Check if Laying a Pipe Makes More Sense
While burying a hose is an easier option, it doesn’t mean it is the right one. PVC pipes are more readily available as well as economical options to get water from one point to another.
Understandably, the hassle involved with PVC pipes is more, from making the joints to digging below the frost line. But, it is a superior long-term solution. You can bury a garden hose when you have a temporary need to transport water or if you want to work on a larger project at a later time.
Functionality and Connections
When you bury the hose, you have to know what the use is. This is because you can regulate the water flow accordingly. It is not fun to have to do so at the starting point each time there is an overflow problem. Instead, it is advisable to install a regulating attachment at the endpoint to ensure you get the desired flow of water.
What to Keep in Mind While Burying Garden Hoses
Now that you know what to do if you have to bury a garden hose, there are a few factors to be considered. We understand that you might want to bury the hose because you want the water to reach a difficult spot or don’t like dragging the hose to different areas. It might also be that you just dislike looking at the exposed hose.
Whatever the reason, you should consider fluctuations in temperature, the type of ground, as well as the digging and burrowing animals in the area. Let us look at the factors in greater detail.
Climate Considerations
While a garden hose that is buried does not freeze as quickly as one which is exposed, there is still a risk if the ground freezes to significant depths. You’ll find that sturdy hoses are quite able to handle the freezing temperatures well enough. But, if they freeze too often with water still inside, then there’s a good chance of quickly breaking down over time.
Furthermore, if an underground hose freezes, and you haven’t managed to blow it out for winter, then you won’t be able to use it until the ground thaws fully. Ultimately, a buried hose is great for seasonal use, but it depends on where you reside.
Ground Conditions
The conditions of the ground also play an essential role in influencing the decision to bury a hose. Even if you’re extremely motivated, you’ll have a tough time digging compacted, rocky, or caliche soils.
Of course, there are specialized tools and pickaxes that are designed specifically for the job. But, when you consider that the trench has to be the same length as the hose, this could seem like a daunting task.
Critter Troubles
This is mostly specific to an area. Rodents tend to be attracted to water. Their burrowing and digging activities usually cause problems because these animals might just decide to gnaw through the hose at a certain point. If you’re dealing with a serious rodent situation, then you should properly reconsider the plan to bury the garden hose.
Where to Bury the Garden Hose
The best bit about burying a garden hose, rather than any other item, is that it can curve around objects. Normally, these could impede the flow of water to the garden bed or other areas that need it. But, a garden hose can work around these to ensure that the water is transported without any hurdles.
Basically, this means that you can bury the garden hose anywhere. In fact, you might even do so under the driveway, making use of a PVC pipe and some water pressure.
What Kind of Garden Hose to Bury
Firstly, the kind of hose you’re burying depends on why you’ve decided to bury it. Neither your most expensive choice nor the cheapest hose will serve you too well if they are buried underground for a duration. Here are some of the types of hoses you might bury.
Rubber Hoses
You can stick to the classic by opting for an old-fashioned polyurethane or rubber hose to get the water from one place to another. Not only are they sturdy, but they are also equipped to handle fluctuations in weather very easily. These pipes can’t be crushed underneath the weight of the soil, either.
But, the best bit is that they won’t kink, accidentally, when you bury or lay them. We recommend getting a pipe with a larger diameter so that the maximum amount of water flows easily when the pipe’s being used.
Drip or Soaker
If you want to water areas that the hose runs through, then you should bury a soaker or a drip hose. In fact, you can even make one from a leaky and old hose if you have the right set of tools lying around. These pipes can work wonderfully if you set them up well.
Final Words
If you have been on the fence about burying your hose, we genuinely hope this guide will help clear the air. Speaking from personal experience, it is incredibly beneficial to have a buried hose, even where the ground tends to freeze.
The added mobility and lack of obstructions are factors that clearly work in favor of this decision. You’ll find that digging the trench and burying the hose isn’t too complex either. Of course, be mindful of your surroundings before making the decision.
Don’t forget to let us know your experiences with burying a garden hose to transport water.
Does your backyard need some protection? Installing a horizontal wood fence might be a good idea in that case.
Whether you want a little privacy from sneaky neighbors or just want to set some chill vibes on your lawn, horizontal fencing is a great choice. But the question is, how to go about it?
If you want to save on a few bucks, we have an informative step-by-step guide to walk you through the entire process of constructing a horizontal wood fence yourself. Not only will it be easy on your wallet, but you’ll also experience a unique sense of achieving something on seeing the final product.
Let’s get right into the details then!
What Is A Horizontal Fence?
A horizontal fence is a wooden boundary made using wooden boards that run along the length of an area instead of the regular vertical up and down manner. It typically comprises 4x4 posts that are strongly anchored to the ground using a concrete paste.
Moreover, these fences provide privacy from passersby and make your outdoor spaces a little more secure.
Materials Needed For Horizontal Fencing
Much to everybody’s surprise, the materials required to build a fence are pretty basic and very conveniently available in local hardware stores. The methodology that we’ll be following can be finessed using the following equipment:
Wooden stakes
String lines for alignment reference
Landscape paint for marking
Wood posts (two or eight, depending on the layout of your fencing)
Horizontal boards (preferable sizes - 8 meters x 6 inches, 6 metres x 6 inches, 4 metres x 6 inches)
Trim boards
Screws, nails, and fence clips
Tools like saw, hammer, level, and shovel
Concrete (60 pounds)
Paint, paintbrush or sprayer, stain
Try to use only pressure-treated wood if you want the best results. It is durable and doesn’t react much to adverse weather.
How To Build A Horizontal Wood Fence?
Building a horizontal wood fence is no rocket science. Once you get your hands clean on the saw and carpentering strategy straight, the whole process will become pretty straightforward. You will definitely agree by the end of our extensive step-by-step guide. So read on!
1. Plan It Out
The first step is to get all the materials in line and plan stuff out. Typically horizontal fences are composed of uniformly spaced boards fixed into place with the help of nails. This design is a classic and works out well, but we’d ask you not to hesitate from being innovative. You can use fence boards of varying widths in different patterns; just make sure that it is practical.
In our guide, we’ll be using 4x4s in a basic pattern for building our fence. In case you’re a beginner, it’s best to stick to the basics, but if you are confident enough, then feel free to experiment.
2. Mark The ground
Marking the ground can be tricky as it could invite disputes with the neighbors if not done within your property area. Typically backyard soil has been long grown over, hiding the property demarcating line, so you can use metal detectors to get clarity on the area owned by you. Do have a quick chat with your neighbors regarding the matter.
Once you are completely sure about your property boundaries, insert two stakes in the soil on opposite sides of your desired fencing line. Running a string along the stakes to get a straight line is a good idea.
Since the midpoint of every 4x4 is at the length of six meters, you’ll need to measure the same and mark the ground using landscape paint. These paints are easily available at hardware stores.
3. Set The Four Primary Posts
Now, this is the most time-taking and exhausting step because you’ll have to wait for the concrete base to dry completely. Each hole should preferably be 20 inches deep and filled with water up to two-thirds of its depth while erecting the fence post in it.
After that, fill the hole with about 40 pounds of dry concrete along with a little more water, thereby creating a thick paste-like consistency. It’s important to keep stirring the solution with a shovel while pouring the concrete to avoid the formation of lumps. After all, lumps are nasty and do not go away entirely once formed, so pay attention while stirring.
Once the posts are rightly placed, you’ll need to check if they are all at the same level. If yes, then well and good, but if not, make adjustments accordingly to ensure that they are at the same height.
4. Level The Fence Boards
The next step is leveling the fence boards so that you have an even horizontal fencing line in your yard. The best way to make it functional is to work towards the top after starting at the bottom. Place the bottom-most board slightly above the ground and align it with the fence post. Keep in mind that straight fencing can be achieved only if your base is leveled properly.
Then, nail the bottom board in place while ensuring that all the boards are centrally in line with the 4x4 posts. Use a wooden spacer to maintain the same gap between consecutive boards. However, if the boards you are using aren’t completely dry, there will automatically be a little gap.
5. Decide And Mark The Position Of The Topmost Rail
Rails are meant to give support to the fence sections, and that’s why they are positioned between the posts. If your rail is hidden at the back of the topmost board, you can fix it right beneath the first board.
6. Cut The Rails
After measuring the distance between your 4x4 posts, you can cut the rails accordingly. They should be equal to the fence boards in length. The only thing is that it is slightly difficult to cut them as they are cuboidal in shape and are thicker as compared to flat boards. Therefore, be very careful while chopping them.
7. Fasten The Topmost Rail
This bit is pretty important because it will affect how the rest of the wooden boards will be spaced out. If this is somehow messed up, the overall look of your horizontal fence will suffer. But no worries; we’ll tell you how to go about it.
Pick up the rail and connect it with the posts using fence clips, nails, or screws. In case you’re planning to use nails, you can drive them in with the help of a fastener that attaches the rail to the post perpendicularly.
However, the easy way out is by using the fence clips. These clips are basically brackets made out of metal and are primarily mounted on the post to keep the rail in a stable position. It makes the whole rail fastening procedure much simpler.
8. Fix The Fence Boards
When the rails are in place, you can go ahead and follow the same methodology to drive in the fence boards. You know the drill now.
Furthermore, you can either alternate the boards with rails or create your own unique pattern. The main function of rails is to support the vertical pickets and ensure maximum privacy. Again, you can be creative here if you have some experience.
Criss-cross rails, open rails, parallel rails, etc., are a few common choices. But if you want a little cottage core or a 70s touch in your backyard, we suggest trying the white picket fence pattern.
9. Chop The Posts
Moving on, when all your boards are nicely screwed or nailed, you can chop off the extra protruding sections of the posts. But if you’re aiming to have a decorative look with post caps, you should leave a little extra length while lopping it off. A little sanding down of the sharp and freshly chopped edges will do good for everybody.
10. Add Some Support
If you feel like your fence boards are dangling down and are in need of some extra support, you can add vertical beams to keep them in place. Measure them in a way that they perfectly fit between the top and bottom rail. This will give a smooth and elegant finish to your fence.
11. Post Caps Are Important
You may think that post caps are merely decorative accessories, but we’re afraid that’s not the case. These caps are installed to cover the sharp edges of the support beams in case you decide to keep them higher than the top rail.
Nonetheless, post caps add a finishing touch to the structure, making it presentable. They also serve as gripping points in case you feel like resting your arms. No matter what design you aim for, you’ll find a post cap in every style. Some popular options are wood, glass, copper, metals, and even solar-powered light bulbs. You can choose whatever defines your aesthetic the best.
12. Finishing Touches
Once you have the structure up and about, the last step is to add the finishing touches and make it match the vibe of your yard or house. Either you can let it age by itself and get that old-school cottage-like feel or give it some color.
For coloring, you have two options - staining and painting. We recommend using a paint sprayer for best results. That’ll help you get the job done swiftly within a couple of hours. An Interesting fact worth noting - among all designs, the white picket fence style is the most loved in US homes.
What Are The Benefits Of Horizontal Fences?
A. Easy Installation
The best part about horizontal wood fences is that they are super easy to construct. It is one of those few wooden structures that can be aced by even beginners. You can build it in no time with a little bit of hand saw skills and accurate measurements.
What’s more, no bulky and complicated equipment is required to get this fence going. Give it a few hours and a little bit of sweat, and you’ll be able to enjoy full privacy in your outdoor space.
B. Multiple Styles And Variations
Who doesn’t love variety? Apart from a few indecisive people, everyone loves having enough options to select from. That’s where the horizontal wood fence shines as it provides a wide scope to experiment with styles and designs.
We all know that wood is a versatile material that can be molded and assembled in lots of different ways. There are multiple types of wooden fences which you can install on your deck.
If you want complete seclusion, setting up a fully covered fence is a good option, but if you wish to have some ventilation space, then spaced fence boards are the way to go. In any case, the options are truly endless.
C. Eco-Friendly
This one might confuse you because how can a fence that requires chopping of trees be environmentally-friendly. Your question is absolutely valid, and we have a logical answer to clear the air.
The deal is, unlike vinyl or any other material, wood is much more durable and strong in the long run. Nowadays, options are available to minimize the weather-induced swelling in wood boards so that they last for long.
Additionally, this type of fencing is quite easy to dispose of and recycle. Stabilizing agents are available to keep it safe from termites and rot. Moreover, it is economically sound and hands down one of the best options available out there.
Final Words
Horizontal fences are a sure and sorted way of enlivening your outdoor space. A backyard that was once open and exposed can transform into a protected chilling spot with the help of some pressure-treated wood boards and menial tools.
Hiring professional carpenters for setting up your fences can burn a hole in your pocket. And spending so much money on something this basic can be a little disappointing for a few. But having read our guide, hopefully, you might be feeling a little confident in going ahead and taking on the task yourself.
That said, we’ll sign off for the day. Until next time! Happy woodworking.
Whether you're lighting up a fire pit or building a bonfire, you will definitely need firewood.
Buying firewood is essential, but buying the correct amount is key.
For most people, learning about firewood measurements can be challenging. After all, the firewood business includes seemingly nonsensical jargon like a "face cord" or a "rick of wood."
In this guide, we walk you through everything you need to know about how much firewood is in a cord and additional tips on how to store it.
In a nutshell, a cord of wood is a unit measurement of firewood. It's calculated by volume, multiplying the length by width by depth.
In the U.S. and Canada, a full cord of wood is 128 cubic feet with 600 to 800 logs.
The standard length of an individual log is 16 inches. That's a 4 feet deep, 4 feet tall, and 8 feet long stack of wood.
Note
A full cord may also be called a bush cord.
Most residential users can get by without using a full cord of firewood. A full cord can last a few months, even for commercial customers.
As such, firewood companies offer smaller sizes. Measuring cords can vary by State, so vendors may have different measurements.
Ask your vendor for specific measurements in cubic feet to know more.
What Is a Half Cord?
A half cord or a one-third cord of wood tends to be made from shorter lengths of firewood.
Half-cord and one-third-cord logs measure 32 to 48 inches compared to full cords, which are much longer.
These consist of three rows of logs in 4-foot-long, 4-foot-high, and 4-foot-deep piles.
On the other hand, a one-third cord can be two rows in a pile that is 4 feet high, 4 feet wide, and 32 inches deep.
What Are the Other Types of Cords?
Although a full cord of wood is usually 8 feet long by 4 feet wide by 4 feet high, there are other measurements of firewood.
Take note of the following terms to stay informed when buying cords of wood:
Sheldon Cord
Generally, a Sheldon cord refers to any set of firewood that measures MORE than 128 cubic feet or a full cord.
A Sheldon cord does not have an official measurement and can vary between vendors.
It can be tricky to find vendors selling firewood in this quantity, so buying a larger amount of smaller bundles is best.
Face Cords or Rick Cord
If a full cord consists of three stacks 4 feet high and 8 feet long, a face cord consists of only one stack of wood.
It measures 4 feet in height and 8 feet in length with 16-inch long logs.
If the logs are only 12 inches long, then it means it has less wood than the standard face cord. Ensure that the price is equivalent to the amount you're getting.
It's also known as a rick of wood. A rick refers to the way materials are stacked, like hay.
Running Cord
You might hear this term used by some people.
A running cord simply means a full cord of firewood that is NOT divided into three stacks. All logs are stacked parallel to each other.
Stove Cord
People may use the term "stove cord" when buying firewood for stoves.
Firewood cut 12 inches long is ideal to use in stoves. It measures roughly the same as a full cord but only 12 inches deep.
The exact measurements of a stove cord can vary between sellers. The bottom line is that this cord of wood is small enough to fit in a stove.
Truckload of Wood
It literally means a pile of firewood that fits in a pickup truck. The amount of firewood varies depending on the size of the truck.
Ask your vendor for the exact measurements in cubic feet for more accuracy.
Will Fresh Wood Do?
You might benefit from using fresh wood, especially if you want to buy it in bulk.
Since many vendors sell fresh wood as a cheaper alternative, it can work if you're in a pinch.
You can season fresh wood by simply storing wood cords in a dry place. You'll have enough supply for a full winter when they're all seasoned and dry.
How to Measure Firewood
Knowing how wood is measured is vital because vendors typically sell wood by the cord.
To measure firewood, all logs must run parallel to each other and should be stacked tightly. A wood stack that runs parallel is also called a running cord.
After stacking the wood, calculate the total volume.
A fullcord is generally considered to be 128 cubic feet of firewood in the U.S. and Canada. However, it can still differ between States and regions.
Firewood Measurements
Not all wood gets chopped in the same sizes, so you can expect variations in measurements.
The standard length is 16 inches. A full cord is 4 feet deep with three stacks of 16-inch logs.
Sellers may stack 12-inch logs in four rows instead of three. Others sell firewood as long as 24 inches in two rows.
Getting the right size is CRUCIAL, so check with your vendor to see how they chop their wood to get an accurate measurement.
Stack the Wood Yourself
When stacking, watch out for sellers who might stack the firewood loosely. There are also vendors that won't allow you to stack the wood yourself.
If you suspect some questionable business practices, it's best to steer clear of these sellers and do more research into more upstanding sellers.
It's common for customers to stack wood themselves, so any reputable vendor should allow for self-stacking.
Now that we've gone through the numbers, how much firewood do you really need?
Below are some recommendations on how much wood you need depending on the situation:
For Winter
How much firewood you need in the winter depends on several factors, such as geographical location, heating space, and insulation.
A cord of wood can last up to 3 months, so 1 to 2 cords of firewood should be enough to burn through the cold months.
However, the extended winters of colder states may require more. Around 3 to 4 cords are needed for extra warmth.
Make sure to stock up on firewood during late summer or early fallto get a head start and avoid the rush when prices go up.
For Your Fireplace
The amount of firewood you'll need depends on how often you use your fireplace. A fireplace can burn 2 to 3 logs at a time.
If you only use it once a week, a face cord should be enough to last for a few months.
In contrast, if you use it often to heat your house, a full cord is necessary to keep your home warm.
Camping and Bonfires
If you're planning on a weekend trip out in the great outdoors, you need to consider how long you want the fire going.
A good rule of thumb is to get firewood bundles. A bundle usually consists of 5 to 7 logs.
A couple of bundles is enough to sustain a 2-hour campfire. Try to pack at least five bundles for fires lasting more than 6 hours.
Adjust the amount as you see fit, like if you're going to make multiple campfires or use it to roast.
How to Store Cords
Once you've gotten your cord, the next step is to store your logs.
Whether you buy a face cord or a full cord, the storage methods remain the same. The difference lies in whether your firewood is unseasoned or seasoned.
Unseasoned Wood
Unseasoned firewood is still green and wet, which means it doesn't burn as efficiently, is more challenging to light, and produces more smoke.
You must first split them into manageable pieces that you can easily stack and carry. Look for a place with good air circulation to let it air dry.
The drying process can take anywhere between 6 and 9 months, depending on how you stack the pieces.
You can use bricks or pallets to elevate the stack above the ground. Stack the pieces in a row and ensure enough space for airflow.
This arrangement can help keep out moisture. Too much moisture makes it difficult to start a fire. It also invites rot and mold.
Do NOT store wet firewood indoors, as it can bring pests, mold, and excess humidity into your home.
Seasoned Wood
Unlike green or unseasoned firewood, this type is already split and dried, so it's ready to use.
That being said, seasoned firewood should still be stored properly.
Because dry wood burns the best, keep your driest piece at the top of the stack for better accessibility.
To maximize your supply, use the older pieces first to prevent rot and decay.
Lastly, make sure to protect the stack from the elements by covering it when you store it.
How to Store Firewood FAQs
Below are commonly asked questions about firewood:
How Long Will One Cord of Wood Last?
A full cord can last up to 3 monthsor more for most residential users. On the other hand, a face cord may only last up to 2 months.
How Much Firewood is 3 Cords?
A full cord contains roughly 600 to 800 logs per order. If the median is 700, you can expect around 2,100 pieces with three full cords.
What are the Best Types of Firewood?
Hardwoods like oak, maple, and birch are the best type of firewood because of their density. They have more heat energy per volume, burning hotter for longer.
Knowing the common terminology when it comes to firewood is essential to ensure you're getting your money's worth of wood.
A full cord is a standard measurement of firewood that everyone should know.
Whether you're buying a face cord or a truckload of logs, you can find the right amount that works for you.
If wooden logs are too much of a hassle, you might be interested in tabletop and floor-standing patio heaters that work with pellets instead.
Sometimes, a sail on the boat is all you need to uplift the mood after a long day at work, especially with your loved ones.
If you are a boat owner, it is essential to take care of the boat so that it is able to steer through the sea for a long time.
But did you know that the paint of the hull of a boat does a lot more than giving it a fancy look? In fact, it is responsible for keeping away weed, slime, and other organisms that grow under your boat.
However, effectively painting the hull involves a decent amount of expenditure and is certainly time-consuming. So, we thought of helping you out in this process by providing an informative guide, explaining all the nitty-gritty concerning bottom painting a boat.
That said, what are we waiting for? Let's get down to business, shall we?
Is Bottom Painting Really Necessary?
Bottom painting is not mandatory if you take the boat out every once in a while. For instance, if it's kept in a warehouse most of the time and only hits the sea occasionally. You can effectively maintain its bottom by applying a wax coat and cleaning it periodically in such scenarios.
However, if you take the boat out every now and then, you’d dock it in the sea most of the time. In these cases, bottom/hull painting becomes absolutely mandatory.
That being said, painting the bottom is not enough; you must clean it on a daily basis, remove the paint and repaint it with antifouling paint. Doing this not only protects the hull but also makes the boat highly functional.
Antifouling Paint 101
Antifouling paint plays a very important role in saving the boat from all types of water-based damages. It is applied all over the hull from the water line to the bottom. Furthermore, antifouling paint helps in keeping away all water-based lives like weed and barnacles that tend to leach onto the bottom of the boat.
Plus, antifouling paint comes in a wide range of brands, colors, and styles, just like normal paint. However, there are mainly three types of antifouling paint: ablative, hard, and hybrid. The right type of antifouling paint for you depends on the boat and your budget.
What Are The Types Of Hull Paint?
As mentioned in the previous section, there are mainly 3 types of antifouling paints. Let us take a closer look at the functions of these paints.
Ablative Paint
Ablative paints are perfect for boats that are taken out on the sea occasionally or that move very slowly. This type of antifouling paint tends to wear away with the passage of time. Also, it releases a lot of biocides while sailing through the sea.
An ablative paint is also called “self-polishing” paint since it sits very thin on the hull. Overall, painting the hull with ablative paint is relatively easier, less time-consuming, and affordable since there will be less paint to remove.
Hard Bottom
On the other hand, hard bottom paints are suitable for all types of boats that move very fast. They contain a very thick layer of biocide, making their coating very hard and long-lasting. However, with time, this paint too wears away but lasts a lot longer than ablative paint.
Hybrid Paint
As the name suggests, hybrid paint is a mixture of ablative and hard bottom paint. The best part about this paint is that it can be used on the hull of all types of boats.
How Much Does It Cost To Bottom Paint A Boat?
We hope, by now, you are aware of the three different types of antifouling paint and why bottom painting is so important. So, let us now focus on the main question: how much is it going to cost?
The best thing about bottom painting is that you can either choose to do it yourself or hire a professional. That said, like most projects, going DIY will help save money while hiring a professional would be rather expensive but less time-consuming and deliver guaranteed results.
DIY Bottom Painting
Going DIY makes you take charge of the boat. Before starting, plan it all out and note that it will take a lot of time. Also, be careful while painting, as you cannot afford to make too many mistakes. The cost of DIY bottom painting varies widely, but it mostly comes down to the quantity and type of paint you use.
In general, bottom paint is available in one-gallon drums, which usually cost between $20 and $200 per gallon. That being said, the brand and the type of paint also play important roles in deciding the price.
You will require a handful of painting supplies as well, such as goggles, rollers, paintbrushes, breathing masks, gloves, masking tapes, sandpaper, and drop cloths.
The bigger the boat, the more paint you will need. The amount needed per linear foot would be clearly mentioned on the drums of paint. In general, most ablative bottom paints require two coats, whereas customized epoxy bottom paints need just a single coat. Keep these in mind to have a clear estimate of the cost.
Double coating boats measuring 20 feet to 35 feet would require 3 gallons of hull paint.
Single coating boats measuring 20 feet to 35 feet would require 1.5 gallons of hull paint.
Double coating boats measuring 36 feet to 51 feet would require 6 gallons of hull paint.
Single coating boats measuring 36 feet to 51 feet would require 3.5 gallons of hull paint.
Double coating boats measuring 53 feet to 63 feet would require 9 gallons of hull paint.
Single coating boats measuring 53 feet to 63 feet would require 4.5 gallons of hull paint.
Professional Bottom Painting
When it comes to professional bottom painting, it usually starts with a base cost. The professionals determine the base coat after they check the size of the boat. In this day and age, the cost per linear foot is about $25 on average.
However, this is just the price of basic selection; if you want to opt for premium selection, the price may shoot up to $125. If you want to make some additional repairs, then it is going to cost even more.
In general, professionals charge less for larger boats than small boats. The cost further depends on the place where the boat will be painted. Also, painting older boats costs a lot more than new ones, as the professional will need to repair the damages prior to bottom painting.
You are in luck if your boat has never been painted before because it is going to cost the least as the professionals will not need to remove any paint.
Keeping the location and the boat size in mind, these are the estimates that you may end up paying.
60-feet and larger boat: $56 per linear feet + $555 for a premium selection
55-feet to 59-feet boat: $49 per linear feet + $490 for premium selection
50-feet to 54-feet boat: $43 per linear feet + $400 for a premium selection
44-feet to 49-feet boat: $38 per linear feet + $330 for a premium selection
37-feet to 43-feet boat: $34 per linear feet + $250 for a premium selection
30-feet to 36-feet boat: $29 per linear feet + $190 for a premium selection
29-feet boat: $25 per linear feet + $155 for premium selection
Frequently Asked Questions
In this section, we have answered some of the frequently asked questions regarding hull painting a boat. We strongly recommend you read this part carefully.
How often should I paint my boat?
Like we mentioned earlier, if the boat hits the water daily, get it checked every year to know if it needs bottom painting or not. In most cases, it will be required. Plus, if you use the boat for commercial reasons, you would have to get its bottom painted at the end of each season. And finally, if it mostly stays ashore and you take it out occasionally, it will require bottom painting every other year.
What are some of the popular brands of bottom paint?
Yes, it can; however, it is mostly negligible. It depends largely on the paint job; if it's smooth, there should be no problem. Having said that, if there are multiple coatings of antifouling bottom paint on the hull of your boat, then the loss of speed will be noticeable.
Furthermore, ablative bottom paints are meant to shed their coatings over time, so the coating may wear off over time, and weed may begin to grow underneath the hull. In that case, too, the boat will experience noticeable speed loss.
Final Thoughts
Bottom painting the boat is a must if you take it out in the water quite frequently. It protects the boat and also makes it look attractive.
However, when it comes to the cost of bottom painting, it is quite affordable if you know what you are doing, given the wide range of options available out there. Taking proper care of the boat, especially the hull, will make it last a very long time.
On that note, we have come to the end of this informative article. We hope we could provide some clear insights on the cost to bottom paint a boat. For further queries, kindly drop a comment down below.
A fresh coat of paint can add pizzazz to any room. From rich hues to earthy tones - there’s nothing a splash of color can’t fix!
If you don’t have time or money for a full-blown renovation project, then a quick paint job is the best way to hide stains, deformities, and design flaws in your house or commercial property. However, you need premium quality paint for the project, and Benjamin Moore is one of the top brands that come to our mind.
With an interesting history, a prolific range of top-quality products, and 3500+ color options, you couldn’t have asked for a better alternative.
If you are wondering about the paint costs, we will answer that question and much more. In this guide, we have compiled the different products from Benjamin Moore and elaborated on their features and price.
So, without further ado, let’s begin!
Brand Overview
Before we delve into details, here’s a quick overview of Benjamin Moore and what makes it one of the most sought-after paint brands available today.
Started in 1883, with the aim of selling premium quality paints and stains, Benjamin Moore has expanded its portfolio and strived to become one of the leading market brands. What makes it unique is its tie-up with thousands of independent retailers spread across North America and its focus on using innovative technology to produce excellent paints and finishes.
In 2000, this brand was acquired by Berkshire Hathaway and since then has taken long strides to produce a sustainable range of paint coatings.
What Determines The Cost Of Benjamin Moore Paint?
Benjamin Moore offers a wide variety of high-quality paint products, and although the prices are on the higher side, the brand also has some budget-friendly options. Having said that, we believe it is better to make a one-time investment and choose an expensive option that will provide a premium finish and look stellar for years to come.
Before discussing specific product prices, we think it’s best to look at the factors determining these prices. For instance, a paint that offers excellent coverage and can cover both interior and exterior surfaces is naturally going to cost more than one that can work only on interior surfaces.
So, in this section, we will be looking at the factors that determine the cost of Benjamin Moore’s paints. Let’s get started.
Finish Type
The foremost factor that determines the price of the paint is the sheen or finish type. Benjamin Moore offers the following finish types:
Flat Finish
If your wall is uneven or has other imperfections, there’s no better way to hide these than by opting for a flat finish. It provides excellent coverage and is not as reflective as some other finish types.
Eggshell Finish
This finish type is usually recommended for high-traffic areas such as the kitchen or family rooms as it is easy to clean. In addition, it provides a subdued polished glow that makes the area look elegant and sophisticated.
Matte Finish
Matte finish is shine-free and can successfully hide surface imperfections. Besides, it is pretty long-lasting and is recommended for bedrooms, ceilings, and study areas.
Satin Finish
Satin finish lies midway between matte and high-gloss finish types. It has a velvety luster and is usually used in dining halls to give it a rich look. Since it can be washed easily, you don’t have to break your back to maintain it.
Semi-Gloss Finish
A semi-gloss finish provides a highly reflective surface and can work on doors, window frames, and cabinets. Besides, it has an easy-to-clean surface and can be used in high-traffic areas too.
Sustainability
Different product lines from the brand, such as Regal, Ben, and Eco Spec, meet all safety standards and are formulated to release a low amount of VOCs (volatile organic compounds).
The Natura range from the brand, in particular, was considered to be the benchmark in environmentally feasible paints and was certified asthma and allergy-friendly. Eco Spec, which received the Green Seal Certification, later replaced it.
Given the growing emphasis on using sustainable paint products, Benjamin Moore has started focusing on manufacturing “greener” options that do not release any harsh fumes or emissions. As a result, the price of these products is higher owing to their advantages.
Mildew Resistance
Certain additional qualities such as mildew resistance, weatherproof properties, and durability affect the price of paint.
If you are looking to paint the kitchen, bathroom, or other moisture-prone areas, then you’ll have to shell out a more significant sum for mildew-resistant paints. Similarly, if you wish to paint exterior surfaces such as sheds, then you need durable and weatherproof paint. So, these additional features increase the price of paint per gallon but improve its functionality and longevity.
How Much Does Benjamin Moore Paint Cost?
Now that we have analyzed the factors that determine paint cost, it is time to delve into the specifics. Having a comprehensive idea about the cost of different product lines from Benjamin Moore will help you get a ballpark estimate for your paint job. It will also help you decide what paint best suits your needs. So, let’s look at all the deets!
Interior Paints
Benjamin Moore has a vibrant line of interior paint products that are fade-resistant and easy to work with. Besides, they remain smooth and are hard-wearing. So, there are no chances of chipping or cracking. Out here, we have listed the diverse range of interior paint products from the brand with their features and prices.
Aura
Formulated using Color Lock Technology, Aura stands out because of its color vitality and durability. The colors are thick and vivid and can endure regular washing without fading.
Besides, the paint retains color consistency over time and produces vibrant, accurate hues because of the Gennex Color Technology engineered to improve paint longevity and resist fading. This makes it stand out among its competitors, who use surfactants (chemicals) to disperse the pigments evenly. Although the colors are rich initially, they fade over time because of the presence of chemicals.
Apart from durability, this color technology also has excellent ‘hide’ potential, and the paint itself is self-priming. So, you don’t have to apply more than two coats to get a gorgeous finish. In addition, it is mildew resistant and can cover up to 400 sq ft per gallon, depending on the wall type.
Coming to the finishes, we have this range available in matte, satin, eggshell, and semi-gloss finishes.
Wait...there’s more! The Aura Bath And Spa series is a subdivision of this range and comes with a matte finish for easy cleaning. Also, it is ideal for moisture-prone areas such as kitchen, bathroom, and other high-humidity areas.
At last, we come to the price. Aura paints will cost you a tidy sum of $80 per gallon. Although this is by no means humble, we’d argue its features far outweigh the price.
Regal Select
The Regal Select line from Benjamin Moore is acrylic-based and comparatively less expensive than the Aura range. It is spatter-resistant, blends seamlessly into corners without creasing, and is easy to work with, even for DIY enthusiasts or first-time painters.
This paint-primer is available in innumerable color options and provides excellent coverage. So, it can effectively hide previous stains, and you don’t need to apply several coats to get a striking color. Moreover, the painted wall doesn’t require active scrubbing and is easy to clean with a simple soap and water solution.
This line is also formulated using the Gennex Colorant Technology. The absence of harsh chemicals makes it safe and sustainable, as does the low VOC concentration. Besides, it emits less odor, so you don’t have to worry about pungent paint odor engulfing your house.
The Regal Select line is mildew resistant and available in all five finishes - flat, matte, satin, semi-gloss, and eggshell. Thus, it can be your top pick for all home-improvement projects and can be applied to several surfaces such as ceilings, walls, drywall, wood, and plaster.
Priced at $59 per gallon, the Regal Select range is worth every penny you spend on them. It provides an elegant, uniform finish, and one gallon can cover up to 450 sq ft without compromising on paint thickness or coverage. So, you get what you pay for!
ben Interior Paint
ben Interior Paints should be the ultimate choice when trying your hands at a paint job for the first time. It is much more affordable than the Aura and Regal Select line and formulated with the specific goal to provide an easy painting experience.
This premium-quality painter-primer gives a flawless finish to your hallway, dining room, cabinets, and other surfaces that require regular cleaning. In addition, the flat finish type is ideal for ceilings and other low-traffic areas.
Apart from flat, it comes in two other finishes - eggshell and semi-gloss. Thus, you can rely on ben Interior Paints for your home improvement projects if the more expensive options go beyond your budget.
It is spatter-resistant, contains low VOCs, and is formulated with Gennex Color Technology to get gorgeous and rich hues at nominal prices. What’s more, it is washable and priced reasonably at $42 per gallon.
Since you can cover roughly 400 sq ft per gallon, we can safely state that this is one of the most affordable paint solutions you can get from this brand.
ADVANCE Interior Paint
If you are looking for waterborne-alkyd hybrid paint specifically formulated for cabinets, wood surfaces, trim, or doors, then you’ll be pretty impressed with the efficacy of ADVANCE Interior paint.
It has a separate paint primer that can improve adhesion, block stains, and provide a level surface for your painting job.
The paint line is spatter-resistant, easy to apply, and clean. Besides, it is durable and contains low volatile organic compounds. So, you can get a furniture-like finish on a wide variety of indoor surfaces without worrying about the paint chipping or cracking over time.
Moreover, the paints can be tinted with waterborne colorants from Benjamin Moore to get different colohttp://homesthetics.net/best-ceiling-paint/rs and excellent coverage. It is available in several finishes, including matte, semi-gloss, high-gloss, and satin, and is priced a little over $50 per gallon.
Muresco Ceiling Paint
We’ll end our list of interior paint products from Benjamin Moore by talking about this Muresco Ceiling Paint. As you already understand, this paint is specifically formulated to hide imperfections, level, and coat ceilings. It is a paint-primer combination, so you wouldn’t need multiple re-coats to get a flawless finish.
Besides, it is only available in a flat finish type to eliminate chances of glare and goes over easily without splattering. It is priced at $42 per gallon, which is pretty reasonable given its fantastic quality.
Exterior Paint
Exterior paint should be tougher, with the ability to withstand harsh weather conditions. Besides, it should be resistant to water damage and mildew formation, all the while providing excellent coverage for your outdoor surfaces. Benjamin Moore delivers on all these grounds and much more. Let us tell you more about its line of exterior paints!
Regal Select
Formulated using advanced alkyd technology, the Regal Select range provides superb adhesion, even to grained, chalky surfaces and other hard-to-coat surfaces like wood and vinyl. Since it has sufficient open time and superior flow, it is ideal for detailing jobs.
Moving on, the paint can be applied and cured in temperatures as low as 35℉ and gives a durable finish that isn’t prone to cracking, chipping, or peeling over time. So, your painted exteriors will look fresh for years to come. In addition, the colors are vibrant, mildew-resistant, and fade-resistant, thanks to the Gennex Color Technology.
Benjamin Moore offers three finishes for its Regal Select exterior range - flat, soft gloss, and low luster. Also, the products come with a lifetime warranty. Given its numerous advantages and versatility, this range is priced at a pretty price of $64 per gallon.
An exciting addition to this line was the Regal Select High-Build Paint, an acrylic-based formula for hiding small cracks and providing outstanding coverage.
Available in three finishes, the high-build exterior range has excellent flow and can be applied to several surfaces to cover imperfections and get a smooth surface without several coats. This is priced at around $56 per gallon.
Aura
Engineered with Proprietary Color Lock and Gennex Colorant Technology, the Aura line of Benjamin Moore’s exterior paints provides rich, radiant colors that retain their vibrancy over time.
Moreover, it provides superior coverage and fantastic durability against varying weather patterns. It dries quickly and can be cured in lower temperatures besides being mildew-resistant.
Also, it provides brilliant adhesion and can double as a primer in most instances unless the surface has major deformities. Available in four finishes, semi-gloss, low luster, satin, and flat, it is priced similarly to the interior paint range at $80 per gallon.
The Aura Grand Entrance range of exterior paints is explicitly meant for doorways and trim and is available in two finishes - high-gloss and satin.
ben Exterior Paint
If you are looking for sustainable and affordable exterior paint, then Benjamin Moore’s ben Exterior line is for you. There are several impressive features of this range. For starters, it offers brilliant coverage and has a superior flow for consistent application. Besides, it comes with a 25-year limited warranty - so your walls are likely to remain intact for years to come.
The 100% acrylic resin formulation delivers unrivaled adhesion, mildew resistance, and fade resistance. The quick-drying formula makes wooden, primed, and previously painted surfaces weatherproof within two hours of application.
In addition, it can dry in temperatures as low as 35℉, so you don’t have to wait till summer to complete your paint job. It is available in three finishes, flat, low luster, and soft gloss, to fulfill all your exterior painting needs.
The best part? It is reasonably priced at $48 per gallon, making it the least expensive product from the Benjamin Moore paint range.
Coronado Rust Scat
If you are looking for rust-preventative coatings for your metallic outdoor surfaces, then the Coronado Rust Scat is a perfect choice. Easy to apply, even over painted surfaces, you can use this paint line over ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
It provides excellent adhesion and is available in several attractive finishes, including gloss, semi-gloss, and satin. In addition, it is available in both water-based and alkyd-based forms and is priced at $55 per gallon.
Exterior Stains
While we are on the topic of Benjamin Moore paints, we cannot miss out on its fantastic line of exterior stains that are specifically formulated for wooden surfaces.
Arborcoat Stain
The Arborcoat stain line is available in different color options and can provide a durable and attractive finish to all wood types. In addition, it prevents blistering, stains, scuffs, and peeling. Its mildew-resistant and UV-resistant properties protect the wood while also enhancing its texture.
Besides, this self-priming stain is formulated with Gennex Color Technology to retain the original vitality and sheen. It is priced at $42.99 per gallon.
Coronado Maxum
Another excellent wood stain, the Coronado Maxum Stains and Primer range, provides mildew resistance and a durable coating that will accentuate the beauty of your wooden surfaces.
Available in waterborne-alkyd, acrylic, and alkyd forms, this line has fantastic color retention and is resistant to scuffs and fading. Besides, it is available in solid color, semi-transparent, and translucent choices. The price varies according to the type but is usually around $30 to $35 per gallon.
How Much Of Benjamin Moore Paint Is Needed To Paint A Room?
Before commencing with any paint job, you need to determine the amount of paint needed for your ceiling, windows, doors, and walls. Besides, you need to look into other essential items like rollers, brushes, tape, roller trays, etc., for the project. This helps you get a comprehensive idea about the tools you’ll be needing and plan a budget accordingly.
Now that you know the prices of all the different paint lines from Benjamin Moore, it is time to do some calculations and understand how much paint will be needed for the room.
Several factors determine the quantity of paint needed for a room. For instance, a drywall that is being painted for the first time will absorb a lot of paint, whereas a room that has been painted before and has no prominent stains will require fewer coats. So, there can be no one-size-fits-all answer to this question.
However, you can measure the length, width, and height of your room after subtracting the area of the door and windows to get a ballpark estimate of the room surface area. This will help determine the quantity of paint needed. As we have mentioned earlier, one gallon of Benjamin Moore paint can cover anywhere between 300 to 400 sq ft.
There are no two ways about the fact that Benjamin Moore is one of the high-end paint brands on the market. However, its efficacy and features justify the expense, and its longevity makes it cost-effective. But, if you want to economize and reduce the paint cost, we have some tips out here that’ll come in handy.
Bulk Purchase
That’s right! You can choose to purchase 5-gallon paint buckets that are available at a lower cost than one-quart or one-gallon variants. If you are remodeling and repainting the house, you’ll undoubtedly be requiring over one gallon. So, it is advisable to purchase the paint in bulk to get discounts and lower the cost per gallon.
Reduce The Number Of Coats
While it might seem like you are compromising on color vitality and coverage by reducing the number of coats, that’s far from the truth. Hear us out!
A well-primed surface requires a lesser number of coats, and although the paint lines from Benjamin Moore are said to be “self-priming,” there’s no harm in applying a primer underneath. This improves the coverage, accentuates the paint color, and increases the paint’s adhesion to the wall surface. As such, you’ll be minimizing the quantity of paint used.
This can particularly work wonders if you are painting on drywall or any other porous surface, especially for the first time.
Shop From Local Stores
Local stores are more likely to offer discounts and slash prices from time to time. Besides, they sometimes have dented boxes that are kept at the back of the store. As long as the paint inside is good, you can use them for your renovation project. Also, you don’t have to pay shipping costs on store-bought products, so that’s a bonus.
In addition, several hardware stores offer paint swatches that’ll make color selection much more effortless.
How Does Benjamin Moore Fare Against Its Competitors?
If you have done ample research on Benjamin Moore paints, you might have inadvertently come across Sherwin Williams. Both of these brands have a prolific range of high-quality products for your interior and exterior painting needs.
But, what makes Benjamin Moore stand out is that it delivers the same performance (arguably better) at a lower cost. For example, let’s take the most expensive products from both brands. The Aura line from Benjamin Moore is priced at $80 per gallon, whereas the Emerald line from Sherwin Williams is priced at $90 per gallon.
The same goes for exterior paints. The Regal Select line from Benjamin Moore is priced at $64 per gallon, whereas the Superpaint Exterior Latex line from Shermin Williams is costlier at $70 per gallon.
So, if you’re wondering if there’s any other brand that can offer the same characteristics at a lower price, the answer is no. Benjamin Moore, although expensive, manages to deliver quality products that pack a punch and justify the cost.
What Is The Best Way To Paint Walls?
If you are a person who loves DIY jobs, then taking up the task of painting your house is the best way to save quite a few bucks. So, instead of hiring a contractor and shelling out the extra cash, you can save up and invest in high-quality Benjamin Moore paints.
One of the best features of this brand is that it’s pretty easy to work with. All you need is a few good rollers, brushes, and other items required for painting, and you’re good to go. In this brief guide, we’ll tell you how to go about painting your interior walls. Let’s take a look!
Step 1: Choose The Right Tools
For any paint job to be successful, you need the right tools. So, look for high-quality rollers, brushes, an extension pole, and a pan. You can find them online or at your local hardware store. You mustn’t compromise on their quality since it can directly hamper your home improvement project.
In addition, you can choose between Aura or ben interior paint line, depending on your requirements and budget. Both these lines have spatter-resistant paint that offers quick touch-ups and a smooth finish.
Step 2: Prepare The Wall
The next step involves properly cleaning the wall to remove any grease, soot, grime, mildew, or other stains. Although most of the paints in the Benjamin Moore range are self-priming and do an excellent job of providing adequate coverage, you can save on the number of coats by priming the wall in advance.
In addition, you can opt for a deep-colored or tinted primer if you are working with darker hues.
Step 3: Cut Into The Room
“Cutting in” the room signifies painting along the edges, the ceiling line, switches, door, windows, etc. This can get quite tricky since it demands precision, and we’d advise you to be careful and choose an appropriate brush for it.
Step 4: Start Rolling On The Walls
Pour the paint on the well-lined tray and load the roller by moving it back and forth on the pan till it’s completely saturated. Then work on the walls with it, following the top-down approach. However, do not apply too much pressure because it might lead to the paint running down or dripping. Allow the roller and paint to do the job.
Step 5: Avoid Streaks
One of the most challenging tasks you will be faced with while painting walls is avoiding streaks. This usually happens when you try to paint a large area in one go.
So, paint smaller areas and keep the roller wet. In addition, every time you reload it, start by working on a fresh row and then merge it with the painted area. This minimizes the chances of lap marks and produces a uniform surface.
Step 6: Let It Dry
It is advisable to apply at least two coats of paint to ensure sufficient coverage and hide previous stains. Besides, it improves the paint vibrancy.
So, apply two coats and leave sufficient time in between them. Also, let the paint cure properly before you place the wall fixtures or frames back.
Benjamin Moore Paint Cost FAQ
Can I Get Paint Samples From The Brand?
Yes! Benjamin Moore offers a wide selection of color swatches and paint samples for interior and exterior surfaces. You can order these online, and they are available in standard one-pint sizes that cost $10.99. So, before committing to any one color, you can try out multiple color samples.
Where Can I Find Benjamin Moore Paints?
As some of you might already know, you wouldn’t be able to find Benjamin Moore paints at Target or Home Depot. This is because the brand has a longstanding commitment to local paint and stain dealers and sells its products exclusively to them.
So, you can find them at your local hardware shop in the US or Canada.
What Makes Benjamin Moore Products Eco-Friendly?
Benjamin Moore strives to produce environment-friendly products and has taken significant strides in this direction. It has a range of products with zero or low VOCs. Besides, the Gennex Color Technology is a waterborne tinting system that doesn’t use any surfactants or chemicals to retain color consistency and quality.
In addition, you can easily access the Safety Data Sheet that elaborates on the toxicity of each paint type. All these factors, combined with the low odor emission, make it one of the most eco-friendly paint brands on the market.
Which Is The Most Eco-Friendly Paint From The Brand?
The Eco Spec range that replaced the Natura line is the greenest paint from the brand. It has minimal odor, adheres to stringent environmental safety policies, emits zero odor and VOCs, and has received several third-party certifications that hail it as one of the most sustainable paint options.
How Long Does The Paint Take To Dry?
There’s no fixed answer to this question. As a rule of thumb, the paint dries quickly in a dry environment, and latex-based paints dry faster than alkyd ones. So, it is best to refer to the technical data sheet that the brand provides for its products. It has specific details about the paint-dry time.
Final Words
Benjamin Moore has become a favorite among interior designers and coveted among homeowners for its carefully formulated product line with breathtaking colors, high coverage, and fade resistance.
Even though the paints from this brand cost more, they prove to be quite economical in the long run, as you wouldn’t have to re-paint the house for a very long time. In addition, the paint is immune to mildew formation and weather damage. So, even though its price is a pocket pinch, you will not regret it.
If you are willing to splurge, the Aura range of interior and exterior paints will be your best bet. However, if you want something on a modest budget, the ben interior and exterior line should be your go-to choice.
With that, we will take our leave. Do let us know what you think in the comments below.
Have you ever browsed through cooktops, eyed that fancy one which claims to have 30,000 BTU, and secretly wished to buy it?
It is okay if that sounds like you because we get it; those high-powered fancy and professional stoves are quite attractive. Which begs the question: is it really necessary at home? Let us answer that - not unless you plan to open a restaurant that only serves during rush hour.
Having a stove with that kind of power is not needed even if you entertain many people or have a big family with an even bigger appetite. Which makes way for another question: how much BTU in a stove is suitable for residential use? That is precisely the question we are going to answer today.
We have put together this short guide on how much BTU you need and how you can potentially save money by buying the right stove with the right cooking power.
So, without further ado, let’s get right into it!
How Much BTU You Need to Save Money on Cooking
What Is A BTU?
A British Thermal Unit, aka BTU, is a measurement unit used to measure how much heat the stove is delivering. Whether you are buying a stove, boiler, burner, or an oven, its BTU measurement will always be mentioned. It is a great way to compare the different heating capacities of products.
From a technical standpoint, 1 BTU of a stove can be described as the energy the stove needs to get 1 pound of water to 1 degree Fahrenheit (-17 degrees Celsius). To put it in perspective, the energy released in one BTU can be placed at an equal footing as one lit matchstick.
If you go through the manual for stoves or look at the label in a store, BTU will be mentioned in a range. One end is the maximum output and the other end is the lowest it can go after which the flame goes out.
Bigger Is Not Always Better!
A stove’s power is dependent on the BTU, and a higher BTU does not always mean it is the ideal stove to buy. A stove with a higher BTU means considering more things like a higher price point, higher gas consumption, higher ventilation, and so on.
When you buy a commercial stove with high BTU, it can be quite a hassle because these stoves cannot remain consistent on very low power. This leads to an inability to slow cook or simmer the food.
Additionally, with high BTU stoves, it is essential to have the right-sized pans. If the pan is not correctly sized, the stove’s heat will heat the room instead of what’s inside the pan. This is also why a lot of high BTU stoves are made to direct the heat upwards and not in every direction.
BTU Recommendation For Residential Kitchens
Commercial cooktops usually have high BTU as that’s needed for high-speed cooking in large volumes. But, this is not the case at home where one can cook at a regular pace and in small-to-moderate quantities. This is why it is essential to be practical about the required BTU of a stove at home.
At home, having one strong burner with a combination of two or three medium to low burners is the sweet spot for most users. And a mix of different BTUs on the stove allows more flexibility while cooking. Stoves of this kind are usually around 19,000 BTU or higher, with the strongest burner being around 12,000 BTU.
Final Words
High-end gas stoves are great to have but are often unnecessary for home setups and cost a lot. Investing in a practical cooktop for the house is better, cost-effective, and offers a broader range while cooking.
We hope this short guide has shed some light on the topic and will help you make the right choice. We will be back soon with more such informative guides.
Let's face it; being a good host is not an easy job. You will have to pay attention to every detail and ensure that there’s sufficient food for everybody.
With a big group of 30 people, the task is not going to get easier. But it does not mean that you cannot pull it off like a pro! To help you out, we have curated this detailed guide that will help you determine the amount of BBQ needed.
The first part will tell you about the things you should consider, followed by estimating the total amount of meat. We have also mentioned the dishes that work well for such parties and how much raw ingredients are needed.
So, without further ado, let's get down to business.
How Much BBQ Do You Need for 30 + Guests?
Things To Consider
We have listed down the main factors to consider while deciding the amount of BBQ. Read on to know all about them.
Age Of Your Guests
Age is an important consideration when it comes to serving food. If your guest list involves kids below the age of 12, then you can count on them not to eat much. ⅓ of a pound of meat should be sufficient for them.
For the average adult who is 21 or more, you should consider ¾ pound of meat per person. Now, some may eat more, while others, less. An average of ¾ pound of meat should account for everybody.
There are going to be some teenagers and adults who would keep gorging on the food. If it is your family, you will already know who they are. Assign 1 pound of meat for them, and we would advise not to go over this limit.
Keep several side dishes and make sure some of them are very heavy. Also, include fun drinks and some crisps to go along that will keep your guests sipping and chatting throughout.
Importance Of Side Dishes
We all have varied eating capacities, and while planning a BBQ event, you should ideally consider that. That also means planning the sides that will fill up some of your guest's appetites.
This is essential to save money as well as provide people with interspaces between different meat preparations. There are 2 kinds of side dishes that you could aim for:
Potatoes And Egg Salads
This is a heavy side dish option that is tasty and will fill up the guest's appetites. If you have a budget to conform to, make sure that there are large portions of mashed potatoes and egg salads on the side.
Coming to teenagers who might have a big appetite, they would love both these dishes, and it will, in turn, limit the meat consumption. Not only that, but it also is a brilliant addition to the plate and will give your taste buds a break while you try out different kinds of barbequed meat.
Vegetables And Fruit Salads
If you want the evening's focus to be the variety of meat that you serve, boiled vegetables and fruit salads can complement it perfectly. Pair it up with some cheese, and you are in for a classy barbeque evening.
This also goes well with meat tasting sessions where you might have several meat dishes to taste. You will have to make sure that people do not fill themselves up with heavy side dishes in such a case.
No matter what you choose, if you plan a barbeque dinner, estimate ¾ pound of meat per person so that there is no chance of food falling short. It might seem like a lot of meat, but when the music is good, and the alcohol keeps flowing, people tend to eat a lot!
If you plan to have extensive sides, you could reduce the amount of meat to half of the ¾ pound per person. That would fill up your guests well.
Determining The Time
People have different appetites at different points of the day, and hence, this is another point that you need to consider. If you are planning a lunch gathering, you can expect the appetites to be lower, and hence, ½ pound of meat per person should work well.
That should be enough, and paired with a side dish or two; you might have some meat remaining at the end of your party too.
But if you are planning a barbeque night under the stars, then you can expect the appetites to be much more. Expect half the guests to consume 1 pound of meat easily. If that is difficult to provide, ensure there are a good amount of side dishes.
Also, prepare crisps and bite-sized snacks that can be passed around with the drinks. This will fill people up and limit meat consumption too.
If you have planned an outing and the grill is the only source of food, people may end up eating more than a pound. That could be unhealthy, so keep fruits or veggies on the side for them to balance it out. You could also add burgers and hotdogs, which are filling options.
Plan For The Event
Who are you planning to invite? If you plan to invite your friends and colleagues from work for an informal night, they are going to end up eating a lot. Plus, if there are beers along with the meat, you should definitely count a pound of meat per person. The beer-meat combo is well-known and is almost irresistible.
In case of a family gathering, consider the age group and then plan on the meat. Here, you can stick to the general meat portions.
If you have a more formal setting where you are expecting a business meeting, or it is a church gathering or service, less meat is going to be consumed. This is because people generally do not fill themselves up and will not hog on food in front of unknown people.
Lastly, a party with a few of your close friends or family for a duration of 3-4 hours should mean a limited consumption of meat. Since time is limited, nobody gets the chance to gorge on food, and you can easily plan for half a pound per person.
Essential Tip
A piece of important advice that we should pass on to you from our side is to keep a note of the allergens. People may be allergic to certain ingredients, and it is best if you have complete knowledge about it. If the group that is going to be invited could be asked beforehand to mention any allergies that they have, it would make it easier.
Estimating The Total Amount Of Meat
By now, you must have gotten a fair understanding of the different quantities of meat that a person can consume in various events. This will now help you understand the total amount of it that needs to be purchased.
If you know that the group you are inviting are true carnivores who will not touch any salad or side dishes, get 30 pounds of meat in total. This should serve everybody well, and you could keep one light side dish along with it.
Besides, increasing the number of side dishes will reduce the amount of meat consumed. Plan for 3-4 salads, potatoes, or burgers, and you could reduce the meat consumed by half. We would suggest getting 17-18 pounds of meat, and that will work out well. Pair it up with hotdogs and good beverages, and your party is bound to be a success.
How Many Types Of Meat Is Ideally Needed?
This is an important question, especially since you will have invited a decent number of people over. We would suggest 3-5 variants of meat. Try keeping at least 3 types so that people can enjoy the variation in the meal.
The next question that arises is how to divide the meat between different preparations. We would suggest not to pay much attention to measuring portion sizes. Instead, focus on dividing the entire raw meat into 3 parts.
Then cut down each portion with a large professional knife to get equal portions. First, divide it into 10 parts. If they are big, cut each into 2 halves. Once you have divided the meat well, you can proceed to marinating and cooking it.
Moving on, in the next section, we will tell you about the popular types of meat preparations that you can consider. There are some crucial details that you should pay attention to while choosing.
Types Of Meat
The 3 standard options are ribs, briskets, and pulled pork. Read on to know how much of each item you would be needing.
Ribs
Barbequed ribs are one of the most popular treats and are loved by everybody. But it is also the trickiest to measure as there is less meat on each piece. We would suggest an average of 6 baby back ribs per person. This is the easiest to get, and 6 should fill people well.
If you are purchasing larger spare ribs, then 4 should do the trick. That will be enough as there will be 2 more types of meat along with this. For beef lovers, 2 giant beef back ribs should be more than enough. For kids below 12 years, keep half the quantity as they usually do not overeat.
Pulled Pork
Pulled pork is a delicacy that people love, and it is going to be the star of the party. Now, there is a specific way of calculating the amount of pulled pork that you would need. The meat yield is going to be 40%, and the rest of it consists of bones that cannot be eaten. We would recommend 5 pounds of pork, and to get that, you will have to purchase 8 pounds of raw pork for 30 people. If you want to buy more, remember the ratio and buy accordingly.
It is important to stock up sufficiently because this is going to be a favorite among people, and you do not want to fall short.
Brisket
Considering that there will be 3 types of meat and ample side dishes to go along with it, 5 pounds of the brisket should serve you well. But remember, we are talking about 5 pounds of cooked meat and not raw. The meat loses its weight while grilling, and 40% of the weight is reduced. So, prepare accordingly and buy at least 7 -8 pounds of meat for 5 pounds of brisket.
When preparing for the event, keep in mind that the amounts of meat that we just spoke about will suffice if you have proper side dishes and drinks along with it. For an average BBQ lunch or dinner, this is the right capacity but if you are planning to only focus on meat, then increase the amounts by 50%. That should be enough for the whole group.
How Much BBQ Sauce Is Needed?
Typically you will need a gallon of sauce for a group of 30 people, the BBQ sauce is often not given much attention to but turns out to be an important part of the meal. It is best not to buy 1 gallon of the same sauce. Buy 2-3 variants or make them yourselves beforehand. That will provide the guests with different flavors to experiment with.
Burgers On The Side
The best part about burgers is that they are filling and will appeal to carnivores as well as those who are picky about eating. They are really flavorful and will be a great addition to the meal.
For a group of 30 people, you should have 60 burgers or 30 burgers and 30 hot dogs. That is the ideal count but you should prepare for those with larger appetites. Keep 10 extra for these people, and you should not fall short.
Now, coming to the amount of meat required, you will need around ⅕ pound of meat for each patty. That will allow you to make 5 burgers per pound. If you want to make them meatier, make 4 patties from 1 pound of meat.
Here you do not need to calculate the weight loss of meat, and you can buy just the amount needed. Another suggestion from our side is that you can make the patties instead of buying them readymade. While readymade options will save you time, you will end up spending much more money. Make your patties the previous day and grill them on the day of your event.
Final Words
Imagine having everything in place, and then you end up with less salt or seasoning! While you are paying attention to the amount of meat, it is also important that you consider the smaller details. Buy ample amounts of sauce, salt, pepper, chili flakes, and napkins. These would be the basics that could make or break the event.
So, finally, you are prepared to send out invites for your upcoming BBQ party. If you plan to invite more than 30 people, follow the food ratio and increase it accordingly.
With this, we have come to the end of our guide. We hope you are prepared to deal with the party. Keep a few extra burgers or hotdogs just to be safe.
Let us know about your experience in the comments section below.
With winter around the corner, you know that snow will be a problem soon. Thus, this might be the right time to invest in a snow blower.
There are several notable brands with excellent offerings that get the job done. But, before you make the purchase, it is best to know the right prices of the products. Nobody wants to overpay and ultimately be stuck with a model that doesn’t get the job done.
Luckily, we have got you covered. Here, we’ve listed the various kinds of snow blowers, depending on their prices and functionalities. Usually, there are several factors to be considered when buying a snow blower, including where you live and the kind of snow that area gets. We also realize that the expenses of maintaining such machines is an important consideration for many.
So, without much ado, let us get into the details of the matter.
Cost of Snow Blowers by Type
The average price of a snow blower is around $400, but depending on the extensivity of use, the price might go up to several hundred dollars. For example, for those living in places where winters don’t see heavy snowfall, an electric snow blower would be ideal. It is compact and can get the job done without any hassle.
On the other hand, for those who live in areas of denser snowfall, a heavy-duty option is recommended. Gas-powered snow blowers come in handy here. We’ve categorized the snow blowers by type and how much they might end up costing, as well.
Electric Powered Blowers
These usually belong to the lower end of the cost scale and are intended to be much more compact. The electric-powered blowers are simpler but less powerful. Hence, they come in handy when one has to clear relatively lighter amounts of snowfall throughout the season.
Some might find these snow blowers limited by the length of the extension cord. Even while operating, you have to be careful not to run over it. In spite of this slight problem, these machines are extremely dependable, can be stored easily, and start-up quickly as well.
If you need to keep your deck or patio clear of light to medium snow during winters, this is the right choice. The snow blower is extremely lightweight and can reach the trickier areas too. Most of these machines easily fall below the average $400 price tag.
Battery Powered Cordless Blowers
As you can understand, a cordless snow blower is designed to be more maneuverable than its corded counterpart. These machines are also built to be more powerful, so they can handle a little heavier duty cleaning, as well. Naturally, with these overt advantages, this variant is also priced slightly higher in the market.
Gas Powered Blowers
These snow blowers usually have two designs, single or two-stage models. Since there are more variants here than for the electric-powered ones, these snow blowers cover a whole spectrum of prices.
The gas-powered blowers come equipped with 4-cycle engines. They need both oil and gas, and other measures have to be taken for maintenance too. For example, you have to drain fluids, clean the carburetor, replace the belt occasionally, and check the spark plug. However, these are all relatively inexpensive and simple tasks.
On average, you’re likely to find that a gas snow blower will be 20% more expensive than an electric one. Among the gas-powered blowers are single-stage blowers and dual-stage blowers.
Single Stage Blowers
These blowers mostly come in handy for residential users and operate on a system which is auger driven. This pushes the machine forward as it takes up the snow, throwing it through a chute. Despite being a powerful piece of machinery, these blowers are somewhat limited.
Their capabilities are hindered since only one auger happens to do all the work. Even the size becomes somewhat of a constraint. These machines can clear three to eight inches of snow in one pass. Thus, if you need to clear out your walk or driveway, this snow blower is the right choice.
Of course, it is on the affordable side and is, therefore, popular with the majority of homeowners.
Dual Stage Blowers
As the name suggests, these blowers have everything one might expect in the single-stage variant, apart from a few other additions. Since the machines are driven by both an auger and impeller, they are equipped to handle heavier and deeper snow than the single-stage counterparts.
They have a wide range of sizes, which also determine their capabilities. If you’re looking for ones apt for residential use, you can find them. There are also options to obtain the larger, tracked variants, capable of handling large amounts of snow at any given time.
These machines often come with additional comforts, like heated handles, the drive systems to go in forward and reverse, as well as the chance to hook on cabs for protection from harsh weather.
Heavy-duty blowers without such amenities can cost you from $400 to $600, but if you want one with the bells and whistles, then be prepared to spend north of $600, sometimes even thousands, for a professional blower capable of handling larger areas.
What Maintenance Do Blowers Need?
Now that you know the prices of the different kinds of blowers in the market, the next thing you need to understand is how much you might end up spending on maintenance.
When it comes to electric blowers, almost no maintenance is needed. Very rarely, you might have to replace some worn out parts. These are mostly good to go once you plug them in.
In the case of cordless snow blowers, regular maintenance is not needed either. But, you have to replace the batteries if they drain out.
Finally, as we have seen, the gas-powered blowers require some changes, which are mostly inexpensive.
Maintenance for Gas Snow Blowers
Several components of gas snow blowers need maintenance and constant observation. These include the following.
Changing Oil
Although oil has to be changed soon after the first five hours of using the blower, it doesn’t need to be altered again until the end of the year. However, you might need to change it if you’ve used it for around 50 hours. At the same time, we recommend checking the oil after five hours of use to see if it has become too dirty, warranting a change.
Spark Plug
Normally, it is best to change a spark plug once in a particular season. Alternatively, you should change it after 100 hours of use. But, it is best to clean the spark plug in an interval of 20 to 30 hours and to check the gap. This is how it remains clean, and you know if it needs to be changed sooner than usual.
Skid Shoe
These prevent the augers on two-step blowers from picking up rocks or scraping the ground. As a result, skid shoes get worn out and need to be replaced as and when needed.
Fuel Stabilizer
It has to be added to the tank after every season to preserve the gas left in it. Obviously, it makes it easier to start the blower the next season if this simple step is followed.
Shear Pins or Shear Bolts
These don’t cost much but are nifty additions, ensuring the longevity of the blower. They are built to break if there’s a lot of torque on the augers. Ultimately, these pins prevent costly damage to the blower. The pins should be replaced as needed.
Cost of Maintaining Gas Blowers
The cost of maintaining these blowers stem from the parts that require care. Firstly, we have spark plugs, which costs around $22.74. They’re needed at least once a year and can be found in maintenance kits.
The fuel stabilizer is $9.87 and is also needed only before prepping the blower for the off-season. Shear pins set you back by $8.78. Considering they’re only needed if they break or get lost, one cannot possibly need more than a few pins each year, making this rather inexpensive as well.
Finally, we have the skid shoes, which cost $30.99. But, these don’t have to be replaced each year.
Final Words
As you can see, electric snow blowers are the cheapest overall. Not only is the market price lower, but there is almost no additional cost in maintaining these machines. But, at the same time, they are completely unsuited for heavy-duty tasks.
The gas-operated blower, on the other hand, can be rather expensive. It all depends on what make and model you’re buying. There are further maintenance costs as well, but these are quite affordable. After all, when it comes to functionality, they are unparalleled.
We hope the guide helps you decide what type of snow blower will suit you the best. As usual, we look forward to hearing about your experience.
The best way to protect your wooden surface is to apply a coating of polyurethane.
Many people like to add a layer of polyurethane to their floors and admire its shiny glossy look. How does that help the floor, you ask? Polyurethane is a water and chemical-resistant product and forms a strong protective layer, preventing any damage to your hardwood floor and furniture.
If you are looking to apply polyurethane to wooden items but have no idea how to proceed, you’ve reached the right place. No need to look any further for queries regarding polyurethane types, coating, drying, and application. We’ve got you covered in this comprehensive guide.
Let’s find out all the aspects related to polyurethane, beginning with its types.
Polyurethane Coating
So, what is polyurethane, and why do people use it for coating surfaces in the first place? Polyurethane is essentially a type of varnish which is applied over wood to make it sturdier and maintain the outer layer. Adding a few layers of polyurethane makes the surface waterproof, heat, and scratch-resistant.
Along with its protective properties, it is shiny and smooth to look at, which improves the beauty of your wooden furniture. If you plan to add a finishing layer at home, applying a coat of polyurethane makes the most sense. Even though there are a few essential methods you should learn about, it is by far the easiest product for DIYers to work with.
Although we think of polyurethane as oil-based, that is not always the case. There are two types of coatings- water-based and oil-based; and their different properties are something that would be useful to know.
Types Of Polyurethane Coating
Oil-Based Polyurethane
Oil-based polyurethane is the more common type of coating used for furnishings. The substance is created by adding polyurethane resin to varnish, which gives it its resistant properties after curing. Also, it has been around for much longer than water-based polyurethane.
Compared to other finishes and varnishes, these have a thicker and oilier consistency. But of course, this depends on the number of coats you choose to add. After application, it leaves an amber-colored hue which adds warmth to woods with lighter shades. These coatings can also be easily cleaned using mineral spirits.
Using this type of polyurethane comes with its pros and cons. While you get a super strong finish that looks beautiful, these dry slower. As a general rule, oil-based paints or varnishes take longer to dry than water-based ones.
And, if you add three or more coats, the process can take you much longer to complete. Also, these contain high levels of VOCs, which is why some people prefer water-based coatings nowadays.
Water-Based Polyurethane
A more environment-friendly option for your surfaces is water-based polyurethane. These are a safer option because of a lower amount of VOCs, which is why people switch from oil-based polyurethane to water-based ones.
Also, if you do not want to wait around for every layer to dry, the water-based polyurethane would be better suited to your needs. It levels easily and dries quickly, allowing you to complete the floor or table varnish in a few days instead of weeks.
Furthermore, you can apply more coats since it dries off quickly. However, even though some aspects of this type of polyurethane coating are great, it has a few drawbacks. For example, the final finish is not as durable as oil-based ones, and it may get damaged by water.
Also, the application of water-based polyurethane raises the wood grain; thus, a few extra layers will be essential to get a smooth finish. And since the consistency is rather thin, you’ll require more layers of coating to get a final glossy finish.
How Many Coats Of Polyurethane Should You Apply?
The number of coats you apply will alter the appearance of the surface and also change the strength of the wood. But how will you know if one, two, or three coats are ideal? One thing is for sure- if the underlying wood has to be adequately protected, multiple layers are necessary.
Another general rule is that water-based polyurethane coats will require more layers than oil-based varnish. But, ultimately, the number of coats will be determined by the surface type, how frequently the surface is used, and the level of protection required.
Hardwood Floors
When it comes to deciding the number of polyurethane coats for hardwood floors, the first thing to consider is the type of varnish. As mentioned before, water-based and oil-based varnishes are very different and will need a different number of coats. But it is also essential to consider the condition of the wooden floor and how often the floor is in use.
If you are applying water-based polyurethane on the floors, at least three thin coats are a must. Because the varnish is thin, note that it will raise the grain of the floor. Three coats should be enough for forming a protective layer, but if you want to go the extra mile, you could add a fourth layer.
It’s recommended to add the layers and buff the uneven parts so that the end result is a smooth and almost reflective floor. If you select an oil-based polyurethane, you could opt for two coats on the hardwood floor. A new and well-maintained surface should not need more than two layers, one for sealing and the second for finishing.
Hardwood floors that need a fresh look after many years of use might need a third coat; however, this is not necessary. Now, for those of you who are confused between selecting water-based and oil-based products, we recommend water-based polyurethane for hardwood floors.
This is because water-based varnishes are much more manageable and can be covered with a new coat if the existing one is messed up. But oil-based varnish can chip, peel and form dents if not handled with care and might ruin the final look of the floor.
Furniture
If you are looking to apply a layer of polyurethane on wooden tables or chairs, there are a few things you should consider. You already know that oil-based and water-based varnishes will have different drying times, but there’s another factor to look into.
When an oil-based varnish is applied, it dries off to become a rich amber-hued color which transforms the furniture giving it overall warm tones. Water-based varnish doesn’t have any color of its own and merely provides a smooth sheen, retaining the color of the table underneath.
Here the decision lies with you to choose based on color differences. The warm hues make wooden tables look richer and beautiful, but it is possible that the shade might not match your room or house decor. If the extra warmth adds interest to your room, the oil-based varnish is a great option. But if you’d rather not hide the natural color of surfaces, the water-based varnish is better.
Applying Polyurethane To Surfaces
There are several ways to apply a polyurethane finish. You can choose to brush it on, spray all over the surface or wipe it into the wood. If the varnish is applied using a brush, there are chances of the brush strokes remaining on the surface, giving an uneven look. This is why many DIYers prefer to spray the varnish on, which is similar to spraying paint on walls.
Spraying is the best method, especially if the surface is not flat. And while it’s easier this way, you get thin layers of varnish; thus, 5 or 6 coats are required. While spraying, it is crucial to work with a steady hand to prevent any drips and spills.
If you hold the spray in one place for a long time, the liquid polyurethane will drip and need immediate cleaning. One drawback of spray painting is the release of harmful fumes, which might not suit people with sensitive skin. If you plan on applying the varnish on a flat surface like the wooden floor or table, using brushes would be the best option.
Stepwise Guide To Applying Polyurethane
Applying polyurethane to surfaces is not a difficult task if you follow the correct method. If you are beginning the coating process, going through this section will help get a beautiful finish for your floor effortlessly.
Check Your Workspace
Before working with polyurethane, the first thing to check is the area and location of the application. Is it a spacious room or a small basement? How well-lit is the room, and does it have windows for ventilation? These questions are imperative for safety reasons and will also affect the drying time of the varnish.
Since most varnishes, mainly oil-based ones, emit VOCs, it is necessary to have good ventilation in the room. To improve ventilation, leave the windows and doors open for fresh air to pass through.
For safety reasons, make sure to wear protective gear while applying polyurethane. Prepare for clear safety goggles, gloves, and a respiratory mask to protect against VOCs and fumes arising from the varnish. Lastly, ensure the work area is well lit with ample sunlight or artificial light. If the light is dim, it will not be possible to spot minor imperfections and brush marks.
Prepare The Floor/Surface
The surface must be well-prepped before applying any varnish. Clear out the room/ area to remove any obstacles for a continuous spray or paint job. If objects or wall decorations are not removed, they may get damaged by the spray or the volatile fumes. Thus remove the room of all wall paintings and light bulbs.
Now that other objects are out of the way, you can focus on the actual area of work- the hardwood floor. The first step is to sand the floor with coarse sandpaper thoroughly. This needs to be done all over the floor at least once. Unfortunately, there is no easy way out of this step, and the results do not look good if this step is skipped.
After the coarse sandpaper, gently rub the surface with finer sandpaper until it is smooth and even to touch. Clear up the dust and bits of wood using a regular vacuum cleaner and wipe the area till it is clear of any remaining dust.
Some people like to mop the floor with a slightly damp cloth, but this is not recommended because the floor will take time to dry. Besides, if some moisture remains in the floor and the varnish is applied on top, there are chances of the wood rotting from within.
This is especially true for oil-based varnishes because they are completely water-resistant and will trap the water with no way to get out and evaporate. But there is no need for concern while using water-based polyurethane. In fact, wetting the surface beforehand will raise the grain of the surface, which can then be sanded down to perfection.
In any case, the floor must be clear of dirt and moisture; otherwise, the polyurethane might not stick properly to the wooden panels.
Seal The Upper Layer Of The Floor
Now, the first layer of polyurethane can be applied to the clean hardwood floor. The first layer is called the sealant because it acts as a barrier between the wood and the following layers of varnish. This layer is always thinner than the rest and can be achieved by thinning the product you’ve already bought for varnishing.
Wood is usually porous, and direct application of thick polyurethane can form bubbles. A sealant covers up the pores on the wood and prevents bubble formation. There are special sealants available on the market which are meant to be applied on their own; however, they are expensive.
And, the same task can be accomplished by creating your own sealant layer, so buying an additional sealant product is not necessary. So how do you make polyurethane sealant? It’s simple, mix two parts of the oil-based product with one part of mineral spirits. Mix it well to get a fluid consistency that flows and spreads easily.
If you are using water-based polyurethane, use the same ratio, but replace the alcohol with pure water. Now that the mixture is ready use a large brush to apply the sealant on the floor using long brush strokes. Try to cover the entire floor without drips.
A good tool for this is a natural bristle brush which leaves fewer brush marks and gives a smoother finish than synthetic brushes. In some cases, the sealant will not adhere to the wood because the stain might be oil-based.
An oil-based sealant shouldn’t have this problem, but a water-based one will need extra preparation. To roughen the floor, you can use steel wool instead of sandpaper to help the varnish bond better.
Apply The First Coat
Technically, the sealant is the first layer that goes on the floor, but the first viscous layer is called the first coat. After the sealant is applied, wait for 24 hours before adding this first coat of polyurethane. After 24 hours or so, the sealant should be dried entirely if the room has access to fresh air.
This is when you can go ahead and apply the first coat. Remember not to create very thin layers with this first coat because this will cause gaps in random places. If you are spraying on this layer, the layers might be slightly thin so take your time to cover each section sufficiently.
And if you prefer using a brush, try to connect the brush strokes and allow them to overlap. This will prevent streaky lines after the brush is lifted. Also, try to smoothen the drips and spills as you go along the floor instead of waiting till the end to fix them.
Depending on the polyurethane base, you will have to follow different steps to complete the remaining steps.
A. Method To Apply Oil-Based Polyurethane
For oil-based polyurethane, the best tools for application are foam rollers or brushes, natural bristle brushes, or soft bristle brushes. Stay away from rough or synthetic brushes, which often leave streaks and do not allow the polyurethane to settle evenly.
Firstly, dip the foam roller or brush in the polyurethane can or tin and remove it, allowing the excess to drip into the can. Do not wipe the brush against the side of the can to remove bubbles or extra product. Doing so will leave gaps on the hardwood floor while applying.
Instead, tap the brush a few times into the center of the tin. Remember that oil-based polyurethane coats are typically thicker, and trying to force them into thinner layers will not give the much sought-after smooth finish.
The number of coats required will vary depending on the purpose and floor type. But two or three coat applications are the norm. Sanding is another step that you cannot miss out on when applying oil-based polyurethane.
B. Method To Apply Water-Based Polyurethane
The first thing you should know is that this type of varnish is much thinner, so there are more chances of dripping and spilling. The best tool for water-based polyurethane would be a foam roller, but you can also use a soft brush or cloth brush. The application method is slightly different from oil-based varnish.
Make sure you apply thin coats of this varnish because heavy layers of moisture-laden product can raise the wood grain. With oil-based coats, it is essential to sand down the first layer, but this is not required when working with water-based polyurethane. For best results, three coats of this varnish should suffice in lesser-used areas of the floor.
If the floor is in constant use, upto four layers would be required. Since the drying time is much faster, the entire project will take a shorter time as compared to oil-based polyurethane.
Sand The First Layer
After the sealant and first coat application, the hardwood floor needs a round of sanding to polish the uneven parts left by the first coat. But the sanding process can only begin after 24 hours have passed after the varnish application. The layer should be dry by this time.
Begin sanding with fine-grit sandpaper using the wet sanding technique until the surface is smooth again. To protect the varnish from chipping off, dip the sandpaper in water often while sanding. Finish by wiping the whole surface with a wet cloth and remove any dust and chipped-off pieces. The surface must be completely dry before applying the next coat of polyurethane.
Add The Remaining Coats
Generally speaking, you can apply more layers of polyurethane than recommended if you think the floor or furniture needs it. But remember to apply the next layer only when the previous one has completely dried up. Also, do not skip on sanding between two layers, especially when using oil-based varnish.
The only case where you can avoid this step is when the layers look visibly smoother and even. Lastly, the final coat needs to be polished, not sanded. This last step will give the surface the shiny polish that polyurethane coatings are known for.
Polish The Final Layer
Sanding the coatings makes them adhere to the next layer and flattens and levels them. But the final layer should be polished to give a shiny and almost slippery look to them. After the previous layer of varnishing, the surface should be left alone, untouched for at least 48 hours.
Use a good quality polishing product that is suitable for applying over polyurethane. It’s better to select a polishing product with fine-grit particles that remove the scratches caused by sandpaper. Dampen a soft cloth, apply some polishing cream over it, and rub the floor in a circular motion.
This should give a smooth and shiny look all over the surface. After the floor has dried, buff it with a dry cloth to finish the process. If the surface appears cloudy, repeat the process until it turns transparent and mirror-like.
Tips For Applying Polyurethane On A Table
While most of the instruction will remain the same as finishing hardwood floors, there are some other things to mention. First of all, try to work indoors as much as possible. Unlike floor varnishing, tables can be moved around the house, and some people like to work in the backyard.
But the problem with varnishing outdoors is that there is increased exposure to dust, smoke, and other contaminants. Even small bugs can stick to the wet varnishing and ruin the finish. That’s why working indoors in a ventilated place like a garage would be better for varnishing furniture.
The best results are achieved on a perfectly flat surface. So, if the table is uneven, you can sand it down using prickly sandpaper. The flatter the surface, the better is the leveling, and the coats glide easily without dripping.
How Long Should You Stay Off The Floors?
Freshly varnished furniture can be stored in the garage or an empty room where no one is likely to touch it. But what about floors? How long before you can actually walk on them? To understand the time required, remember that after drying, the varnish needs a long time to cure. Only then can we say that the entire process is complete.
However, you must have heard that complete curing of wood can take weeks or even a month. The question is- At what time is it safe to walk across the floor and start placing heavy furniture without spoiling the varnish? Let’s find out about both the stages - drying and curing.
Drying
Usually, it takes a minimum of 24 hours for the hardwood floor to dry. At this point, the uppermost layer has hardened, but the layers within are still processing. So, this floor cannot be used for walking and standing and definitely not for dragging furniture across the floor.
It is advisable to keep the room ventilated, so you keep the windows and door open. But if you have small children or pets who might suddenly run into this room, it is better to lock the door. In fact, no one should be allowed to walk on the hardwood floor for at least 48 hours after the varnish.
After 48 hours, you can walk on the floor wearing a pair of soft socks but refrain from moving in furniture just yet. If you walk in wearing shoes or boots or even barefoot, the pressure might leave marks that can not be removed once formed.
Curing
Curing is the process of molecules of polyurethane resin forming irreversible bonds and becoming extremely tough and resistant to change. Curing takes a much longer time than drying; until then, the bonds are not completely hard enough for everyday use.
On average, water-based polyurethane varnish takes two weeks to cure, while oil-based one takes 3 to 4 weeks to cure the same number of coats. Walking on the floor before the curing is complete is a big no-no. The best thing to do is lock the room or avoid it for the entire curing time.
As we mentioned, walking with soft socks should be tolerable for a week-old varnished floor. But walking with boots should be allowed only after the curing time is complete. The same goes for moving in cupboards, tables, and all other heavy furniture.
Working with oil-based polyurethane is a bit tricky. Not only does it take twice as long to cure, but it also dries in two stages instead of just one like the water-based one. In the first step, the light and water-soluble thinners evaporate in the air and leave a tack-free surface behind.
Over the next couple of weeks, the oils in the varnish react with the oxygen in the air and help it harden with time. After all the oil molecules have reacted, a hard protective layer is formed, which is the final stage of the curing process. Note that environmental factors play a role in the speed of curing time.
If the room is moist and humid, the varnish will take much longer to dry and cure. One easy way to know that the curing is complete is when the floor stops emitting odor. As long as you can smell the fumes, the curing process is not yet complete.
How Many Coats Of Polyurethane FAQ
1. How To Sand The Surface Between Polyurethane Coats?
Usually, fine-grit sandpaper should be good enough for sanding after each layer. Dip the sandpaper in water after each scrub so that the polyurethane doesn’t get damaged. When you are done with one layer, make sure the surface is dry before applying the next layer.
The grit of the sandpaper might need to be increased if the wood has a glossy finish. This is because it is difficult for polyurethane to adhere to glossy wooden panels. So, some extra sanding might be necessary before applying the first layer.
2. What Is The Best Temperature For Drying Polyurethane Coatings?
On average, it was found that polyurethane dries best at 77 degrees Fahrenheit. This is approximate and is not the only factor for drying. The room ventilation and humidity have an impact on drying time too. A room temperature of 77 degrees Fahrenheit and humidity of around 50 % are ideal for drying polyurethane coatings.
3. How To Remove Brush Marks From Polyurethane Coating?
Brush marks can be removed by the wet sanding method mentioned in the Stepwise guide. Use fine dry sandpaper and rub on only the parts which need to be leveled out. If the sanding is too intense, it will leave scratch marks of its own. Brush marks could result from applying thick coats, so you could opt for thinner coats to prevent them.
4. How To Remove Air Bubbles From The Coating?
Bubbles on the topmost layer can be removed with the help of mineral spirits. Dip a cloth with the chemical and rub the surface for about 20 minutes. This should get rid of the bubbles on the topmost layer. If this doesn’t work, the layer will need to be sanded and revarnished instead.
Final Words
Here we come to the end of our all-inclusive guide about polyurethane coatings. When using polyurethane, the main thing to remember is that even two coats protect the wood against water, dust, and insects. But getting a beautiful mirror-like sheen requires more than two coats, whether it be water-based or oil-based.
Finally, if you are looking to prevent wooden floor panels or furniture from spoiling due to humidity, oil-based polyurethane is your best bet. But, if you require a quick freshening up of older wood, water-based polyurethane should do the trick.
We hope this guide answers your queries related to polyurethane coatings and their application. For further questions, please ask away in the comments below.
Are you new to the DIY floor varnish club? Here you'll get information on all things related to polyurethane coatings and varnishes.
Whether you are a seasoned woodworker or just starting a home improvement journey, you are sure to stumble upon polyurethane coating solutions more than once. This is because polyurethane is a perfect finishing product for wooden surfaces.
If you have questions like, "How long does it take to dry?" read this piece till the end, and you'll have many similar queries resolved. We will talk about types of polyurethane, kinds of finishes, drying and curing time, along with valuable tips for getting the best out of polyurethane.
So, let's begin.
How Long Does Polyurethane Take To Dry?
In short, polyurethane takes 24 to 48 hours to dry and 25 to 30 days to cure completely.
Types Of Polyurethane Sealers
All polyurethane coatings or varnish are made of fine polyurethane resins, which can be dissolved in a liquid. You can think of it as a liquid plastic that can be spread on flat surfaces to protect from water, heat, dust and microbes.
There are various types of polyurethane coatings available nowadays, but we can generally classify them into two types - water-based and oil-based polyurethane. Even though both of them provide the same functions, they vary in drying and curing time.
So before discussing the drying time, let's take a look into the characteristics of the two main categories.
Water-Based Polyurethane
Water-based polyurethane is considered to be the safer option between the two since it does not contain any VOCs. Since they don't produce strong, headache-causing odors, they are much easier to work with. Generally, the solution is much thinner; thus, the coatings are paper thin too. Due to the lightweight solution, it doesn't take long to dry and cure.
Another factor that increases the drying time is the presence of water in the mix. As the water evaporates, it leaves only the polyurethane resin on the surface. However, to get an even finish, this type of sealer requires more layers as compared to oil-based polyurethane. Moreover, water-based polyurethane dries off clear and tends to fare better in the long run.
Oil-Based Polyurethane
On the opposite end of the spectrum is oil-based polyurethane. These provide comparatively thicker coatings due to their robust formula. The downside of this dense and oily formula is that it doesn't dry off easily. When it comes to safety and toxicity, they are safe to use for floorings and furniture; however, they do contain VOCs.
Volatile organic compounds in large quantities can be harmful to human health. It can cause respiratory symptoms like runny nose, itching in the throat, sneezing, and skin rashes if precaution isn't taken. These compounds and the oily solution combine to produce a strong odor which is unpleasant to be around and can even cause headaches.
Also, after a few years, you will notice the varnish change to a darker yellowish color which is not the case with water-based polyurethane. We will discuss in detail about the two types of polyurethane and their drying and curing time in the following sections. So make sure you read till the end.
Type Of Finish
Apart from the base of the polyurethane product, features like types of finishes are a contributing factor to the drying time. There are 3 different types of finishes available - high gloss, semi-gloss, and satin finish. Take a look at the 3 types because all of them have a different drying time.
High Gloss
This finish gives a sleek and shiny look to floors. It's suitable for hardwood floors and is resistant to scratches and water damage. They are often used in living rooms or even on wooden surfaces outdoors for their glossy look. Often you will find that these finishes stay longer and retain their gloss for a significant time.
Semi-Gloss
Semi-gloss polyurethane is quite versatile and durable. This is why it is often found on furniture, cabinets, doors and intricate wooden artwork. One benefit of semi-gloss is that it dries faster than high gloss polyurethane. This type of finish does provide some shine, but it doesn't match the slick look of high gloss options.
Satin
Satin finishes in polyurethane products do not provide any sheen or gloss to surfaces. In fact, they look almost like matte-finish most of the time. The little shine they have is subtle, making it look fresh, but otherwise, they have a unique appeal. These types of finishes are the fastest drying polyurethanes available.
Polyurethane Drying Time
Now the question arises, how does one know when polyurethane has dried? Take a look at this table to get a fair idea of the difference between water and oil-based polyurethane drying times.
Water-Based Polyurethane
Oil-Based Polyurethane
Time for next coat
7 hours
24 hours
Dried enough to touch
24 hours
48 hours
Add furniture
2 days
4 days
Add rugs and mats
1 week
2 weeks
Completely cured
25 days
30 days
Drying Time For Water-Based Polyurethane
Water-based polyurethane coating dries up quickly; in fact, they need merely 5 to 6 hours to dry. After 7 hours of applying the first coat, you can walk on the sealed floor without causing any damage. But remember to wear socks while walking because friction and dust from your bare feet might ruin the finish.
If you want to add the next layer or a finishing topcoat, you can do that after 7 hours of drying. After the 24-hour mark, you walk on the varnished floors with shoes as well. As far as moving furnishings into the room is concerned, keep a gap of 48 hours after the last coat to shift anything bulky in.
Pets and children should not be allowed in the room for at least 3 days. There are two reasons for this - one is for their safety, and the other is to ensure the varnish is maintained without scratches and marks.
Drying Time For Oil-Based Polyurethane
As we mentioned earlier, oil-based polyurethane takes longer to dry and cure. After application, it is recommended to keep the surface off-limits for at least a good 24 hours. If you have varnished a hardwood floor, you can attempt to step on it after 24 - 48 hours, but don't walk in with shoes or barefoot. Instead, wear a clean, dry pair of socks for inspection.
It goes without saying that you should keep children and pets away from the freshly varnished surface to prevent any interference in drying. After the 48-hour mark has crossed, the coating should be completely set, and you can take a walk on the floors with your shoes. Wait for another day to add the furniture back since dragging heavy things might damage the finish.
After two weeks or so, it is safe to bring in rugs and floor coverings. However, these are ideal recommendations that might not be necessary for all projects like wall or furniture coatings.
Note - These estimates are primarily valid for a moderate climate. If the humidity of the room is high or there is dampness and moisture accumulation, the drying time will significantly increase. Turning on an air conditioner or dehumidifier of increased ventilation may be required to speed up the process.
How Long Does Polyurethane Dry In Layers
Generally, no one applies only one coat of polyurethane. Even the thickest oil-based varnishes need two or three layers to settle in and show any kind of long term effect. Now, the first layer is the simplest, you just have to ensure the surface is sanded and bits of dust are thoroughly removed by vacuuming.
Next, apply the first layer in a thin coat and wait for it to dry. Once the coating is dry to touch without any stickiness or wetness, it is ready for the second coat. The surface does not need to be cured entirely for the next coat; surface-level drying is enough for the second and third coats.
Difference Between Drying And Curing
Now, there is a difference between drying and curing polyurethane coatings, even though these terms are often used interchangeably. While we discuss drying time, it is essential to understand the definition of drying and curing when it comes to polyurethane.
A coating is said to be dry when the external polyurethane hardens. At this stage, the varnish is no longer wet, sticky or tacky. However, the surface is not ready for use yet because the coating is prone to wrinkling, imprinting, and forming scars even at this stage. If too much pressure is applied, the smooth finish can be ruined easily.
And for curing, we call a surface wholly cured when the polyurethane resins have completely hardened (not just the surface). This happens when varnish has been exposed to oxygen, creating a chemical reaction that causes the hardening of the resins in the coating.
This is the final stage of any application process, and the floor is ready to use after curing. Often, it can take up to a month to completely cure a floor.
Curing Time
Now that we understand what curing is, you might be wondering how long it will take to cure floors and walls.
As we discussed earlier, we know the time required to dry and cure. However, there are certain aspects that we cannot ignore when it comes to a complicated process like drying polyurethane. Take a look at some of the factors that influence curing time.
Factors Affecting Curing Time
Type Of Polyurethane
Since water-based polyurethane solutions tend to be thinner as compared to oil-based ones, they are sure to dry much sooner. If the project needs to be completed within a time limit, water-based ones are your best bet as you can get many layers in little time.
Humidity
A room humidity percent of 50 - 70 is good enough for drying and curing usually. If the moisture happens to be too high, the varnish may not dry easily and will end up damaging the result. If your room suffers from high humidity levels, there are a few actions you can take to counter the effects.
Firstly, you can opt for oil-based polyurethane since water-based ones are more prone to damage by moisture. Secondly, you can install a dehumidifier in the room to help the coating dry quickly.
Temperature
External temperature is one of the most critical factors which can change the drying and curing time. Ideally, a room temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit is perfect for optimal curing. If the temperature drops too low or near the freezing point, the polyurethane coating will take far too long to dry.
Also, if drying at a cold temperature, you will notice a thin whitish layer will develop on the surface, which needs to be avoided. And if the room temperature is too high, it shouldn't have a problem curing, but the smooth finish might be compromised due to extra heat.
Number Of Layers
Before starting the application, you'll need to calculate how many layers are required for your flooring. Of course, if you opt for a water-based polyurethane, the number of layers needed will go up. Besides this, the thickness of coats will heavily influence the drying time.
If you use a brush to apply the varnish, the layers tend to be thicker than foam rollers. So, if you want to keep the layers thin, opt for rollers or sprays, which will save a lot of drying time.
Wood Type
This factor might be overlooked often because not many people are aware of the type of flooring. Essentially, if you have hardwood floors, then there can be a variation in drying and curing time depending on the type of wood.
Certain wood types like cedar and rosewood have chemicals that do not allow the complete chemical reaction required for layering. Any kind of interference in the chemical process will increase the time necessary to dry.
Cleanliness
The starting surface needs to be spotless. The first step is to sand the floor to remove unwanted bumps, to create an even canvas for applying varnish. An adequately sanded wooden surface can absorb the polyurethane solution quickly and thus allows for quick drying and curing.
Tips For Drying Polyurethane Coatings Faster
There might be occasions when you are running short on time or don't have the patience to wait for weeks for the coatings to dry. In such circumstances, there are a few methods that can help to increase the rate of drying. Let's see what these tips and tricks are -
Add A Thinner
A simple solution for thick polyurethane coating is to thin it down using solvents. You can add naphtha to the polyurethane solution because it helps the coating to dry faster. Naphtha has a higher evaporation rate than spirit or turpentine, making it an excellent choice for thinning varnishes.
Once you add the thinner, mix it well and pour it from a height to understand the consistency. It should be fluid and run efficiently. This lighter solution will not hold well on brushes, so a foam or sponge roller will be required to spread it across the surface. Try this method and see for yourself how much quicker the coating tends to dry.
Apply Heat
Polyurethane does not handle cold temperatures very well. It's not like the coating will get damaged by low temperature, but the drying time will become prolonged. This is especially true in frigid climates without a heating system or coating the floor during the winter season.
To overcome this issue, people use artificial heat to warm up the room to assist in drying the polyurethane quickly. While some people use powerful hairdryers, others use portable heating devices or heating lamps.
Do note that these methods are effective for drying the varnish speedily but not for curing it. The speed at which the floors cure cannot be increased even with artificial heat assistance.
Decrease Humidity
Similar to low temperatures, humidity also increases the hours required for drying. One of the many solutions to this issue is to use a dehumidifier in the room. After the coating for the entire floor is complete, you can bring in a dehumidifier and suspend it from the ceiling. It could even be attached to the walls to work overnight and remove the excess moisture from the air.
Even an air conditioner can do the same job. Set it at low humidity adjustment at room temperature, and it works just as well. If you know the humidity in the home is always on the higher side, you might want to consider the oil-based options. This is because they do not get affected by moisture in the environment the way water-based ones do.
Apply Thinner Layers
Applying thin layers will definitely save you a few extra hours of waiting for the floors to dry. It would help if you used a larger roller that can be dipped in the pan holding the varnish. This kind of tool will ensure you cover a large area at once. Apart from that, you can also remove the excess coating by running a dry roller over the floor.
Prepare The Surface
Even before you open the polyurethane can, the floor should be sanded and vacuumed. You can use any kind of sandpaper to flatten the uneven pieces of wood which might be sticking out. Then grab a vacuum and remove all the dust and debris. Once this is done, your surface is ready for the first coat of polyurethane.
Taking these efforts are essential because smooth and clean wooden panels allow the polyurethane to adhere readily. And this step will noticeably reduce the drying time.
Conclusion
The drying of polyurethane was one topic we really wanted to address because so many people seem to be confused about how to use them. Many people new to DIY home improvements also had requested for drying times of different types of polyurethane.
We hope we were able to resolve all your questions related to drying and curing polyurethane. If you have any further queries or would like to give a few suggestions of your own, the comment section is always open.
That being said, coating and varnishing your own home should not be a daunting task. Just skim through this article whenever you get stuck with applying polyurethane to the floors, and you'll get all needed for the next project.
Mowing the lawn seems like a straightforward task, right? But did you know that there is a right and a wrong time to do it?
Whether you consider yourself a lawn expert or not, growing grass isn’t entirely child’s play. If you have recently planted seeds or installed a new turf, you might be worried about the slow growth rate. But, if properly cared for, grass can begin to grow very quickly.
In fact, it can be tempting to bring out the lawn mower and start trimming immediately. However, this could do more damage than good.
It is essential to wait for some time before you begin trimming, as it can damage seedlings. So, if you’re wondering how long you should wait before mowing your new lawn, don’t fret! We have curated a detailed guide to help you understand this and more.
So, without further ado, let’s get straight to the deets!
How Long Should You Wait Before Mowing Grass?
Well, there is no universal correct answer to this. Depending on the kind of seed you use, it might take anywhere between 5 to 30 days before any grass starts growing. Of course, you should not bring out your lawn mower right away!
To encourage healthy grass growth, you need to water, feed, and provide adequate sunlight. However, allowing the grass to grow until a certain point is also beneficial to its health.
How Long Should You Wait Before Mowing Seeded Grass?
Let’s say that you decided to grow the grass on your lawn from scratch. Once you buy the right kind of seeds and plant them, it could be a long wait before you begin to see any growth. In fact, seeded grass can take the longest time to grow.
If planted during the active growing season, you should be able to see some growth within eight weeks. By this time, the grass blades should be around 3 to 3.5 inches tall. However, don’t get started with the mower just yet.
The first time you mow grass on the new lawn, make sure to tread carefully through the turf. Applying excess pressure or pulling on the blades violently can cause the seedlings to be forced out of the soil. This harms the grass as well as the soil, and it can be challenging to replant in the same area.
So, how do you mow the new lawn properly? Well, it helps to maneuver the lawn mower gently at first, without applying too much pressure or going too fast. Move the mower in one direction slowly, and then the opposite direction (to get smooth, even trimming).
It will also ensure that the roots of the grass remain protected and don’t suffer damage.
How Long Should You Wait Before Mowing Sod & Sprig Installations?
In contrast to seeded grass, sod takes a relatively shorter period to grow. Once the germination process begins, you can mow your lawn after about two weeks. That being said, heavy mowing can damage the grass, and we recommend that you wait for a few weeks.
Ideally, waiting for a month before mowing your new turf will ensure that the grass grows well, is healthy, and doesn’t go through unnecessary trauma.
When it comes to sprig installations, we recommend waiting for three to six weeks. Carefully observe the growth of grass - typically, sprig installations require more space to spread out and grow horizontally.
Even so, it is possible that the turf is still not wholly established. So, how can you know for sure?
Well, an easy way to check is to tug lightly at the corner edge of the installation. If the grass remains tightly bound to the soil, you can proceed with mowing. However, if you notice the blades coming off too easily or they seem loose in the soil, it is best to wait a few more weeks before mowing.
Why Do You Need To Wait Before Mowing?
You might be wondering why we recommend waiting for a few weeks before mowing the lawn. After all, no one likes a shabby looking garden, right?
We understand! However, if you mow too quickly, the grass does not get enough time to grow properly. Once the grass reaches about 2 inches in height, it automatically provides a shade or a sun and dirt barrier to the lower portion of the grass and soil.
Moreover, the taller grass blades protect the topsoil from losing excessive moisture. To keep the moisture locked into the topsoil and protect germinating seeds, it is imperative to allow grass to grow a few inches.
Another issue that can occur by over-mowing the lawn - drought stress. When grass is trimmed excessively, it can lead to shallow root systems. This, in turn, causes drought stress. With the top blades of the grass perpetually missing, the process of photosynthesis is compromised.
This leads to grass being in a perpetual state of distress and encourages pest infestations and pathogens. Ideally, you should allow your turf to grow (and stay) at least 2 inches in height.
The Proper Way To Mow Grass
Did you know there is a proper way to mow grass? Well, it turns out there is, and doing it may help you have a lush, healthy lawn.
Ideally, you should allow the grass to grow at least 3 inches tall, but not more than 4 inches. Before mowing, it will enable the grass blades to dry completely, as it will provide a healthy environment and ensure a neat, clean cut.
Stop irrigation for at least 48 hours - this is adequate time for the grass blades to dry. Furthermore, it enables you to trim the blades without causing them to tangle or get torn.
If you feel that the height of the grass is still too long, you can trim it in the opposite direction the next morning. It is best to allow the grass to rest for a day, as over-mowing can cause distress.
Ideally, you should remove only one-third of the length at a time. This leaves enough room for the grass blades to photosynthesize.
Pro Tip - Leave the grass clippings behind (instead of raking them up and disposing of them). These clippings will leave behind nutrients that are important for the soil and roots. Moreover, they help the soil retain moisture without adding excessive water to it.
In case you notice seeding weeds, it is advisable to bag up the clippings and dispose of them. You should also dispose of the trimmings if they are too long, as it will cause a mess rather than provide adequate nutrition).
The Right Way To Water Grass For Best Growth
If there is a proper way to mow a lawn, there must be an appropriate way to water it, too, right? Well, there is! The correct watering technique is one of the most critical factors that ensure proper, healthy grass growth.
When you plant seeds or seedlings, it is important to keep them moist, but not entirely wet. This moisture is what allows the seeds to develop and germinate into healthy grass blades. The topsoil (or the top 1-inch) of soil should be kept moist at all times.
We recommend watering your new lawn twice a day until you mow it. Seed hulls require an adequate amount of water to germinate into healthy plants. This new growth is unable to survive under certain conditions, like dry roots. Ensure that you keep a strict watering schedule to prevent roots from drying.
Once the seedlings have grown into taller grass and their roots have developed, you can reduce the frequency of watering. That being said, keeping a consistent watering schedule will ensure that your turf is perpetually lush, green, and healthy.
Final Words
Even those who consider themselves gardening lovers often forget that there is a right and wrong time to mow grass.
We hope this guide helped you understand more about healthy grass growth and when you should trim it. Be sure to familiarize yourself with the type of seeds you plant and the right conditions required to thrive.
With that, we have come to the end of our guide. Like any other plant, your turf requires a little attention, care, and maintenance to thrive and stay lush.
A wireless doorbell system consists of a transmitter and receiver. When someone presses the transmitter button on your door, it sends a signal to the indoor receiver, which then triggers the doorbell to ring.
Are you still using a traditional wired doorbell for your front door? Well, it’s about time you upgraded to wireless doorbells.
Let’s state the obvious - won’t need to worry about wires. Besides, when compared to a regular doorbell, a wireless doorbell offers convenience - both in features and usage.
However, you might be wondering - if it doesn’t have any wires, then how does it work? That is just what we have addressed in this guide. So, if you want to satisfy your curiosity, then keep reading!
What Is A Wireless Doorbell?
If you are not very well-versed in wireless doorbells, then allow us to give you a brief idea about what they are in this section. The information here will help you to understand the discussions presented in the later sections better.
In the old days, people used to knock on the doors to announce their arrival. Eventually, doorbells were developed, which provided a more efficient method for doing the same. And today, we have wireless doorbells that have the same principle as a wired doorbell, albeit without any wires.
Essentially, it is an alarm system for your front door that can be used without connecting to your household wiring system. These doorbells are usually battery-powered, which means they need to be charged from time to time.
Wireless doorbells also come with additional features to improve your home security. And they are much more versatile than conventional doorbell systems due to their wireless design.
How Do Wireless Doorbells Work?
Compared to a traditional wired doorbell, the mode of operation for a wireless doorbell is entirely different. A regular doorbell uses a series of wires to connect the switch with an electromagnet, which is its core component. When you press the switch, the circuit with the electromagnet is completed, which produces the sound that alerts you.
In contrast, a standard wireless doorbell contains no electromagnets since there are no wires to speak of. Instead, these doorbells use radio signals to generate audio or visual alerts when the button is pressed.
That is why the primary components of a wireless doorbell are a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter is attached to the button, which you place outside your front door. Likewise, the receiver is placed on the electronic chime box inside the house.
When the doorbell transmitter button is pressed, it sends out a radio signal. The chime box receiver picks up this signal and subsequently triggers an audible alert that you can hear.
Another thing to note is that the transmitter and receiver use variable frequencies, which prevents interference with other similar devices nearby. In a way, you can say that their method of operation is more similar to radios than regular doorbells.
As for the power supply, there is no need for any electrical wiring with these devices. They are powered by batteries, which makes them highly convenient to use. That said, you do need to recharge the batteries through an electrical outlet once they run out. Thankfully, most wireless doorbell models can be easily recharged, thereby reducing downtime and increasing convenience.
Benefits Of Wireless Doorbells
Due to their wire-free interface, they have numerous advantages over wired doorbells. We have discussed these benefits below, read on.
1. Easy To Install
One of the many complaints about regular doorbells that we have heard over the years is that they are quite complex to install. And that is true because connecting a device to the main electrical system of your house always comes with risks, especially if you are not as experienced. Not connecting electrical wiring properly to the doorbell prevents it from functioning, and it increases the chances of electrical hazards.
This is where wireless doorbells come in handy since you do not need to worry about potential safety risks. Owing to their wire-free design, you can install them without breaking a sweat. Simply install the doorbell button on a wall outside the front door, and then do the same for the receiver indoors.
In addition to that, you can place the doorbell anywhere you want, which makes it even more convenient to set up. This is unlike wired doorbells, which need to be placed along existing power lines, thereby reducing their overall flexibility.
2. Highly Versatile
A typical wireless doorbell is much more versatile than a traditional doorbell. The transmitter and receivers have a fairly long range, which means that you can install them anywhere in the house. On the contrary, a wired doorbell has to be installed as per the length of the wire.
What’s more, you can install multiple receivers on a wireless doorbell. For instance, if you have a large house, you can install two or more receivers across different rooms. That way, you can hear the bell no matter where you are.
You can also choose the alert type of a wireless doorbell, which can help if you have hearing problems. For example, if you are hard of hearing in one or both ears, you can use a bright light alert instead of a buzz or a chime on the receiver. Wired doorbells are not very user-friendly in this regard since they mostly come with audible chimes.
3. Customizable
Another aspect that users may find appealing about wireless doorbells is their customizability. You can conveniently adjust the volume of the chime bars according to your preferences. It also enables you to change the alert sound entirely. There are different chimes pre-loaded on the chime bar, which means that you can pick whichever you like the most.
You can do the same with the visual alerts as well. Its brightness, color, and pattern can be modified according to your liking, which gives your doorbell a personal touch. Such customizations cannot be done on regular wired doorbells, which is why many users might find them boring.
4. Come With Smart Features
Most wireless doorbells these days come with a host of smart features that improve overall user-friendliness. These features are unavailable on most traditional doorbells since their wired design can be a major hindrance to implementing digital systems.
That said, one such smart feature used in wireless doorbells is Wi-Fi connectivity. It can help sync the doorbell unit with smart home systems. Apart from that, it allows you to use the doorbell with mobile apps for greater security and convenience.
Another feature used in a smart doorbell is video and audio recording capabilities. Most wireless variants come with built-in cameras and microphones, which allow you to see and communicate with the visitor at your door.
5. Provide Improved Security
Compared to traditional doorbells, wireless variants are much more secure and safe. This is due to the different smart features that come with these doorbells.
With the audio and video recording features, you can see everyone who comes up to your door. The doorbell cameras come with wide viewing angles and motion detection. Thus, if anyone decides to snoop around your home, you can also see them on your phone, laptop, or PC. Moreover, these video doorbells allow you to record and store the video footage for you to check out later.
Likewise, the microphones come with a sound and tone sensor, which alerts you when anyone gets near the door. Besides, they can be seamlessly connected to your home security system, which keeps your household safe from unwanted people.
Warning
The smart security features mentioned here consume considerable amounts of battery power, which can reduce the lifespan of your doorbell. So, make sure to use them judiciously to avoid any issues.
Drawbacks Of Wireless Doorbells
While a wireless doorbell works as a better alert system than a traditional doorbell, it comes with its fair share of limitations, as discussed below.
1. Expensive
The biggest drawback of wireless doorbells is that they are considerably expensive. This shouldn’t come as a surprise, considering the features and convenience they provide to the user.
However, the higher price tag might act as a deterrent for consumers, especially if they have a limited budget. Even the most basic wireless doorbell model is considerably pricier than a wired doorbell, due to which many might prefer to buy the latter.
2. Difficult To Troubleshoot
While most wireless doorbells are designed to be durable, they are, after all, machines. And like any other machine, they can encounter issues from time to time. Troubleshooting these issues might be challenging for most users, considering how sophisticated they are than their wired counterparts.
You might often encounter issues such as constant ringing or no ringing at all. These problems can occur in both wired and wireless doorbells. But if your wireless doorbell keeps ringing, you’ll have to go through a lot more trouble to fix it than a wired doorbell.
More About The Working Of A Wireless Doorbell System
The best wireless doorbell for your home should come with the following functionalities:
A. Operating Range And Efficiency
Since these doorbells use radio waves instead of wires, the operating range becomes a crucial factor to consider. A wireless doorbell features a large operating range to allow the transmitter and receiver to communicate with each other over a longer distance.
The operating efficiency needs to be taken into account as well. If your doorbell transmitter is strong enough, it can transmit signals through thick walls without degradation. Conversely, a sensitive receiver can pick up the faintest signals with greater efficiency to give you a clear alert.
B. Battery Life
For a wireless, battery-operated doorbell to work efficiently, battery life obviously plays a crucial role. Most wireless doorbell systems come with a high enough battery capacity of approximately six to twelve months so that they can be used for a long time between charges.
Similarly, the charging process is quick enough so that you can reduce downtime. There are options that can be used even when charging, which in turn, eliminates the downtime entirely.
C. Durable Build
Wireless doorbells (especially the outdoor transmitter button) are built to withstand the weather elements like dust, rain, snow, or heat. So, your doorbell will function at all times, regardless of the environmental circumstances.
How Do Wireless Doorbell Systems Work Final Words
A wireless doorbell is one of those appliances that might seem relatively insignificant but can make a notable difference in your home’s security. With the number of features and conveniences it comes with, it’s a worthy upgrade of a traditional doorbell.
Now that you know how wireless doorbell systems work, you can operate them a bit more easily. And we hope that the information provided here has been able to clear away most doubts about this device.
It’s now time for us to wrap up. If you found this guide insightful, then you may also check out our guide on how to use pool test kits.
Adios!
Very few things can be as depressing as seeing dirt on your carpeted floors.
Such a sight will surely make you think about the best possible way to clean up the mess. Hiring carpet cleaners is often quite expensive, so like most other people, you will look up DIY methods. But, those hacks can actually be quite damaging to your floorings.
Instead, a better choice is to get a specialized carpet cleaner to keep the carpets mess-free. Hoover is one such well-known brand that has been producing great vacuum cleaners meant for cleaning carpets.
The Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe and the Hoover Turbo Scrub are the best upright carpet cleaners currently available on the market. As the appliances may seem very similar, we came up with this informative guide to steer you towards making the right choice.
So, without further ado, let's begin!
Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs Hoover Turbo Scrub
Before we move on to compare the two carpet cleaners, let's check out both appliances individually. Hoover has been producing great vacuum cleaners for many years, and these models have to be the best performing appliances from the brand.
And a great thing about these products is the similarity, which lets you get away with purchasing the lower-priced model, as both are equally powerful. So, let's take a peek at what makes these carpet cleaning devices excellent.
THE COMPLETE CLEAN COMBO: The Hoover PowerScrub Deluxe...
VERSATILE TOOLS: Deep cleaning goes beyond just the floor....
When you have a look at the current product catalog of Hoover, you'll surely find the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe at the top of the list. It has been specially designed for cleaning carpets, and the 360° SpinScrub brush helps in getting rid of all the dirt present in the fabric.
Moreover, for faster cleaning, Hoover has equipped this appliance with a DualV nozzle which makes sure to suck up all the dirt uniformly from a surface. So, it will get rid of the common problem of uneven cleaning in carpets.
As this vacuum also comes along with a water tank, you won't have any problem deep cleaning the carpets all by yourself. While vacuuming, the device also produces hot air to quickly dry a surface, so the floor can be used instantly after cleaning.
One of the best features of the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe model has to be the 20 ft. cord that doesn't get in your way. This vacuum includes many necessary accessories, including the stair tool and the upholstery tool.
It also comes with the ability to mix the detergent automatically with water, so you wouldn't need to worry about getting the proportions wrong. You can fill up to 16 oz. of detergent at a time, which is enough for cleaning multiple rooms.
The Hoover Turbo Scrub is one of the top-performing models of the brand. It looks similar to the other upright vacuum cleaners from Hoover and has a lightweight design, making it great for everyday use.
This vacuum also comes with the SpinScrub brush that lets you clean carpeted or hardwood floors from all angles. Additionally, there's a water level indicator in the tinted tank of this model which enables you to keep an eye on it while cleaning. And, it even has the quick-drying technology to suck out all the moisture as soon as you're done cleaning.
We really like the strategically placed handles on this vacuum that makes carrying it up the stairs easier. And, because the handle is D-shaped, it's comfortable to maintain a grip while cleaning or during transportation.
Along with a sample of cleaning solution, the Hoover Turbo Scrub carpet cleaner comes with an upholstery tool to clean other fabric surfaces like your bed or couch. And, the eight-foot accessory hose lets you extend the vacuum for cleaning hard-to-reach crevices and corners.
Of Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs Hoover Turbo Scrub
1. Cleaning And Drying
As we are looking at vacuum cleaners, it's important to note the cleaning efficiency of the products. And, it's great to see that both these Hoover carpet cleaners prove to be excellent at their job.
If this is your first vacuum cleaner, you can choose any one of them as there aren't many differences. Both products come with 360° SpinScrub brushes that let you clean the carpet from all angles. The brush rotates to pick up dust particles present in the pile of carpets or area rugs.
You can use water and detergent with these vacuum cleaners, so keeping your carpeted floors clean throughout the year won't be a problem. Moreover, cleaning on the heated mode gives professional quality results, especially while removing stains.
When it comes to cleaning, the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe is one step ahead of the other model because of its DualV nozzle. The nozzle, along with the rotating brush, makes cleaning quick and easy by sucking up all the dust particles. So, the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe is great for those who don't want to spend much time cleaning chores.
However, if you have pets, the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe upright carpet cleaner would be a good choice as it's great at removing pet hair from carpets due to the special nozzle.
Besides, both these Hoover vacuums have the ability to blow hot air while you are cleaning the carpet. So, there's no need to wait for the carpet to dry, and you can use it again immediately. Along with added convenience, the quick-drying features helps to extend the longevity of your carpets.
2. Accessories
One of the mistakes that people often make is to not pay attention to the accessories or attachments that come with a vacuum cleaner. Rather than being freebies, attachments like the accessory hose and the crevice tool make cleaning easier.
If you're someone who is looking for an all-in-one vacuum cleaner that you can use on multiple fabric surfaces, then it's better to go for the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe carpet cleaner. It comes along with a lot of accessories, including an eight-foot hose, a crevice tool, an upholstery tool, a stair tool, a mesh tool storage bag, and even a sample of cleaning solution from Hoover.
On the other hand, the Hoover Turbo Scrub carpet cleaner comes with the same eight-foot hose, an upholstery tool, a tool storage bag, and the cleaning solution. So, even though there aren’t many differences, the extra attachments provided with the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe come in handy while cleaning the whole house.
3. Tank System
The dual tank system present in both Hoover carpet cleaners is quite impressive because there are dedicated tanks for dirty and clean water. Hence, there isn't a possibility of the dirt getting mixed up with the clean water.
Moreover, both vacuums come with detachable tanks, so filling and discarding the dirty water is straightforward. And, unlike earlier models of vacuum cleaners, there's no need to spend on dust collecting bags. The tank also has a water capacity of one gallon, so you can clean a large area without the need for stopping to discard the waste.
Even though the tank systems are pretty similar in both models, the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe carpet cleaner has a transparent tank, so it's easier to look at the water level. But, even the tinted tank of the Hoover Turbo Scrub carpet cleaner features a water level indicator, so it won't be a problem to detect when the tank is empty.
4. User Friendliness
One of the things we like about Hoover is that the brand believes in making the products user-friendly. Both of these carpet cleaners have a simple design making them useful for beginners. Hoover even provides extensive instructions with each upright carpet cleaner.
We also like the 20 ft. cord present in the carpet cleaners as it lets you move between rooms without repeating the cycle of plugging and unplugging the appliance. With a weight of just 18 lbs., both items are easy to pick up without breaking into a sweat.
Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs Hoover Turbo Scrub Final Words
You might have guessed by now that there's no clear winner, as both these Hoover carpet cleaners have their unique advantages when it comes to cleaning carpets. And, both appliances are equally adept at letting you clean carpets and bare floors to get professional-looking results.
Having said that, we would recommend the Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe carpet cleaner to those who want to get done with their chores quickly. We especially like how easy it is to clean floors with this appliance.
On the other hand, the Hoover Turbo Scrub is equally efficient at cleaning and comes at an affordable price point. However, as it's an older model, you will need to find sellers who still have it in stock.
Do let us know if you have any further queries about these multi-surface floor cleaner models. Till then, goodbye, and take care!
With all that noise around the Honeywell True HEPA HPA300 Air Purifier, we just couldn’t keep our hands off it!
Widely regarded as a good player in the HEPA filtration technology category, we wanted to test the features that have contributed to its popularity. Plus, an affordable air purifier should never be off the charts!
Although it isn't entirely free from flaws, we found the benefits to be way more intriguing. So, after using it for a significant period of time, here we are with our in-depth review to help you out.
EXTRA LARGE ROOM AIR PURIFIER - Honeywell HPA300 HEPA Air...
HELPS REDUCE ALLERGENS - This HEPA air purifier has 3 air...
Why Buy This Product?
Before taking you through the details, allow us to introduce you to the brand. As most of our readers may already know, Honeywell is a world-renowned manufacturer of home-based appliances like fans, ACs, coolers, and air purifiers. Likewise, the HEPA HPA300 Air Purifier upholds that reputation with its sleek design, robust filtration system, and seamless touch controls.
On that note, let’s dive into the positives one by one…
Design
Starting with the design aspect, the Honeywell HEPA HPA300 is a classic black ribbed purifier, which looks like, well, a majority of the brand’s purifiers. Weighing around 17 pounds and measuring 10.8 x 20.8 x 22.4 inches, it’s one of the most lightweight units from the brand. In tandem with the sleek structure and integrated grips, users can safely tick portability from their must-have list!
Talking about the material, it has an ABS plastic body for efficient heat and impact resistance. The other advantages include shock absorption and scratch resistance without costing a fortune. So, that’s a bonus!
Aside from the strength, what also impressed us was the lack of gaps in the overall design of the body. As you may be aware, such openings tend to allow the unfiltered air to escape into the room, thereby contaminating the area even further. The front and rear pretty much have an identical appearance with a front air intake, behind which lies the filtration system.
Likewise, the outlet is located near the touch controls at the top of the unit. On that note, the control panel comprises functions like power on/off, check filter indicator, check pre-filter, turbo power cleaning, lights dimmer, and auto-off. The controls are clearly labeled for optimum user-convenience, and you need to use the related control only once to activate the function.
Filtration System
Now, coming to the most important aspect of it all, the unit is actually named after its powerful HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) Filter. In addition, it has the Honeywell A and A+ pre-filters, responsible for the first stage of filtration.
These filters are integrated with activated-carbon particles to capture large particles more than 0.3 microns in size, like fibers, dust, pet dander, lint, and hair. Aside from that, they play a crucial role in eliminating gases, odors, and VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds).
One important thing to know here is that the filters have a lifespan of approximately three months. The check filter indicator will keep you notified about the replacement time, and we’d recommend getting genuine, certified Honeywell filters to ensure high performance.
The second stage of filtration is dominated by the R-certified true HEPA filters for efficiently removing up to 99.7% of microscopic allergens, measuring as small as 0.3 microns. As a result, you can get rid of several contaminants, including dust mite debris, fine dust, pollen, bacteria, mold spores, viruses, etc.
We are decently happy with how these filters reduce airborne germs with utmost efficiency. Besides, the true HEPA filtration has zero ozone emission (certified by the California Air Resources Board), making it completely safe for use for prolonged periods. This is largely due to the absence of an ionizer that can often produce small amounts of ozone, which may irritate the lungs.
In fact, this two-stage, powerful filtration system equips the unit with a CADR (Clean Air Delivery Rate) of 300 for smoke, 320 for dust, and 300 for pollen. In terms of coverage, it can clean up to 465 square feet five times per hour, meaning the air will get filtered every 12 minutes. We’d advise replacing the HEPA filters every 12 months for best results.
Turbo Cleaning Function
An out-and-out highlight of the HPA300 Air Purifier is the turbo cleaning function that integrates four cleaning levels: general, allergen, germ, and turbo. After you have switched on the unit, tap the power symbol again to switch between the cleaning modes.
For starters, you have the allergen mode that optimizes the unit to filter allergen particles such as dust, pollen, mold spores, dust mite debris, and others. This feature will be especially beneficial during the peak allergy seasons of spring and summer.
Then you have the general cleaning mode that’s suitable for everyday air purification. Many users prefer using it while they are away for a vacation to remove large particles and microscopic allergens from the air indoors. Similarly, the germ cleaning mode enhances the germ capturing ability of the purifier.
Lastly, there’s the powerful turbo cleaning mode that speeds up the entire contaminant removal process from the air. Upon selecting this mode, the fan begins operating at its highest speed to suck in maximum air from the front intake system, which then passes to the filters.
We liked how the design has integrated the reference guide into the body of the purifier. It contains a list of instructions that will help users, especially first-timers, to get the hang of things better. You can find it in the small tab near the touch control panel.
Noise Level
Considering its speed and high CADR count, we aren’t mad about the 63 dB noise level that it produces operating at the highest fan speed. To give you an idea, normal human conversation produces around 60 dB noise. Sure, it may be slightly difficult to hear other people in turbo mode, but it’s nothing that will hammer your ears.
Since you’re likely to operate it in the low to medium fan speed (producing 40 to 60 dB sound) for the majority of the time, rest assured about minimal sound interference.
Power Consumption
The HEPA HPA300 has an Energy Star Certification, meaning it saves on your utility bill. Considering that it doesn’t have the lowest power consumption, we don’t mind saving some bucks!
Additional Features
Among the noteworthy additional features are the auto-timer mode and auto-dimmer mode. While the former allows you to automatically operate the unit for durations of 2, 4, or 8 hours, the latter keeps the light level to a minimum for nighttime use. Apart from that, it has three fan modes, namely, allergen, general clean, and germ.
And as we’ve already mentioned, the electronic check filter indicators will inform you in advance about pending filter replacements so that you can keep track of the dates.
Finally, it comes with a 5-year long warranty against all defects, which is one of the longest for models in its price range.
Customer Reviews
This unit has been showered with rave reviews by both existing and new customers. While most of them have praised it for its simple yet effective operation, others have talked highly about the user-friendly control panel design. The ability to turn the blue light off for use in the dark has been the cherry on the cake!
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite scoring highly on most fronts, there are a number of things that we feel potential customers should be wary about.
One of the first things that can be a constraint is the high energy consumption. Depending on the fan speed and duration of use, it can consume electricity anywhere between 40 and 130 watts, resulting in elevated power bills.
Secondly, some users have lamented the absence of automatic mode change. But if you ask us, we aren’t really mad about it, considering that the HEPA HPA300 has a reasonable price tag. However, one area where we’d like to see the brand make improvements is the customer service, or rather the lack of it. It doesn’t offer a free shipping policy like some other competitor brands.
Not only that, but you are also required to notify them of any damages within one business day in case of shipping through third-party services. Otherwise, they won’t take any responsibility for it. In case of returns and exchanges, customers have to pay for the shipping charge, and should also pay a 10 to 30% restocking fee if the company finds no manufacturing or shipping defects.
Pros
Sleek design and easy touch controls
High CDRA rating
Dual filtration with activated carbon and advanced HEPA technology
Certified for no ozone emission
Four cleaning levels and three fan speeds
Cons
Slightly high power consumption
Customer service is not very customer-friendly
Honeywell True HEPA HPA300 Buyer’s Guide
To speak the truth, choosing the correct air purifier requires something more than merely checking out product reviews. Unless you know about your requirements to the tee, it’s highly likely that your preferred unit won’t serve the purpose, no matter the price tag or range of advanced features.
As such, we have listed some crucial points to keep in mind before making that all-important purchase decision. So, hang in tight!
Room Size
No surprises here that perhaps the most important thing to consider before you can shortest models is measuring the room size. In other words, it’s about filtering out (no pun intended) how much space you want to be purified. While desktop units won’t certainly be sufficient for large spaces, a large unit may be a bit too much for your baby’s nursery or the kid’s room.
A good way to figure out the ideal match for your desired space is to check the unit’s air changes per hour count, which is nothing but a measure of the filtering air per hour.
For example, a small purifier that turns over the air for a 250 square feet area eight times per hour will do so only four times in a 500 square feet room. Hence, you’d want something with more filtering capacity for the latter.
And if you still can’t decide the area to clean, we’d suggest going for a slightly larger capacity than what you think should be needed to make room for extra space.
Types Of Pollutants Filtered Out
The market is full of specialized air purifiers! So, that’s something you might want to consider before buying one. While some units are adept at filtering out smoke and dust, others are designed to catch pet hair, allergens, and germs. If you are looking to subside allergies, then we’d highly recommend opting for an air purifier that does so.
Similarly, asthma patients should look out for units that remove odor, chemicals, and dust. That’s why air purifiers are mostly rated on how well they filter out contaminants. And in case of no specific requirements per se, we’d advise opting for a general air-quality improvement purifier.
CADR Rating
With regards to efficiency, air purifiers have a CADR number to help customers understand the filtering ability even better. And there’s no rocket science here; the larger the number, the more contaminants it can filter out. So, if your preferred purifier has a 300 CADR for pollen, it means the unit can reduce pollen concentration while adding the equivalent purified air.
This rating should especially be considered for general air purifiers, with a count of at least 200 for all the categories. However, since the numbers are for best-case scenarios and recorded in controlled conditions, the efficiency may be affected in different environments. Therefore, it won’t be a bad idea to opt for higher numbers as long as your budget permits.
Types Of Air Filters
A lot of air purifiers use mechanical filtration, meaning the air, along with its contaminants, is physically trapped as it passes by the filters. As such, most air purifiers use a dual filtration process, where the first stage catches large particles and the second layer removes the smaller variants.
Pre-filters are mostly washable, vacuumable, or disposable. They are usually made of foam or non-woven polyester and may have activated-carbon elements for absorbing gases, odors, and chemicals.
But what really matters is the main filter that forms the second layer. We are heavily inclined towards true HEPA filters that can clean allergens, pollen, animal skin, mold spores, dust, and a lot more. With an efficiency rate of over 90%, these are a popular choice for air purifiers across brands.
Irrespective of the type, it’s always advisable to keep an eye on the replacement time and use only certified, branded filters as replacements.
Power Consumption
The power consumption of an air purifier will largely depend on the filtering capacity. Simply put, the more filtering it does, the more will be the power consumption. That said, units with Energy Star certifications can take some load off the power bills.
Noise Level
For anything that runs on a continuous basis, sound level becomes a vital consideration. Hence, most air purifiers come with low noise operation to minimize user-inconvenience. That said, the sound level can change from one mode to another, so make sure it isn't too loud at the highest setting.
Its dual-filtration mechanism with HEPA technology and different cleaning modes make it an all-rounder. On top of that, the touch control panel aids user-friendliness. It doesn’t produce too much noise either, making it a fit for almost any room or office space.
Although it could have employed more automatic features and low energy consumption operation, we are pretty satisfied with how it performs for the price. So, go ahead and give it a try if you want to get a good air purifier without breaking the bank.
Imagine returning back from the office and not being able to relax because of the hot weather. Yes, it does sound like a disaster.
Having the right temperature in your personal space is very important. Not only will this keep your mind at peace but will also help you cool down after the entire day's work. Now you may already have air conditioners, but if the space is larger, then the cold air may not spread around evenly.
And that is where an air circulator fan comes in! It can help promote the movement of air to provide you with a blast of cold air from several feet away.
So, today, we will review the Honeywell HT-900, the HT-904, and the HT-908. We will also be pointing out the similarities and the differences among them so that you find it easier to take a pick.
Let's get going!
Honeywell HT-900 Vs HT-904 Vs HT-908
In this section, we will first talk about each of the models individually and then compare them with each other. Before beginning, we should tell you that they are pretty similar and come with a range of similar or common features. But again, there are some noteworthy differences, and we will be discussing them too.
This is one of the smallest corded electric circulator fans, which offers powerful performance and can be placed anywhere in the room. It measures 10.9 x 6.3 x 10.9 inches and is easily portable. You can place it at any corner, and it will help in circulating the air to provide a relaxing atmosphere.
Plus, the Honeywell HT-900 is pretty powerful, so you can feel the gush of air from 25 feet away. The speed of the fan can be adjusted and there are 3-speed settings to choose from. Also, it is equipped with a pivoting head that can move up to 90 degrees. We found that it is a perfect fit for small to medium rooms.
Moreover, this air circulator fan is one of the cheapest options available in the market which will easily fit it into your budget. At the same time, you can save on energy bills while improving the airflow in the house .
In hindsight, the Honeywell HT-900 air circulator fan sports an aerodynamic turbo design that allows better air circulation.
Small floor or tabletop fan: Honeywell TurboForce Air...
Honeywell quality: Help improve cooling and energy savings...
The Honeywell HT-904 functions a lot like the HT-900, and it comes with a number of similar features too. But when it comes to the design, the HT-904 looks more aesthetic and comes in a beautiful white color.
This powerful air circulator fan sports a compact build and can even be mounted if needed. You can tilt the head of the fan up to 90 degrees to facilitate better air circulation.
Another important feature is that it can be used with an air conditioner to help save energy. When you switch it on, the fan will circulate the cool air to effectively bring down the temperature in the room. The AC can then be switched off after a while, and the room will remain cool for a long time.
Other than this, we were very happy to see that it works quietly, just like the HT-900, so rest assured that you won't have to deal with loud noises.
MEDIUM FLOOR OR TABLETOP FAN – Honeywell HT-908 TurboForce...
FEEL THE POWER – Honeywell TurboForce fans have an...
The Honeywell HT-908 is one of the more expensive options when it comes to turbo-force air circulator fans. And although it may require you to stretch the budget by quite some bit, it is more powerful than the other two options and can cover a larger space. So, if you have a big room, then this is a good option to opt for.
But despite having a bigger build and design, it can still fit on tabletops, chairs, and desks. This air circulator fan comes with a pivoting head and 3 fan speed settings like the previous options. So, you can choose a speed depending on your air flow needs. The air flows with force, and you will be able to enjoy the efficiency fan from about 32 feet away. Talk about being powerful!
But as we have already mentioned above, it features a heavy-duty design, meaning it will weigh more the other two options (5.7 pounds, to be precise) that we have listed. So, you can place it on one side of the room and enjoy the pleasant air that will be cooling you down from a distance. Furthermore, this air circulator fan can keep the entire area cool without making too much sound.
Honeywell HT-900 Vs HT-904 Vs HT-908 Buyer's Guide
1. Size And Weight
The Honeywell HT-900 and HT-904 are both small in size, with a slight difference between both. You will notice that the HT-900 measures 10.9 x 6.3 x 10.9 inches while the HT-904 model measures 11 x 6.46 x 11.22 inches. On the other hand, the Honeywell HT-908 is bigger in size and measures 14.4 x 8.1 x 15.2 inches.
Now, the last Honeywell model would still fit on tabletops, but you will need larger table space for sure. You will not be able to place it on small side tables by the bed.
Moving on to the weight, while the HT-900 weighs 2.6 pounds, the HT-904 weighs 3.7 pounds, and the HT-908 model weighs 5.7 pounds. The last product is the heaviest, making it slightly less portable.
2. Noise
A powerful turbo force air circulator fan shouldn't be making a lot of noise while it controls air movement and regulates the air flow. The best part about Honeywell products is that they are quiet when compared with other air circulator fans.
The Honeywell products are all known to make 25% less noise than competitor brands, and hence, you will not be disturbed by the noise level. The quiet functioning is well-loved by customers as we could comprehend after reading the reviews.
3. Color
While the Honeywell HT-900 is available in black color, the HT-904 turbo force air circulator fan comes in an attractive shade of white. Both of them sport a very sleek design and are well-suited to be kept on tables, near sofas, chairs and can also be wall-mounted.
You can choose a color based on the wall and furniture shades in the room. Let us tell you that both are beautiful, but customer reviews suggest that people like the white shade more.
On the other hand, when compared with the HT 908, customer reviews suggest that the black color of this product is well-loved. Hence, we believe that your choice depends on personal preferences and the space that needs cooling.
4. Design
Overall, we found that the design of all the Honeywell air circulator fan models is similar, and they look nice. The Honeywell models sport a modern design with a fan that does not show too much. Also, there are grills on the front side to prevent any accidents in case you have a child at home.
We will still recommend keeping pets and kids away from the fan as you would not want them to put any of their body parts inside through the gaps.
Spotting The Major Differences
Now you know that there are some key similarities among the Honeywell HT 900, HT 904, and HT 908, while they have some different features. One of the top differences is that the Honeywell HT 900 and the Honeywell HT 904 can be wall mounted if needed because they are lightweight and small in size. However, the Honeywell HT-908 is larger and cannot be mounted up on the wall.
Another major difference is with the movement of air. While the first 2 products can cover an area of 25 to 27 feet, the last product can cover an area of up to 32 feet. So when considering the larger fan model, you can feel the air from far, and hence, you will not need to keep moving the product.
So, if you wanted to mount a fan on a wall, then the first 2 air circulator fans would work well. However, there is a difference in color, and that could be a determining factor for you.
Honeywell HT-900 Vs HT-904 Vs HT-908 Final Word
Regardless of the Honeywell model you purchase, if you want the air circulator fan to last for a longer time, then take good care of it. That would involve taking the fan apart and cleaning the parts every few months.
The blades of the fan may catch a lot of dirt, and hence, regular cleaning is necessary. Learn about how to take the fan apart and then do the cleaning yourself.
So, we have finally reached the end of this guide, and it is time to sign off. We are sure that you will be able to purchase the right one from the 3 Honeywell options given above.
Let us know if you have any further queries in the comment section below, and we will try to address them in our next guide.
Working out can be super satisfying, but going to the gym every single day can be a pain and might cost a fortune, just like the best home gym equipment. Even building a proper workout area at home can get really expensive. But do you know that you can have a gym set up at your home with a few materials and a lot of enthusiasm to get handy with things? However, the most basic of things such as a squat rack would cost around $400, even when they’re found on Craig’s List.
If you’ve always fancied having your very own squat rack in your home gym but were skeptical about the budget, worry not! Here are 13 ideas to make a great Squat Rack idea to try by yourself.
Homemade Squat Rack Ideas
Wooden Squat Rack Simple Yet Sturdy
Wood is one of the materials that are easily available. So, just keep your squat rack simple and minimalistic, with some planks of strong wood, a metal bar and some screws. And voila, you have a basic, simple yet really sturdy rack that’s ready for some workout.
This is the easiest and most cost-efficient way to build a squat rack, if you’re really running low on your budget, or need a power rack set up urgently, then a bucket rack is the one thing you can resort to.
All you would be needing is two five-gallon paint buckets, some concrete mix, wooden planks, hammers, nails, and wooden glue. By setting up the wooden planks as a frame with the help of hammers and nails, and fixing them in the concrete mixture, which is placed in the paint buckets, you can make a cheap DIY squat rack.
If you are blessed with enough space at your home and don’t want to compromise with the size of the squat rack, yet keep it well within the budget, then you could go for this kind of setup.
With the help of a few basic tools like wood, tape measure, electric drill, hand saw, and nails, you could work on this project by yourself. It could be perfect for a garage, or if you have some extra square feet at your home, no need to get the fanciest all-in-one gyms, you can have a simple rack to get started in the comfort of your own home.
Now this one is for those who don’t have a lot of space at home. You could simply use the wall as an extension for the squat rack. Also, it doesn’t need to go to the hardware store and buy a lot of supplies. Just take in a few planks of wood and nail it to the wall strategically, with the help of the hammer, and you’re done.
If you’re a huge fitness fanatic but are under budget constraints, then you can actually make this squat rack and pull-up bar at your him with just a few supplies.
All you have to do is get some scrap wood that can be braced against the wall and then make marks according to your needs, drill the holes, and create cradles for the bars so that you could accommodate your weight bars as well. Interesting, right?
Fifty dollars and very little space – that’s all you need to make this sweet little squat rack. All you need is to get some wood and follow the blueprint in the tutorial to make it.
Well, you might not be able to put some extreme weights in there, but you could curl up anything around the 300-pond range in there.
Don’t even have a little space to fit in your gym equipment in your house, but badly want to have that squat rack for a long? With this super compact metal rack, you can just fix it in this fully functional squat rack and a pull-up bar, and it won't even take up a lot of your wall space. Why not give it a try?
If you have a spare room and a whole lot of time on your hand, you can just have an entire private gym set up for yourself, with your own squat rack and lifting platform, for just a little under 300 dollars.
In case you’re skeptical about the weight that wooden racks hold, you could build a sturdier one instead with the help of metal pipes, and this project would work best in your garage.
Galvanized pipes are a great choice for this kind of squat rack, where you could attach the rack to the wall with hinges, or any rotating attachment. While the bottom part can be fastened to a winch or similar cable and then placed in an upward position. You could even suspend some pipes for the ceilings as pull-up bars if you want.
This kind of squat rack has a really sturdy base built with lots of wood and can be used both indoors and outdoors, depending on the space available, and your preferences for working out.
Here’s another cheap wooden squat rack project with a bench that you can make with less than sixty dollars. Also, it needs very little space as it is braced against the wall.
Using both pipes and wood together can make a really great heavy-duty power rack. You would be needing a whole bunch of wooden planks, pieces, nails, pipes, safety bars, pull-up bars, and other building tools. It would take quite some planning and time for the building, but you would really be happy with the end result.
This is one other way to make a simple squat rack with materials under 100 dollars. Most of the items could already be lying in and around your home, if not, you could get them at the stores. The method involves making frames with planks of wood and attaching them together with support. And it can easily take up to 400 pounds on the rack.
So, the next time you think of setting up a workout station at your place, stop shelling out a lot of money on buying commercial gym equipment. Make a squat rack using these Squat Rack Ideas and save a lot of dollars.
In this chaotic world highly driven by consumerism we rarely get the chance to see something different, something rare; and we are happily blessed with such a piece we instantly recognize the item as something extraordinarily expensive, a limited edition piece of furniture, a car or some sort designer item that few individuals in this world can afford. Things are changing and manufacturing and crafting gain extraordinary values as they represent the individuality of each and everyone materialized in custom, unique, one of a kind objects.
Now is the time to take on diy projects, from simple to complicated, from colorful to elegant and subdued ones, we are to shape the universe around us rapidly, we are to design our lives.
In gallery that follows we have presented splendid homemade cell phone case ideas that we have find interesting, intriguing and easy enough to recommend for a fast craft in the evening or Sunday afternoon. Cast a glance, surge inspiration and leave your valuable feedback in the comment section below.
Homemade Cell Phone Case Ideas
1. ice cream homemade phone case
It might look sweet, delicious yet it is not edible.
There are few things in this world which cannot be improved with lace and a simple phone case ain`t one of them. Choose the right color to bring the lace delicate look forward and enjoy your new phone case !
A clear case can receive the splendid brush treatment, whether you are experienced or just starting out this homemade surely is worth a chance; you direct everything from the colors up to the painting.
Washi tapes are known to be responsible for thousands of truly inspiring diy projects ideas around the inter-web and yours may be next one, simply pick up the washi tapes that you find interesting and start playing around !
Source Unknown
8. colorful polka dot homemade case
Polka dots in one or multiple colors can go beautifully on a clear case, you choose the density and colors, you enjoy your new case.
A craft session with the little ones may present them creatively how they can repurpose various textiles and pieces of paper into new items thus saving the plant a bit of energy; this can be a super creative lesson on sustainability and responsibility.
In a few minutes salvaged textiles that you no longer need can become super awesome ice-cream or pieces of cake able to contain your phone in color and style.
Simple, graphic, splendid results can be obtained with colorful sharpies, you can customize a bland phone case beyond belief, choose the pattern, the illustration, the colors, get coloring !
via Unexpected Expectations
12. DIY felt homemade case
Easy to work with and available inany possible color, felt can make wonders regardless of application and homemade cases are no exception.
It can be that simple ! You need to print to scale different patterns or motivational messages, cut them out and position them between the phone and the case.
It goes without saying that the pattern can be changed to fit your design idea and that the studded case itself can be realized on any bland case, regardless of the phone`s manufacturer.
Simple designs that can be realized fast are presented above; a one-hour session for an enthusiast DIY can easily result in two to three homemade cell phone cases that he or she can be proud of. What do you think? How would you personalize your case and what`s your favorite design from the selection above? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
Charles Dickens once said, Spring is that time of the year when the sun feels like summer, and shade feels like winter – all at once.
I mean, who wouldn’t love that cozy warmth the sun brings after all those chilly days and long nights, except, of course, the west coast where winter is tolerable?
And when all that snow is thawing, finally paving the way for the bloom of beautiful flowers and the lush greenery everywhere, you’d just want to welcome the spring with open arms. So, when you are letting in the warmth of your heart and soul, don’t you think it’s time to dust off the cobwebs in your house and prep it up for the new season?
Worry not! I am here with 19 amazing yet simple ideas that would amp up your home for the upcoming spring! Here we go!
Why to just let all the furniture stay at a single place all the time – they aren’t nailed to the ground or anything, right? So, just work with the placement of the couches, sofa, coffee table and other furniture around your house. And to pep it up a bit, just put in some fresh flowers in a vase and place them on the center table, or on one of the corners of the house. This gives it a completely fresh look without even having to buy new furniture altogether. So, you hit two birds with one shot – giving your home a makeover and saving big bucks!
There might be some, if not a lot of repairs to do in your house, as things tend to break all the time, especially if there are little kids around. And winter might not be the best of times to repair it, given the cold weather which makes you lazy. So, once the season is up, it’s time to crawl out of your couch and finish these repairs that have been pending for a while now.
Just take a pen and paper, and jot down all the things that need to be fixed – be it floorboards, fence, AC units, or just the squeaky doors. Don’t let them stay as they are; pick up those tools and work on them so that you can relax in the beautiful spring weather without any worries.
Clean Up All the Windows and Let the Light In
Often, when we take up the job of cleaning our houses, we tend to forget the windows. And when you look at it, you can notice tiny stains, nose prints or those cute little paw prints if you happened to have a pet.
Why leave it behind, just put some gloves on, get some Windex, and some paper towels and wipe the windows clean. And since, it’s going to be spring; it doesn’t hurt to open them up and let some fresh air, and warm sun in!
If you have a garage at your place, it’s an unstated fact that you just throw everything in there during winters, to avoid staying in the chilly outdoors. Now that the season has gone, it’s time to pick those things up and place them where they belong. Also, just throw away the ones that you don’t think you’d be needing anymore and stock up the garage with gardening supplies, as you would need them more often than before. And don’t worry about the time, you’d just be needing one afternoon to get the garage back in place.
Since the outdoors are cold during winters, the patio furniture would be affected severely. It would end up developing a thick coat of debris, and if there’s a lot of snow, the dampness will ruin the wood. So, make sure your patio furniture is clean again by power washing them or cleaning them as you could be spending a lot of time outdoors during the Spring!
Get on with Gardening – Plant Herbs and Seasonal Plants
If you’re into gardening, then you’d surely be excited about spring – I mean, it’s the season of bloom and bewitching colors. And I am sure you would be thinking of all these flowers growing again and rich green foliage around the yard, which makes your place much more beautiful.
While you’re at it, why don’t you try something different? Planting something other than regular flowers? Try growing seasonal fruits, vegetables or herbs in your yard, and make it functional in addition to adding beauty to your place.
Courtesy of Stacey Doyle
Clean the Gutters
If your house happens to be around a lot of trees, then there’s a high chance that your gutter is cluttered with pine needles and other random leaves, which must have accumulated over the winter. And if spring brings along some showers, which it can during the April month, it is likely that the whole thing could be blocked. So, this is the right time to take out that ladder of yours and work on cleaning the gutters. In case you can’t do this on your own, it’s always better to get ahold of a professional.
Clean the House, the Driveway, and the Deck
Clean!
Clean!
Clean!
That should be your mantra before spring arrives. Winter sure does get a lot of clutter into your house, and there’s no way that you can clean everything regularly in all that cold.
So, once the season is phasing out, pick a day and maybe rent a heavy-use vacuum cleaner to clean your home. And while you’re at it, don’t forget to sparkle the driveway as well as the deck. This gives your whole house a great face-lift. Also, try washing your cars, who’s there to stop, huh?
Replace the Batteries of Carbon Monoxide and Smoke Detectors
It is strongly advised to change the batteries of the detectors (Both smoke and carbon monoxide) in the house to ensure that all the safety measures are up to the mark. Since you’re cleaning up everything at home for the spring, why not take care of this, too? I mean, you could just replace the batteries for once and forget until next spring, and also, who knows, this might save your life some day.
Do a Deep Clean of Bathrooms and Kitchen
Let the glowing warmth of the sun reflect in your house by cleaning it until it sparkles. This includes deep cleaning of your kitchen as well as the washrooms in the house. Dust the cabinets, take out your appliances and clean them before putting them back in place. As for the washrooms, clean the sink, commode, and the taps thoroughly. Also, work your way through to the blinds. Because a house is not truly clean until every thing is shiny – be it powder rooms or countertops.
Jason Briscoe@jbriscoe
Organize your Fridge and the Pantry
Why leave the places which store your food throughout the year? Since the cleaning of the house is in full swing, take an hour or two to look into your fridge and pantry too. Throw out the expired products, clean the racks and make a list of the things you would need for the upcoming season.
Also, when you are rearranging the leftover pantry, try organizing them according to categories – like sauces, dairy, vegetables, fruits, etc. This not only helps you reach things easily but gives a certain amount of happiness to the perfectionist in you.
Declutter and Organize
This applies to all the rooms in the house. Once the winter is done, declutter your rooms, take away everything that you don’t need and throw it in the trash or donate the stuff away. Now organize everything by storing them into different boxes, and label them according to the groups. This should be able to help you reach things during a future need, without much hassle.
However, this task occupies a significant amount of your time, given there are multiple tasks and more than one room in the house. So make sure you have a good two weeks or more in your hand to work on it and get all the stuff in place.
Winter is ruled by dark shades, be it in clothing or bedding. Because you know, dark colors keep you warm. So, once the season is done, it’s time to store all those dark sheets, thick duvets, blankets, and pillowcases. Welcome the new season with new, and lighter shades of bedding. You can even use pillows with light colors and floral prints, instead of wool or other thick fabrics. Try and make the spring-summer and fall-winter look of bedrooms thematic for your satisfaction. Also, keep a thick blanket handy by the bed in case one of the nights get chilly (you never know!).
This is one of the most important things you should do at the end of every season, let alone Winter. However, winter-spring closet cleaning holds more significance because of the radical shift in the wardrobe.
With Winter gone, it’s time to lose all the dark shades of clothing, the sweaters, mufflers, jackets, and mittens. Instead, it’s time to bring in lighter shades, floral prints, tee shirts, shorts and other light-fabric dresses.
Also, it’s time to give away the stuff you don’t need. Just don’t hoard the things you’re never going to wear and know that they’re of no use.
Upgrade the Pillows
This might not come across as the first thing you would want to do while making your home spring-ready. But trust me, your furniture and bedding get a completely different look if you do one small thing – change the pillows!
Most households go with velvet, tweed or silk pillows as they look good throughout the year. But let’s be honest, are they perfect for the spring summer months? No!
So, it would be great if you could give your pillow casing a makeover too, like what you do to your wardrobe – using breezy fabrics and little prints on cotton. This brings in a lot of change.
Stephen Di Donato@sdidonato
Make Use of Foliage
A lot of people opt for various types of fresh flowers and ornamental leaves when it comes to decorating the living rooms. Why don’t you give it a refreshing twist by throwing traditional flower arrangement for a toss and use foliage instead?
You could use leaves of banana, palm, and philodendron to make a statement look. Just put these up in huge decorative vases with some water, and you’re done! A beautiful and quirky look to your living room welcomes everybody.
Also, if you take care of these properly by changing the water regularly and trimming the stems below, then they can stay fresh for really long.
I know it might sound confusing to you, but what I meant is that it’s time to go shopping for some color. Spring, as we know, is the season of vibrant hues, and getting some of it into your house is never a mistake.
Just hit the home décor story near your house and get some cheap vases and other decorative items in bold accents. I bet they will bring in the brightness of your living room.
It’s not unfamiliar that Spring is a season associated with the aroma of nature – be it blooming flowers, buds, or leaves. Let your home too, reflect the same zest during the season. Just get some citrus, rose, lavender or any other floral-scented candles or potpourri to ensure that your place always welcomes others with warm, breezy aromas of the spring.
There is nothing that gives a better look to a place than a new paint or wallpaper. In case you have some budget for the makeover and want to give a new look to your house, at least the living room, try getting a lighter shade of paint or wallpapers with patterns that are easy on the eye.
If you cannot afford the whole house or a room, you can just stick to a particular place, like one side of the wall, the back of your bookshelf, or maybe even the ceiling of the room.
What do you think ? We would love to hear how you prepare for spring !
Hip roofs have been a popular choice from ancient times and continue to be a hit design today. But did you know there are multiple varieties of it?
Every house is not the same and has different requirements. With the different kinds of hip roofs available, you will find simple and complex options. These have been prevalent since the 18th century from the early-Georgian era. The French then took up this style, and you will find it in their colonial architecture.
This kind of roof is not only pleasing to the eye but helps keep the houses safe from storms and hurricanes. Their slanted surfaces prevent water from accumulating and make sure that most of it slides down. That is why these types of roof structures are very commonly used in hilly areas.
Moving on, we will begin with the 5 hip roof variants in the next section. It will be followed by 18 examples of the top styles that you can try out.
So, without further ado, let’s dive in!
Types of Hip Roofs And Styles
Simple Hip Roof
You will find simple hip roofs in most houses, and it is indeed the most common variant. There is a ridge in the center, and that creates 2 triangles on the 2 sides. The other 2 sides form polygons, which complete the structure. We found this to have a symmetrical design with the slant being the same on all sides. The triangular sides are also known as hip ends.
This type of roof is generally used if you do not want a lot of attic space. Since both the sides drop immediately from its center, there is minimal space in the attic, and you might not be able to store many things in it.
One disadvantage with these types of roofs is that they are prone to leakage. We would suggest that you cover up the ceiling of your attic with a protective water-resistant covering if the area is very prone to rainfall.
Pyramid Structure
A pyramid hip roof is one that has equal triangles on all sides. There are 4 triangles that are created, and they all meet at one point which is the center. The slant on all of its slides is the same, and its top juts upwards. In most cases, the pyramid structure is placed on a square walled house, and the peak rises just in its center.
You will find these roofs generally over gazebos and pavilions, and they work well in preventing leakage and mold growth. This is because there is no place for the water or snow to accumulate on top of the structure. Anything that falls on the roof will slide off, thanks to the gradient slopes on all sides. This makes it perfect for houses in rain-prone areas and in the mountains.
Half Hip Roof
Half-hip roofs are one of the most stable forms when compared to their peers. These have the ability to deal with high wind and cyclone-like conditions while keeping the concrete or wooden structure below it safe.
Also known as a clipped gable roof, these consist of a gable with its upper part being replaced by a small hip. These work best with a gutter that you can attach on the sides. The gutter will go around the house and help remove excess water from its roof very quickly during heavy showers.
This kind of structure contains the benefits of both a gabled and a hip roof. They are popular in Europe and became a part of houses in Germany, Austria, Slovenia, and Denmark. A part of southeast England also sees this structure a lot.
Hip And Valley Roof
If you are aiming for the traditional look, hip, and valley structures may be precisely what you want. Many contractors recommend this kind of structure if you live in areas with heavy rainfall or in those that are prone to storms. They can stand against tornados, too, and will keep you protected.
Another great benefit is that they allow for an attic big enough to fit in a lot of items. If you have great storage needs or want a skylight, this will be a great choice.
But yes, the problem that occurs is with leakage. Fully adhered underlayments are problematic as they can cause massive leakage. Make sure that you add leaks to the roof insurance plan to stay fully secured.
Cross-Hip Roof
Up next is another well-known type of structure called the cross-hip roof. This has gentle slopes on its sides, and the hip roofs form an ‘L’ structure. There are 2 hip roofs involved in this, which are placed perpendicularly to ensure that the building can stand against high winds. A gutter can be placed around the house, and the seam on top extends to form a valley.
These were very popular, especially during the mid-1800s when ranch-style structures and homes were trending.
But the only issue here with this kind of roof is that the attic space is reduced. Since the slant of the slope is inwards, the attic remains very small, and you cannot fit much into it.
Red Fairytale Hip Roof House
Remember that red wooden house by the brook from your fairytale books? Yes, it has a hip roof, too, with enough space for a chimney on top. The chimney is placed in a fairy glade, and the house is within a forest. It is covered by trees on all sides, and there is a freshwater brook in front.
Although the house is mostly made of red bricks, the hipped roof is in a lighter shade of brown. It provides ample space for a big attic, and there is a gutter around the roof side. We found this to be the perfect place to relax and unwind. The structure makes for the ideal retreat and can be used by people who want to make a house to retire to during holidays.
Gray Stone Structure
Are you a fan of stone structures? This house gives off a beautiful and elegant vibe with its chic walls and roof. The walls are made of stones with a touch of wood, and the reflective windows add to its look.
We loved the charcoal and smoky grey color of the hip roofs. It complements the white stone walls of the structure. The roofs can tackle heavy rain, and they will protect the house in case of storms or hurricanes.
Ultra Modern House
If you have the wealth, this is the kind of house you would want to splurge on! We agree that it looks gorgeous, and the several hip and valley roofs that you will see on its top add to the elegant structure.
The surface of the roof is made of a material that shines. It is a kind of metal that reflects light and looks beautiful at night. You must have also noticed the spotlights all around the house. This enhances the structure and highlights certain parts of the building.
The big glass windows and panels complement the textured walls and roof. If you look closer, the roof has a certain pattern on it, which makes it stand out. It is balanced by the large expenses of plain glass to achieve the perfect combination.
Countryside Cottage Structure
Now that we have already discussed an ultra-modern house let’s talk about a simple house. Some people prefer simplicity, and we have the perfect design for you. With shining white walls, this is the perfect mid-century designed living space that you can boast of.
The roof has silver shingled hips that add to its design and make for a perfect room in the attic. You can provide our teenagers with ample privacy and give them the attic room space.
It can also be used for making art or a music room for that matter! You will also find additional storage space because of the multiple hips. The house in itself is very spacious, and the color provides a warm and inviting space.
You will be able to spot a proper L-shape and cross-hipped structure. This is a great example of both and fits well with the countryside vibe. It helps cover large structures which are spread over a considerable area.
Triangle Time Structure
Up next is a house that has a number of straight lines and triangles. When you see the house from the front, you will notice the number of triangles that are a part of its roof. The triangular hip ends make this house unique and add to the plain white walls.
Look closely and tell us whether it will look as attractive without the hipped roof? Probably not! The warm color tones of its wall complement the silver-gray color that its roof has. It is painted with a very eye-catching color, and the horizontal lines add to the design.
If you add some spotlights just below the roof at multiple places below the gutter, it will light up and create an even better structure at night.
Colonial Hip Roof
If you want a countryside house that looks elegant as well as royal, this is a great example. You will find beautiful white walls along with a roof which is colored brown. The earthy tone goes very well with white and works for large structures. There is a sense of continuity, even if it takes a huge amount of space.
This has the vibe of old churches, but with reflective windows, it looks more homely. You can team it up with a beautiful front porch and a lovely back garden. The hip and valley roof, along with the white-walled structure, works well for wealthy farmers and countryside lovers. This would also work as a holiday home or your summer retreat.
Georgian Mansion
Do you find Georgian architecture attractive? If this is where your heart lies, you can make this perfect winter retreat right in the middle of a forest or near the countryside. This was a design that was very popular during the 18th century in England. There is a low-angled hip roof structure that is complemented by large windows.
The white stenciled windows are an incredible example of old England designs, and the white chimney columns add to it. The house in itself is made of small bricks that complement the white and grey roofs.
Crimson And Grey House
Are you an art enthusiast or a DIY artist? This house may just provide you with all the inspiration that you need. It has a unique design with half the surface made of river stones, and the other half is painted a dark shade of crimson.
This is paired with a grey-hipped roof on top to finish the look. The windows are rectangular and extend towards the sides more. You will also notice a number of hips around the roof, which provides the structure with more shape and form. This will work for a city house as well as the countryside.
14 Charcoal Hip Roof Structure
The best part about this house is its sweeping roof, which takes up half the space. It looks brilliant and catches a lot of attention. The dark grey roof is paired with a cream-colored structure that has tall windows. The doors and windows have reflective surfaces and dark grey borders, which enhance the look further.
The color palette that is used here is brilliant, with its stormy grey complementing the cream very well. The sweeping dark roofs can have recessed outdoor lights towards their bottom, which will enhance the light and dark color play further.
Green Half Hip Roof Home
Do you want your house to look cozy and comfortable? We have the perfect option for you, and it is in a shade of green. Pastel shades of green are used to make the house, and it is painted on wooden walls.
If you see the roof, you will notice the half-hipped roof design, which adds to its look and is made with bricks. It also has a chimney, which is again made of bricks and goes well with the countryside look. The white outlines and windows make the house look extremely elegant.
Another special characteristic of this house is the gabled entrance. It looks extremely good and makes the entrance stand out. This could be the perfect autumn or winter retreat.
Neo-Georgian House
Do you want to create a fusion of modern and classic designs? This is the structure that you can aim for. It is an excellent blend of contemporary design and Georgian architecture, which together create a masterpiece.
The walls are painted a light shade of beige, and it also has a roof that is rectangular shaped and expands on both slides. The windows are perfectly square-shaped, enhancing the symmetry of its structure. It is indeed very symmetrical as the entire house is rectangular in shape too.
Add some manicured lawns in the front, and you have the perfect space to flaunt.
Grey On Grey Home
Are you a fan of subtle colors? This pale grey house might just be what you are looking for. It has pale grey walls with a warm beige complimenting it. The roof is extensive and covers a lot of areas. Painted in silver grey, it will perfectly cover a large house and looks very attractive.
Also, you can pair it up with a manicured lawn or garden. Throw a party in the front while the house looms behind. It would be the perfect summer retreat in the countryside.
Colonial Hip Roof House
If you were looking for that perfect quaint house that uses rustic warm colors, this might be a great choice. It will provide you with a classic rustic look that will remind you of the good old days. No, this structure does not have anything contemporary about it and will help keep the old-world charm alive with white walls and beige windows.
The roof is made of brown bricks, and there is a chimney on top, which adds to the beauty of its design. Remember those farmhouses from the 80s movies? This will give you the same experience with a colonial aura. The peaked roof adds to the symmetry and works very well with shrubs and trees around.
Little Gray House
If you want a quaint small home, this is a great design to aim for. We loved the stylish exteriors, and pale colors have been used to make it look bigger. You will have neutral tones being used for the walls of this house while the roof is made of gray shingles and consists of hips. This dark grey color looks great with lighter-colored walls.
The deck is painted white and consists of vertical bars, which provide a much-needed pattern to the otherwise solid colors that this house is painted with. It will look best with manicured lawns, and you can host barbecue parties in it.
Red Brick Villa
How does a vibrant red house sound to you? If it appeals, then you will love this house made of red bricks. It has a very warm vibe, and the roof balances the vibrant red with a darker and cooler shade of it. It has a shingled red-hipped roof with a valley in between.
This will also give you a lot of attic space, and you can use it for storage or for music practice. One can also build a skylight and set up a bedroom because of the vast flat space on it.
Neo-Palladian Hip Roof Villa
Are you planning to build a villa for yourself? This Neo-Palladian design will impress you a lot. We were very delighted with the giant and majestic windows along with arched doorways. The red walls and the dark grey-hipped roof look brilliant together. You can see multiple hips, and it flaunts a hip and valley roof style.
We also loved the patterns around doorways and windows, which are painted white and stand in contrast with the light red wall. If you have seen English Aristocratic houses of the past, this one will look very similar to that design. It creates the ideal space for large families to live and works well with sprawling estates.
Coral Pink Hip Roof House
If you like colors, this hip and valley roof design will be an excellent choice. The house looks very attractive with a bright red-hipped roof with white walls to complement it. There are multiple skylights, and you will be able to see the sky while lying on the bed. And since the slopes are board, you will easily be able to make a room in the attic.
It is also bright enough to stand out among other houses. Look at the picture, and you will see how you first noticed this one before the grey-colored houses situated around it.
Cream And Grey Roof
Finally, we have a cream and grey color combination that works out very well for the countryside and small towns. The cool gray shade of the hipped roof is balanced by the pale cream color of its walls. Although both are neutral shades, they combine to form a very elegant structure. The doors are painted a dark red color, which provides the house with a splash of vibrancy.
Also, if you look from afar, you will notice how the roof together forms a triangle-like structure, which provides proper symmetry to the house. The windows are made of dark-colored glass, which works well with the pale cream color.
Hip Roof Types & Styles Buyer’s Guide
Now that you know all about hip roofs and their styles let’s move on to some general points that you should keep in mind. You must have realized that there are pros and cons to every roof style and type, and each one differs in its slant, attic space, and more.
We have written about the common points to remember before making a purchase. This should guide you to make an informed decision.
Attic Space
This is a very important consideration while making the roof. A common complaint with this kind of roof is that they might not provide a lot of attic space. A hipped roof that drops down immediately will provide very little space, and you should think twice if you plan to store a lot of items in the attic.
Hip and valley roofs and half-hip roofs provide more space and may work out better if you want to make a bedroom in the attic or use it for storing items.
Process Of Installation
Although hip roofs are known to prevent water and snow from accumulating on top, they have to be installed properly to eliminate leakage. Since there are many joints, each one has to be covered and installed by professionals. Instead of trying to do it on your own, get professional help, and that should prevent leaks.
Also, if you see any leakage happening, consult a professional and get it fixed immediately before the damage deepens.
Ventilation
Hip roofs are known to provide ample ventilation, and hence our house will not heat up too much. If you have problems relating to claustrophobia, these kinds of roofs might be exactly what you need. The homeowner also can create a corner or a crow’s nest to add to the attic space.
Cost
Hip roofs are generally more expensive than gabled roofs because of the large amounts of material needed for construction. They are also more expensive because of the complex structures that often need to be created for larger houses.
You might have to create a complicated system of rafters and trusses, which is not going to come cheap. However, we would say that the money is well spent and you will be getting a beautiful house at the end of the day.
Final Words
Hip roofs are known to be versatile, and you can choose your own style from the multiple options that we discussed above. You can also combine and create a unique style that reflects your personality. The best part about these roofs is that they can help provide your contemporary-style structures with a traditional or a classic touch.
These provide more aerodynamics than flat-roofed structures and will keep the house safe. After all, there is a reason why they are still popular after 3 centuries since they were first used.
With this, we have come to the end of our guide. Let us know if you have any further queries in the comment section below.
PURE & NATURAL: This rock salt lamp is hand-carved from...
ADJUSTABLE LIGHTING: The dimmer switch allows you to adjust...
What is A Himalayan Salt Lamp?
A Himalayan Salt lamp, unlike the salt which we get from the sea, is mined from Pakistan by skilled workers. Since it is unique to this region, it is important to find out about the origin of the salt lamp before buying it. Mined from harsh conditions, these lamps are not exactly cheap. They are very aesthetically pleasing, very soothing to the eye.
What are these lamps used for?
Himalayan Salt Lamps have multiple uses. These work as the excellent source of air purifier since it is composed of salt, and naturally salt helps in absorbing moisture and purifying it by the process of hygroscopy. The purified air is then released into the surrounding and helps in better breathing. This, in turn, helps asthmatic patients breathe better and reduces the chances of allergies. It helps in strengthening your immune system too.
The salt lamp helps in spreading positive energy around it and helps you sleep better; this is due to the release of negative ions. With the soothing glow emitted from the salt lamp, it automatically helps to calm you down and spread a peaceful aura around the house. It is also very aesthetic and works an as wonderful home décor.
Where could you purchase the salt lamp from?
Even though these lamps are available in few shops around the country, the best deals are found online. These websites offer a wide range of collections, with specific features, slashed process, and reviews from valued customers. The reviews are helpful in narrowing down your search and give a very good idea about the quality of the product. Moreover, these websites have very good customer service and responsive sellers who will give you guarantee for the product.
Why does your salt lamp ‘sweat'?
Salt should always be stored in a cool and dry area. Otherwise, it starts dissolving and gets moist. The same applies to the salt lamp too. It should be kept away from hot and humid areas, and enclosed places which are prone to heat. Keeping your salt lamp switched on prevents it from sweating. When not in use, it should be neatly packed in the air-tight packet and stored away. Do not ever immerse your lamp in water, or it will slowly melt away!
The salt lamp should never be exposed to any source of water, and when required to be cleaned, it should either be patted dry, or a moist cloth should be used to clean the accumulated dust.
Does the lamp need to be switched on to work?
The lamp usually consists of a bulb which is not LED and has heating properties. Heat helps in effective functioning of the salt. Hence, the lamp does need to be switched on to work. The negative ions of the salt are released only when the lamp is on. The salt lamp also tends to ‘sweat' if it is not switched on, and this may affect the salt lamp.
How to take care of the salt lamp and clean it?
Since the lamp is made of salt, it is very delicate, and thus you should be careful as to how to handle it. It should be kept strictly away from kids as well as pets. The possibility of your salt lamp to break, if it gets knocked over is very high and also, keep it away from sharp edges, since it may chip easily.
As for cleaning your salt lamp, it is normal for your salt lamp to accumulate dust and dirt, and the proper way to clean it is to switch off the lamp, use a moist cloth to wipe it away. Make sure never to make it completely wet, or it will spoil your lamp. Salt lamps also need to be wiped off, when it is ‘sweating.' In case it gets very wet, dry it under air or strong Sun for 4-5 hours.
What size and how many lamps would you require for different sized rooms?
For the salt lamp to work properly, it is important to remember the size of the room. A large room cannot be expected to be cleaned with a small salt lamp. The reference which is used is, to use one pound of the salt lamp for 16 square feet area. Following this rule, roughly, your salt lamp should work fine.
Where can you keep the salt lamp?
Since the salt lamp has multiple health benefits, using it in most dry areas of the house is helpful. You could purchase many salt lamps. It is very effective when kept in bedrooms, living room, study area or even your dining room, office spaces, etc. Make sure to keep it away from bathrooms and kitchen, as it may get wet or spoilt.
The lamp imparts effective positive energy around it, but its utility will only be visible when it is kept on par with the size of the room.
How to store your lamp when you are not using it?
When not in use, the salt lamp is instructed to be wrapped carefully in plastic and keep it airtight. The cord should be kept separately to prevent damage to the lamp. Keep away your lamp from the vicinity of children or anything remotely moist, and you will see the results after you unpack it. Brand new!
Which lamp is better-Pink or white or grey/black?
Even though all the three types are very rare, the black variant is the rarest of all, and obviously the most expensive. The benefits differ a little bit, and so does the light and intensity which it emits.
What features you should look for when you are making your purchase?
You should always remember to buy something which is feasible and has excellent customer reviews and satisfaction. The features are an important factor too, and some features that you should look out for are- the type of bulb that comes along, whether the intensity could be adjusted, the weight of the lamp, its safety instructions, where it has been mined from [the original being from Pakistan] and its brand certification.
How long will the salt lamp last and will it expire?
Salt is a mineral, never expires. The longevity of these salt lamps is forever, provided it does not break or melts. Proper care and maintenance go a long way, and it applies to the salt lamp too. The bulb needs to be changed from time to time, the lamp should be clean, and it should be away from moisture.
These lamps don't have an expiry date, so you don't need to worry about it going bad!
Real Himalayan Salt Lamps are rare and need some effort to find the best ones. However, they are quite affordable when measured by the health benefits it imparts. Aesthetically enhance your room, or give it a soothing glow while you work, or do your daily chores. These lamps have been proven to an extent to positively affect the human body and boost the immune system. Most doubts about its features are usually cleared by reviewers on websites, so keep a lookout for that!
What are your thoughts on Himalayan Salt Lamps? Feel free to ask more about Himalayan salt lamps, we will do our best to address it!
We find a lot of articles on the internet about things that supposedly have health benefits. Some of them are true, some of them aren’t. Thing is, there’s not many ways of identifying which ones are legit and which ones are just false claims and click-bait. This is especially true when it comes to stuff like Yoga, spiritual healing and such. One such subject of debate is Himalayan salt lamps.
You’ll find that many people, especially on the internet nowadays are going around telling you how Himalayan salt lamps are excellent health boosters. Fortunately for you, you’re in the right place and this article will help you recognize fact from myth about Himalayan salt lamps, so read on and find out yourself.
PURE & NATURAL: This rock salt lamp is hand-carved from...
ADJUSTABLE LIGHTING: The dimmer switch allows you to adjust...
What are Himalayan Salt Lamps?
First of all, the question in the minds of many of you will be “what are Himalayan salt lamps?”. So let us begin with that. Himalayan salt is salt harvested in Pakistan. To be precise, it is pink salt harvested from the Khewra mines in Pakistan. This pink salt is said to be millions of years old and a lot of people believe these have a lot of health benefits associated with them.
Himalayan salt lamps are created by inserting bulbs inside large chunks of this pink Himalayan salt. It generally contains smaller amounts of Sodium than regular salt. However, it does contain traces of Iron Oxide and small amounts of calcium, magnesium and potassium.
What kind of Health Benefits do they claim to possess?
You will find a lot of articles on the internet claiming Himalayan salt lamps come with a bunch of Himalayan salt lamp health benefits and are good for your home. Most of these health benefits are related with the kind of environment salt lamps create and how they affect it. The health benefits generally include:
They improve the quality of air around them
Himalayan Salt is said to emit negative ions which are said to absorb pollens, dust, smoke and several other contaminants, thus improving the quality of air around them and becoming especially beneficial to people suffering from allergies, asthma and other such illnesses.
They act as mood boosters
It has been claimed that Himalayan salt lamps are great mood boosters because of the negative ions they emit. This is because negative ion play a role in producing biochemical reactions that increase serotonin once they reach the bloodstream. Serotonin is a chemical that helps in regulating a person’s mood.
They help you sleep
Another regularly made claim is that Himalayan Salt Lamps help you sleep better. It is said that positive ions drain energy levels and reduce the supply of blood and oxygen to the brain, which leads to irregular sleep patterns. Since Himalayan salt lamps generate negative ions, they are said to counter this effect and help you sleep better.
Reduce electromagnetic radiation
We live in a world surrounded by electricity and this leads to a large amount of electromagnetic radiation around us which can be harmful for our health. Negative ions apparently neutralize this radiation and ionize the air around you. And that helps in nullifying electromagnetic waves by balancing the amount of positive and negative ions in their environment.
Are these health benefits real?
The real question that must be asked is are the claimed health benefits real? Well here’s the thing. Most of the health benefits claimed by Himalayan salt lamps are associated to the negative ions they release. While there is ongoing research on how effective negative ions really are when it comes to personal health, there is no evidence in support of these claims yet.
Basically, there is no real evidence as far as medical research is concerned that Himalayan salt lamps is actually good for your health. The improvements in lifestyle from having a Himalayan Salt lamp in your house may not, in most cases even be because of medical reasons.
You might buy a Himalayan salt lamp and you might even notice an improved lifestyle but that may not all be down to any supposed medicinal properties in Himalayan salt itself. They’re more therapeutic properties than anything. So why must you buy Himalayan salt lamps and are there any benefits associated with them at all? Let’s find out.
They are attractive to look at
Himalayan salt lamps are really attractive to look at. They emit a warm pink-yellow glow that is really soothing and mellow, especially at night and this genuinely lightens the mood around them. They’re also great substitutes to waxy candles which you’d use for occasions like candle-lit dinners or when there is no electricity and you don’t have a night lamp or inverter to keep your house lit.
Their pretty and soothing glow is what actually therapeutically improves your mood and not the negative ions they release. Researchers have studied that people with depressive symptoms and unstable moods report improvements in their conditions when exposed to negative ions.
However, the link they found between negative ions and a person’s mood is not dose related and thus, cannot be proved to work effectively all the time. Moreover, we don’t even know if Himalayan salt lamps release the amount of negative ions required to calm a person down enough. The improvements in mood are basically related to color and light therapy.
Great night lamps
Himalayan Salt lamps act as great night lamps. There are many people out there who don’t like sleeping in complete darkness at night and thus prefer a night lamp. You can always go for a Himalayan salt lamp instead of an electronic night lamp.
The pretty and ambient glow emitted by Himalayan salt lamps feels really nice and might also help sleep faster because of the dim, hazy but relaxing color and low brightness of the lamp. They also require much less maintenance than scented candles and other such illuminants which are used for the same purpose.]
As unique décor
Another reason you’d want to have a Himalayan salt lamp in your house is as unique decoration made out of a rare mineral from a specific part of the world. It makes your house look that much more artsy and the vibes are pretty nice. You can show off to your guests and friends about the pretty lamp in your house that uses Pink salt from a specific salt mine in the Himalayas.
All in all, we’d urge you to be skeptical about the health benefits a lot of articles and hard-sellers of these pretty lamps claim. You can buy them for whatever reason but don’t buy into the health benefits claim. You might just notice a number of those benefits but those are down to therapeutic reasons and not medical. So you’d best take these claims with a *drumroll* pinch of salt.
They’re pretty nice novelty objects to own at the end of the day and are worth the price just because of the uniqueness of their functioning. It's always nice to have some decorative luminance in your house just for the sake of it and we’d urge you to try these out because they’re quite beautiful to look at.
The only thing is they’re not necessarily beneficial to your health.
Who knows, researchers might just find some weight to these claims someday though.
Home is where the heart is, and everyone would want to build a home where they could head back to, after a long hard day and relax. Himalayan Salt Lamp has been a trendy product which has been used by many. With its multiple benefits, this lamp can help in transforming your home into a peaceful abode where you would want to return to, every day!
Apart from having multiple benefits, it is essential to understand that these are different from regular salt in their composition as well as mining. It holds the same property of salt, being hygroscopic, which means it attracts water molecules.
PURE & NATURAL: This rock salt lamp is hand-carved from...
ADJUSTABLE LIGHTING: The dimmer switch allows you to adjust...
Hygroscopic nature
Since the salt is hygroscopic, it attracts a lot of moisture from its surroundings, as a result of which, the dirt, smoke, and other allergens get purified around it. When heated, the salt lamp keeps the air around it clean, which is why the lamp too needs to be cleaned from time to time. This mostly helps individuals who have respiratory problems like asthma. When the surrounding air is clean and free of pathogens and dirt, breathing becomes easier and is automatically beneficial for our health.
Negative Ion source
The salt lamp is an excellent source of negative ions, and negative ions have a lot of benefits for our body and well being. It helps in higher oxygen flow to your brain, it keeps away irritants from the air and keeps you refreshed. This gives the same effect if you spend a lot of time in nature. However, the negative ion which is released by the lamp is in minimal amount. Hence one lamp may not be sufficient for an entire house. The negative ions released also helps in increased secretion of serotonin, better blood flow, and overall well-being.
Source of Light
Being a lamp, it apparently gives off the glow. The Himalayan Salt Lamp gives off a very subtle dim glow which is very soothing to the eye and the soul. It helps in lighting up any dull and mundane corner of your house- whether it is your living room, bedroom or your kitchen. It has also been proved that it helps in better sleep when compared to blue light, as the radiance is much more soothing.
Mood upliftment
The Himalayan Salt Lamp gives off a wonderful orange and pink glow, and along with that it also releases negative ions, which is proved to be responsible for uplifting your mood. Over-all it boosts the healthy lifestyle of an individual. It also combats allergies, hence adding to another reason for uplifting your mood. It helps mainly for people who suffer from SAD or seasonal depression syndrome.
Neutralizes electromagnetic radiation
This is the radiation which is emitted by all the electronics in the house and creates a lot of static energy around it. It leads to increased amount of stress, loss of concentration, fatigue, proneness to cancer, and reduces the body's immune response in the long run. The negative ions of the lamp can help in neutralizing this radiation, but only to an extent.
Aesthetic
Apart from all the health benefits of the salt lamp, it is also very aesthetic. It automatically adds to the décor of the house and helps in bringing out the colors. The lamp being of different shapes and sizes could also be placed anywhere around the house and is a great addition to your knick-knacks.
Photo Courtesy of Annie Tarasova
Real vs Fake Himalayan Salt Lamps
With variants of the Himalayan Salt Lamp in the market, it is very difficult to differentiate between the real and the fake product. Real Himalayan Salt Lamps have some distinctive features which differentiate them from the fake ones, and it is wise to research thoroughly before making a purchase. From the size or the color and the effects it has- below is a guide as to how to choose the best real lamp for your home.
Color
Usually, the real Himalayan Salt Lamp has a darker color. The color is typically a combination of pink and orange. 100% authentic Himalayan Salt Lamps are usually specified, and this should be checked before making a purchase. Fake Himalayan Salt Lamp would have a distinctive color, different from the real one, like the light pink ones with black spots. They would have other salts and chemicals admixed with it. So make sure to check the ingredients.
Size
Usually, a good lamp would be a little large and bulky, as the lighter versions not only have the possibility of being fake but also does not impart the benefits of the salt lamp. The larger the lamp, the better is its cleansing property. It should also be kept in mind that you cannot place a tiny salt lamp in a large room and expect to feel its benefits. The size of the room is also a determining factor to differentiate between a real and fake lamp.
Surface texture
A rough surface is one of the indications for checking the quality of the product. Roughly surfaced lamps not only look good, but they also have the better quality of air purification and neutralization. A polished lamp has a lesser surface area, hence smaller benefits.
Bulb type
The type of bulb used for the lamp should be checked before purchasing it. Only when a heat producing bulb is used, the salt lamp would work and impart its soothing effects. An LED bulb does not work. The wattage of the bulb should be steady, depending on the size of the lamp. Anything which would not produce enough heat is possibly fake. Also, it is not supposed to illuminate the room; it only provides a light glow.
Flexible return policies
Since these lamps are made of salt and a bulb, the possibility of it breaking is very high. The guarantee period offered with the lamp, along with the return policy tells a lot about the genuineness of the product. It is a definite point to consider before making a purchase.
Durability
You cannot expect that your salt lamp would accidentally hit the floor and not break. If that happens, it is quite obviousit is a fake. It is salt! It is supposed to shatter.
White Himalayan lamp
Yes, they do exist. However, the real ones are costly, so a low priced one is a definitive fake. The white Himalayan salt lamps are way better in quality than the pink ones and can never be cheaper.
Origin
The salt is rumored to be mined from parts of India and Khewra, Pakistan, so it is essential to check on the origin before making the purchase. There are various products which are sold off by the same name, hence being scammed is very common.
Non-benefitting
If you owned the salt lamp for a very long time, you spent almost every day in the same room with it, and yet you haven’t experienced any of its benefits, you probably have been scammed! The salt lamp should not be moisture resistant, and nor should it make you feel like there is no calming effect. The lamp is supposed to ease you down, reduce stress and also benefit your health when used in the right size.
Check for yourself
If you are highly doubtful of the quality of the Himalayan Salt Lamp you just purchased, you could test it for yourself. Since it is salt, it is mean to melt under water. If you try and wash the Himalayan salt lamp, under hot water essentially, the size of the lamp will change. The lamp will start to melt. If running under the water leads to no changes to the lamp, it is a fake and should immediately be returned.
Perspire
Following the theory of hygroscopy, the slat lamp is supposed to sweat and release moisture because it is hygroscopic. If it is dry when exposed to moisture, it is undoubtedly a fake!
Oddly cheap
If the lamp is sold at an odd and reasonable price, it is mostly not real. The Himalayan salt is a mineral which is difficult to mine, and it could not possibly be coming at a low price.
Read-up
It is highly advisable to read through reviews of all the customers, good or bad, before purchasing the salt lamp. The reviews say a lot about the product and how real it is and thus help in the long run.
These are some of the benefits as well as tips to know the real deal from the fake and while it is an investment, the salt lamps are perfect for the overall health and well-being of an individual and surely are worth the hype!
Whoever invented the air compressor must have been too lazy to work. Otherwise, who thinks of using air as a one-stop solution for all household and industrial tasks?
And perhaps, they became active in the process of inventing this ingenious device! Jokes apart, an air compressor is an enormously versatile device. It doesn’t leave even an iota of doubt over its performance and leaves you to marvel.
From cleaners to spray painters, and from nailers to impact drills, every other job becomes so easy with air compressors. But finding the right one of your choice is tricky, and this is where we come in.
As you scroll down, you will find some of the best high CFM air compressors and a definitive guide that details our selection process.
So, what are you waiting for? Let’s jump straight into the nitty-gritty.
Makita MAC5200 3.0 HP Big Bore Air Compressor. Makita MAC5200 offers quiet operation and a powerful motor, enabling it to accommodate two airguns simultaneously, although it's on the pricey side.
California Air Tools CAT-4620AC. California Air Tools CAT-4620AC impresses with its energy efficiency and exceptionally quiet operation, offering stable performance, yet falls short in terms of portability due to the lack of wheels.
Powermate Vx PLA4708065. Powermate Vx PLA4708065 is excellent for heavy-duty applications with a high-capacity motor and large gas tank, but it does not include a power cord.
DeWalt DXCMV5048055 Two-Stage Cast Iron Industrial Air Compressor. DeWalt DXCMV5048055 leverages its two-stage design for high performance in heavy-duty tasks, but it is not portable and has a high price tag.
BOSTITCH Pancake Air Compressor BTFP02012. BOSTITCH Pancake Air Compressor BTFP02012 delivers value for money with high capacity and the ability to enhance connected tool performance, but it operates with a bit of noise and takes a longer time to build pressure.
To help you make an informed decision, we have compiled a list of the 7 best highest CFM air compressors available in the market. Get ready to discover the top-notch options that offer unmatched airflow for all your compressed air needs. Here's the list of the 7 best highest CFM air compressors.
1. Makita MAC5200 3.0 HP Big Bore Air Compressor - Best for Power and Low Noise
We don’t have much to say about Makita, which is dominating the power tools industry with some of the top-notch hammer drills, OMTs, workbenches, etc. That’s why we chose the powerful Big Bore air compressor that’s engineered for increased compression, faster recovery, and almost no noise. Let’s see why this is one of the best air compressors on the market right now.
Frankly, what impressed us the most about the MAC5200 model is its Big Bore engineered pump cylinder and piston. Also, its 3 HP engine can perform exceptionally well compared to its size, and as it comes with an in-built thermal overload detector, it works as a protective shield of the internal circuit.
Moreover, the product comes with a tank of 5.2 gallons, which is adequate for a wide range of air tools, both light and heavy. But if you’re looking to jack multiple appliances at the same time, it would be pretty tough for this tool to handle it. And talking about capacity, the MAC5200 scores high with its maximum air pressure of 140 PSI. At 90 PSI, it rises to 6.5 CFM, and at 40 PSI, it delivers a decent 6.9 CFM.
If you’re not a fan of numbers, let us tell you this is quite an impressive count as it allows you to run two air guns simultaneously, and that too without getting jammed. Makita takes care to make quiet and portable air compressors that don’t make noise above 90 dBA. Its oiled pump adds to the low-noise factor while the wheel-and-handle-kit makes the product very easy to carry around.
So, in short, this is an excellent buy for heavy-duty as well as medium-scale users.
The only factor that bothered us about the product was its price. If you have a tight budget, this is not a model to look for. But the catch is, this is a product that has earned every penny of the price tag. Yet, we believe, many won’t be able to afford it.
What We Like
Noise-free operation
High-quality motor
Very portable
Can accommodate 2 airguns at once
What We Don't Like
Price
Maximum PSI: 140 | Horsepoewer: 3 | Tank Capacity: 5.2 gallons | CFM @ 90 PSI: 6.5 | Noise Level (dB): 90 | Oil-Free: No
2. California Air Tools CAT-4620AC - Best for Energy Efficiency and Quiet Operation
When it comes to California Air Tools, you can rest assured that all your air equipment is going to have a field day. It’s also the king of noise-free operations, as it heavily borrows from the latest trends in the industry. They have mastered the race for the best air tools by constant adaptation, improvisation, and overcoming all obstacles with excellent customer service.
Well, just because the company is well-renowned doesn’t mean each of its products is top-notch. But the CAT-4620AC mesmerized us with its new 2 HP motor that’s designed to draw less than 14 amps of power.
Although not as yielding as the 3 HP Makita, this motor runs a massive oil-free pump (so less maintenance and even less mess) whose operational capability is 3,000 hours. When such a durable pump joins an air pressure of 125 PSI, the combo makes the device all the more versatile. At 90 PSI, the compressor generates an air volume of 5.3 CFM, which is pretty great for connecting more than two air tools.
And as for the quietness factor, California Air Tools always sets the bar high. Like the Dewalt model, the CAT-4620AC also performs with a whisper of not more than 70 dBA. So, you can complete all your pending garage tasks this weekend with this quiet little bird, and no one will bat an eye.
As for its weight, the machine seems a bit bulky. But the major downside of this product is its absence of wheels. Sure, you can do almost everything with this compressor with the help of a connecting cord, but it’d be bad luck for those who require it to move around. We believe CAT will improvise very soon and add a pair of wheels to this design.
3. Powermate Vx PLA4708065 - Best for Heavy-Duty Applications
Till now, we had talked about mid-range models that would at best qualify as bridge or intermediate-level products. But here we have Powermate Vx, which is one of the largest air compressors capable of handling very heavy-duty tools and multiple applications with utmost smoothness. Let’s have a look at its features, and you’ll have an idea of all its uses.
This dude right here is one of the big bosses of the industry. Just have a look at its specs boasting of a 4.7 HP 240 V motor, but which draws a mere current of 15 amps only. This means, that despite a massive engine strength, it doesn’t crave too much energy to function. So, win-win for all!
As for its capacity, the compressor gives out a maximum pressure of 155 PSI, and when the mark hits 90, Powermate delivers a massive air volume of 14 CFM. Needless to say, this is a higher number than most other heavy-duty compressors can achieve.
But it can also handle a significantly more significant number of air tools such as ratchets, impact drills, spray guns, double nailers, you name it.
The best part about this compressor is each part of it complements the other to provide the user with a smooth air passage. The 80-gallon tank facilitates constant airflow, and its durable steel body is designed to last for years.
It combines with the oil-lubricated pump, a full cast-iron body, and a crankcase to give you an air compressor that ensures a smooth workflow in all kinds of job sites.
Well, this is a top-notch model, no doubt about that! But there are two minor issues we faced with it. First, there is no power cord included in the package. And second, this is pricey with a whole lot of noise. But being a compressing monster, we can’t complain too much about its roar. Still, if you aren’t a professional, it may not suit your value-for-money quotient.
What We Like
Heavy-duty motor
Very high CFM
Extremely durable body
Gas tank of 80 gallons
Smooth workflow without jamming
What We Don't Like
No power cord included
Maximum PSI: 155 | Horsepoewer: 4.7 | Tank Capacity: 80 gallons | CFM @ 90 PSI: 14 | Noise Level (dB): 55 | Oil-Free: No
4. DeWalt DXCMV5048055 Two-Stage Cast Iron Industrial Air Compressor
Well, we thought of adding another high-end model from a more renowned company. And who can score any higher than Dewalt, in terms of fame and quality of its products? Its previous model mentioned in the list lies somewhere between a semi-pro and a professional compressor. But for those looking for some heavy-duty work, the DXCMV5048055 can be your go-to!
Before getting into the nitty-gritty, let’s understand the inner mechanism of a 2-stage compressor. Everyone knows the 2-stage is so much better than the single-stage ones, but where lies the difference?
Well, 2-stage compressors draw air into a cylinder, compress it in a single-piston stoke, and push it into a smaller piston of even higher pressure. This doubles the maximum pressure the device can generate before it’s sent to the tank. As you’ll see, this is a 471-pound stationery model that maxes out at 175 PSI air pressure to give you a 17.5 CFM of air volume at that level.
So, for this compressor, not just larger loads, but handling multiple pneumatic tools such as sandblasters, and hydraulic jacks, is a cakewalk. Moreover, with a TOPS (Thermal Overload Protection System) equipped motor, any heavy electrical passage is easily dismissed, and Dewalt’s patented pump design takes the overall working temperature a couple of notches down.
Talking about the motor and the storage tank, they left us with no complaints and only high performance. A 5 HP motor and 80 gallons of air capacity add to the versatility of this device, and as mentioned above, it can handle too many heavy-duty tools at once.
Trust us, this model will last you for years without a single chance of tailback. Still, what’s gonna hurt you is its price. Yeah, 2-stage air compressors are costly, and on top of that, very few models are portable. So, one’s a huge price, and the second is portability. But then again, there’s only so much we can ask from a high-quality compressor such as this.
What We Like
5 HP high-capacity motor
The motor is also TOPS-equipped
Very high CFM
Can handle many heavy-duty tools at hand
What We Don't Like
Not portable
Pricey
Maximum PSI: 175 | Horsepoewer: 5 | Tank Capacity: 80 gallons | CFM @ 90 PSI: 17.9 | Noise Level (dB): 55 | Oil-Free: No
5. BOSTITCH Pancake Air Compressor BTFP02012
Winning the tag of Amazon’s Choice is a prestigious title, but that’s not the only reason behind choosing this pancake air compressor. Bostitch has been producing fastening and pneumatic tools since 1896, so from a company, it has become a legacy of trust and quality. This air compressor only adds to that long line of top-notch products.
From its very first appearance, this model looks compact and tidy and also comes with a detailed manual on assembling, usage, and some FAQs. Moreover, its pancake-shaped dome comprises the storage area of the device, while for easier readings, the compression technology is located at the top.
As for its capacity, its large belly has a capacity of 6 gallons, which is unusual for pancake compressors. It maxes out at an air pressure of 150 PSI and 90 PSI, it can hit up a decent air volume of 2.7 CFM, making it suitable for operating an extensive array of power tools such as impact drills, ratchet drivers, spray guns, double nailers, etc.
Noteworthy to mention, Bostitch comes with a high-flow regulator and couplers that enhance the performance of the tool and every other device that you attach to it. Moreover, its complete package of air hose, blowgun, and nozzles of different sizes increases its versatility manifold. This is a comprehensive tool kit that will easily attach power tools of all sizes and save you the hassle of running around the market, looking for bits of specific sizes.
Well, this is one of the most compact yet high-performing compressors out there. But there are some minor faults that we’d like to point out. Despite the noise dampeners, it runs with quite a bit of noise, and that’s a complete bugger. Moreover, its pressure-building time is close to 3 minutes, and that can affect the momentum of your job.
We just couldn’t settle with only one model from Makita. Although most of its air compressors are incredibly versatile, we feel the MAC700 hits up the highest scores in terms of all the yardsticks. Coming from one of the most reputed brands, it’s bound to have some unique features that make this product stand apart from the rest of the crowd.
Let’s begin by explaining the adjective we used in the intro: versatile. Well, you can attach any power tool to the model for jobs such as spray painting or sanding because it comes with a tank capacity of 2.6 gallons and a maximum pressure of 130 PSI. This combination proves excellent for enhancing the versatility quotient, as at 40 PSI, it gives a decent air volume of 3.3 CFM.
Frankly, the crux of this device’s success lies in the powerful motor that comprises a durable pump made of cast iron. What’s more, it comes with a big bore cylinder and piston that translate to better compression and far less noise emission. Added to that, the air and pressure holding capacity increase significantly with larger bores. So, Makita has got you covered with its foolproof internal mechanism.
And finally, its low current drawing feature drastically minimizes the chances of a short circuit, or tripped breakers, and protects the device from random voltage fluctuations.
There’s no doubt that this is a brilliant, compact model that you can use in professional workspaces as well. But, and this is a difficult checkpoint to cross, its 70 lbs weight is a serious downside in terms of portability. We mean to say, that no one wants a compressor on a job site that costs them back pain, and this is precisely where the MAC700 falls short.
What We Like
Very versatile
Low risk of short circuit
Cast iron build of the gas tank
Quiet operation
What We Don't Like
Heavy
Maximum PSI: 130 | Horsepoewer: 2 | Tank Capacity: 2.6 gallons | CFM @ 90 PSI: 3.3 | Noise Level (dB): 80 | Oil-Free: No
7. California Air Tools 10020C
We are back with an elder brother of the CAT-4620AC, and it’s 10020C. California Air Tools do not need much introduction owing to their reputation of making some of the quietest and coolest air compressors. What’s more, they are loaded with too many features, which make these devices a complete package of convenience, power, and versatility.
Here’s a one-liner that can aptly describe what we feel about this product: A highly portable compressor that comes with a 10-gallon air tank, and that makes less than 70 dB noise with a powerful 2 HP engine. This compressor felt like it was a perfect candidate to outperform any other model within the price range.
Talking about its construction, the compressor sports a user-friendly design that includes easy controls, twin air pressure gauges, and dual quick connectors. What’s more, everything is accessible from the control panel situated in front of the durable steel cage.
At a rating of 90 PSI, the CFM hits as high as 5.3, which means plenty of power for various garage pneumatic tools such as ratchets, drivers, wrenches, etc. One trailblazing feature of this model is its improved motor performance. California Air Tools has introduced an efficient motor, an SP 9421 pump in the compressor that features improved heat dissipation and increased duty cycle.
That’s why the 2 HP motor allows longer compressor run times with minimum recovery periods. Finally, despite being an 80 lbs hefty device, its durable back wheels make it perfectly easy to travel all around your workspace.
Although the cleanup system has been improved, many users have still found it cumbersome as the manual drain valve is hard to open. So, if you can, replace the manual valve with a more straightforward pull cable drain valve to further ease your waste-water cleaning mechanism.
Compiled beneath is a table that systematically analyzes the salient features of air compressors boasting the highest Cubic Feet per Minute (CFM). The table considers vital specifications such as maximum pressure (in PSI), horsepower, tank capacity, CFM at 90 PSI, noise level (in dB), and whether the device is oil-free.
With so many trailblazing features, it’s only normal to get confused! But what’s even more confusing is the market out there that calls you with all its fancy gimmicks the moment you step in to look for something. Although we made sure to increase everyone’s needs in this list, you just might not come across the product of your choice. Also, indeed, every other claim made by many companies doesn't stand firm in the long run, and they fail to keep their promises.
But don't worry about that! We have got you covered with our extensive buyer’s guide so that you know what elements to look for and what NOT to look for when buying an air compressor.
Let’s start with the basics, shall we?
PSI
It’s the amount of air pressure force given out by the compressor, and its abbreviation is ‘pounds per square inch.’ There will be times when you’ll need a product of higher PSI if you gotta connect more than two heavy-duty air tools. For simple air devices such as ratchet drivers, pneumatic drills, or ½ inch impact drivers, something that goes up to 130 PSI could fit just right.
But for heavy-duty industrial-grade tools, you're gonna need something higher than the above-normal range. This is where the PSI factor comes into play.
Understanding your requirements
‘Why should I need a compressor in the first place?’ Yeah, this is the primary question one needs to ask before even hitting the search bar with ‘10 best air compressors’. Everything depends on your choices, and it’s not advisable to start hunting for the best tools for that’d be just blind rummaging.
So, sort out your needs first. Here are some basic questions to begin with:
Am I using a compressor to power pneumatic tools or some heavy machinery?
Am I going to need something low-key just for household purposes?
How much tank capacity am I going to need, and how long am I gonna use it each day?
This is just the beginning of the list to help you get sorted, but you get a rough idea of what to ask yourself, and how to.
Knowing the different types of compressors
Once you are sure that you DO need a compressor, it’s time to get into a bit of serious research. Don’t worry, we’ll help you out here.
Compressors can be mainly of two types: reciprocating and rotary screws. And most of the ones we covered here are reciprocating piston types. Here the piston moves up and down and also comprises a one-way valve on its top. Rotary screws work differently as they’re designed for continuous use and can run consistently for up to several minutes.
Now, piston compressors come in single-stage and dual-stage. Single-stage compressors max out at 150 PSI, whereas 2-stage models can go much higher over 200 PSI. And do not confuse all dual-piston compressors with being 2-stage compressors. To differentiate between these 2 kinds, look at the size of the pistons. If one is significantly smaller than the other, it’s a dual-stage model.
Single-stage compressors work great for most pneumatic tools, spray guns, glue guns, caulk guns, inflating tires, etc. In contrast, dual-stage compressors are best suited for industrial-grade work, which includes a combination of some of these devices alongside heavy-duty air tools.
To be more specific: Defining CFM
For those that don’t know, CFM is Cubic Feet per Minute, but there are certain angles to this denominator that we’re going to discuss now.
Always look for the Standard CFM (SCFM) number, which is measured at 14.5 PSIA in 0% relative humidity, at 68 degrees F.
If you need to know how much CFM you require, add up all the SCFM of the air tools that you’re likely to use regularly. And then add 30% of that sum to it for a buffer. This would be the perfect guessing of how much CFM you need, and without looking for the SCFM, just going by the numbers written under product info won’t be of much help.
How do I determine the CFM requirements for my tools?
To determine the CFM requirements for your tools, you need to check the tool’s documentation or consult the manufacturer. Most tools specify their CFM requirements, which will help you choose an air compressor with a suitable CFM rating.
Can I use multiple tools simultaneously with a high CFM air compressor?
Yes, a high CFM air compressor is capable of running multiple tools simultaneously, provided that the combined CFM requirements of the tools do not exceed the CFM rating of the compressor.
Are high CFM air compressors suitable for home use?
High CFM air compressors are generally more suitable for professional or industrial applications rather than typical home use. However, if you have specific high-demand tasks or extensive DIY projects that require increased airflow, a high CFM compressor may be beneficial.
What maintenance is required for high CFM air compressors?
Maintenance requirements for high CFM air compressors typically include regular oil changes, filter replacements, checking and adjusting the belt tension (if applicable), and ensuring proper ventilation and cooling to prevent overheating.
Can I upgrade the CFM rating of my existing air compressor?
No, you cannot significantly upgrade the CFM rating of an existing air compressor. The CFM rating is determined by the design and specifications of the compressor pump and motor. If you require a higher CFM, you would need to invest in a compressor with a higher CFM rating.
We believe you’ll find the perfect compressor of your choice among these products. But don’t get disheartened if you get confused midway, and now you have a tie of around 3 to 4 products at hand.
We all have been here at some point in our lives when choosing between the best of the best products. So, to make your life a bit easier, here’s our final selection of the top 1% of the top 1%.
There’s fierce competition between the 2 models of Makita and California Air Tools. If you’re hoping for top-notch performance from a mid-range model, which also caters to your budget, you can go for anyone between MAC5200 and CAT-4620AC.
And for high-end models, the clear winner from this list is the DeWalt DXCMV5048055. It’s a 2-stage air compressor with the most top-notch features, and the very high CFM count fits all kinds of industrial air tools. But while thinking about it, the Powermate model is also befitting for most heavy-duty jobs.
We hope we answered all your questions today.
We welcome your comments to improve this list and also to know what we are missing from the current industry trends
A well-lit garden or a porch looks welcoming and helps keep the house safe, but it can consume a lot of electricity.
That is where solar lights come into the picture. The best solar spotlights are equipped with a built-in photocell sensor to detect the brightness level outside. It allows the solar spotlights to switch on when the sun sets and switch off after sunrise.
You can let these solar lights work on their own, and they will not increase the energy bills at all. Just pay the one-time cost and then let the solar spotlights work independently. In this guide, we will discuss the best high-output solar lights and their pros and cons.
So, read on!
Best High-Output Solar Spot Lights
To help you find the finest options available, we have curated a list of the 10 best high-output solar spotlights. Get ready to brighten up your outdoor world with these exceptional lighting solutions. Here's the list of the 10 best high-output solar spotlights.
Are you looking for solar lights that would brighten the lawn at night without you intervening? Well, then you are at the right place. This URPOWER 4 LED Solar Light will help you light up your lawn every evening without incurring any additional costs. So, let’s see what else it offers!
2 Brightness Levels: Low light mode (10hrs) / high light...
Separately Adjustable Light & Solar Panel: The solar...
Why Did We Like It?
This is one of those solar spotlights that enables the user to adjust the brightness as and when needed. Additionally, the solar panels installed in this device are pretty broad, and the battery does not take too long to get fully charged.
Also, note that both the light head and the solar panel are totally adjustable. Once you install it, your outdoor space will be flooded with bright light after sunset. You can modify the solar panel and set it in a way that it gets maximum sun exposure.
Moreover, this solar spotlight gives you ample options when it comes to installation. You can use stakes to stick the lights on the ground, or you can even consider mounting them on a wall. For that, however, you will need some screws.
What Could've Been Better?
After a few months of using the product, we noticed that the plastic color had started to fade. So, if you are placing it in areas that receive strong sunlight throughout the day, you might reconsider as that might lead to the color fading a bit.
Are you on the lookout for outdoor solar spotlights that are sturdy and easy to use? Then, it is best that you try the InnoGear Solar Lights. This is one of the best solar spotlights that we tried; with highly adjustable features, it managed to impress as well.
Independently Adjustable Light & Panel: Other solar lights...
Improved Brightness & 2 Working Modes: With super...
Why Did We Like It?
These outdoor solar spotlights allow the user to adjust the light as per their requirements. If you want a brighter light, you can change these solar outdoor lights to meet your needs and very well use them as landscape lights.
The solar panels in this set are made in a way that captures direct sunlight in the best possible way. All the light heads are adjustable and can be rotated up to 90 degrees, thereby enhancing the lighting range considerably.
This is one of the brightest solar spotlights that we tried, and we can say with conviction that it is super-efficient. The company has upgraded its technology, which has helped increase the conversion rate by almost 30%. And the best part is that the moment the sun rises, they get switched off automatically.
What Could've Been Better?
A fair warning: these solar landscape spotlights won’t work the best if they fail to harvest the sun’s energy properly. Simply put, unless there is direct sunlight, they will take a long time to get charged. They can be used for landscape lighting only if the space receives ample sunlight.
One of our top recommendations for a high level of brightness is the Linking StarRay Solar Landscape Spotlights. The lights are of supreme quality and are known to be IP67 waterproof. You will love this eco-friendly option that will consume very limited energy and can work for 30,000 hours.
[Larger and Flexible Solar Panel] Enjoy faster charging with...
[Super Bright & Energy Efficient] Solar lights outdoor...
Why Did We Like It?
This spotlight pack comes with two installation options to choose from. You can either use a wall bracket or a ground stake to keep the solar spotlights in place. To place it directly on the ground, you can insert the stake and then attach the spotlights. Otherwise, fix the wall bracket with the help of screws to the wall.
Moving on, you will get two brightness modes, and you can choose between high light mode and low light mode. The dusk-to-dawn solar spotlights can detect the brightness around and then settle for the mode needed. It will switch on by itself when the area becomes dark and will switch off when the sun rises.
Plus, there are 16 lamp beads with a 90 degrees beam angle that can produce 650 lumens of 6500K light output, which should be enough to light up a single spot. You can then adjust the angle of the light. It is adjustable up to 90 degrees vertically and 180 degrees horizontally.
What Could've Been Better?
You should know not to place these spotlights in partially lit areas. They have to be placed right under the sun so that they can receive proper sunlight and get charged. If you put it in partial sunlight, the light will only last for two to three hours at night, which may not serve your purpose.
Enjoy your evening walks peacefully with the Nekteck Solar Lights, an advanced lighting option. It will meet all your lighting needs in outdoor spaces, and you can rest assured that the backyard will be lit up throughout the night. Plus, the adjustable angle will make sure that the doorway is never in the dark.
Upgraded 4th Generation Solar Lights & Panel—The Advanced...
Highly Resistant for all kinds of weather- Nekteck solar...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, you can safely use outdoor solar spotlights as they are weather resistant and can withstand temperature fluctuations. You will be happy to see that they will work well in frost, snow, sleet, and rain. There are two ways to install the spotlights; you can mount them on walls or stick them on the ground.
Next, there are two brightness modes to shift between. Four LED bulbs present inside offer high and low modes that can meet all your lighting needs. The lights can remain on for six to ten hours, depending on the charge level. Also, it will switch on and off automatically, saving you a lot of work.
To top it all, the light angle can be adjusted up to 180 degrees to achieve the right amount of illumination. Specific dark areas can easily be highlighted thanks to this feature.
What Could've Been Better?
The outdoor solar spotlights are not sealed very well, and we have noticed dust accumulation inside. Now, you can clean it off, but that can be highly time-consuming. Hence, make sure that you cover the top with something while installing.
Another brilliant pair of lights that can always ensure that your doorways or gate area are lighted up is the LEREKAM Outdoor Solar Spot Lights. The bright cool white color is perfectly splendid and will keep peeping Toms away at night. You can also use a battery or a USB to charge the device.
Cool White Solar Spotlights Outdoor: A nightly light show!...
3 Brightness Lighting Modes: LEREKAM 40 LEDs solar outdoor...
Why Did We Like It?
One often wonders what to do in cloudy weather when there is no chance of solar-powered spotlights brightening up the pathway at night. That is because they do not get charged, but this product is different. Here, you get a rechargeable battery with a USB port for charging.
Next, you can opt for three brightness levels, which include high, medium, and low lighting. The battery will last for 8 hours on high mode, 15 hours on medium mode, and 25 hours on low lighting mode.
Also, take into consideration that the spotlights will light up the way with 40 LEDs and a 360 degrees lighting angle along with a 120 degrees big solar panel that is adjustable.
That is not all, as solar lights come with a waterproof exterior, and they can light up trees and bushes. Many use these lights to highlight parts of the landscape.
What Could've Been Better?
While you will get a USB-powered battery and wire, no wall plug is provided to use with it. Now, this should not be a big issue as plugs are commonly found around the house. If not, take the USB wire to a nearby electronic store and get a plug that fits.
Now that we have reached the middle of the list, it is time to introduce the Claoner Solar Spot Lights. These are highly efficient and can work automatically when the sun sets for the day. We have used it beside the pool, and the entire area remains lit up throughout the evening.
🏡【Cold White Solar Spotlights】Brighter 32 LEDs with...
🏡【High-efficient Solar Panel】The outdoor solar lights...
Why Did We Like It?
The product is made with ABS plastic, which is very durable. It can sustain high impacts and is made to be waterproof. You can use it in a place with a high level of rainfall, and it will still light up the porch in the rain.
Moreover, like most solar lights, this one can be installed in two ways, you can either mount it on a wall with screws or stick it in the ground.
To top it all, the solar spotlight comes with three brightness levels, which can last for different amounts of time. The low light mode can be used for 24 hours, medium lighting for 12 hours, and high lighting mode for 6 hours. This spotlight will detect the brightness level of the surrounding by itself and will adjust accordingly.
What Could've Been Better?
This solar spotlight features batteries that cannot be removed, and you will have to dispose of the entire light if the battery malfunctions. However, this does not affect productivity, and we will not hold it as a drawback.
Up next is a brilliant set of lights that can light up the deck or patio at night. The Billing Solar Spotlights can be stuck into the ground or mounted on a wall wherever necessary. You will love how easy it is to fix the lights in place.
Upgraded Solar Spotlights Outdoor 3000K warm white light,...
Bright Solar Lights for Outside- Each solar spotlight is...
Why Did We Like It?
The product features an IP67 waterproof design, which means that it can sustain adverse climatic conditions. You can use it in places that see a lot of rain and snow. Plus, it can add to the lighting and decoration of the place. It can also be used as a security landscape solar light.
Moving on, the color of the light is warm white, which adds a beautiful glow to the garden. You can install the lights easily on the ground, and they are adjustable up to 90 degrees.
Adding on; you can switch between the two lighting modes easily with one button. The low bright mode will be able to light up the area for 15 hours when charged fully. And if you use the high brightness mode, you can keep the light switched on for around 10 hours.
What Could've Been Better?
In case you are going to use these spotlights to light up the garden and trees in it, you should know that they work well for shorter plants but not for taller trees. Hence, you will need stronger lights if you wish to light anything taller than ten feet.
If you are looking for an all-weather lighting option, then the Magictec Solar Spotlights will be a great choice. The option comes in a pack of two and will light up your pathway or trees in the yard. Plus, these solar lights are well-known for their durability and energy efficiency.
Solar-Powered Convenience: Fully powered by the sun,...
All-Weather Durability: Engineered to withstand rain, heat,...
Why Did We Like It?
The best part about these solar spotlights is that they are adjustable, and you can change the direction vertically by 90 degrees. Plus, the solar panel can be rotated up to 180 degrees when needed. This should give you a stunning lighting experience.
Moreover, you will love the warm light glow of the solar spotlights. There is a built-in light sensor in every model, which automatically detects the brightness level outside. It will then light up when needed and switch off when the sun rises in the morning again.
On the other hand, the solar-powered lithium-ion battery is very powerful and rechargeable. It will provide power for 10+ hours once it is fully recharged.
Also, the body is made of plastic and is waterproof. You should be able to use it in bad weather conditions.
What Could've Been Better?
Remember that you will be getting a warm light that will provide a subtle glow. Please do not expect this solar spotlight to be very bright. It works best as accent lighting and if you need to light a pathway. But for pathways, you will need a few lights to install along the way.
Do you wish to change the color of your spotlights depending on your mood? The ROSHWEY Outdoor Solar Spotlights will allow you to do just that with its brilliant range of colors. These are made with ABS plastic and can be a part of your garden for a long time.
Solar Powered: Our solar garden lights last about 6-10 hours...
9 Working Modes: Colored solar outdoor lights provide 7...
Why Did We Like It?
There are seven different colors that you can toggle among depending on your mood and requirement. Plus, there are two auto color-changing modes that can be used for special occasions. The lights are perfect for a wide range of applications like Halloween, Christmas, or Thanksgiving.
Moreover, the solar panel, which is attached to the lights, can be rotated at an angle of 180 degrees vertically and 360 degrees horizontally. That would mean that they can capture the sun's rays well and use natural light to generate energy.
Adding on, the solar-powered spotlight pack comes with a 45-day money-back guarantee and a 12-month warranty. Hence, you can purchase without worrying about functionality. In case of any issues, you can call up customer service immediately.
What Could've Been Better?
The solar spotlight is pretty big in size, and you will not be able to hide it after installation. Since it has to be installed directly under the sun, the big head of the unit will always be visible. The brand could work on this and make it a little smaller.
Another super bright option that can light up patios very well is the Brightown Solar Spot Light. You will find two lights in one pack, which should light up the front of the house. The glow spreads over a large area, making it possible for people to see around in the dark.
【 Super Bright & Natural Light Solar Spotlights 】: The...
【 Energy-saving & 360° Adjustable Solar Garden Lights...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this product is easy to install and will last for a long time. It is made of ABS plastic with triangular patterns on the side. The floor insert material is also very strong, and you can easily stack it on the ground. We found that this outdoor light can last for up to 1000 uses.
Moving on, the solar lights come with a 600 mAh battery, which is rechargeable. It is an eco-friendly and energy-saving option with a large solar panel. Just make sure that the solar panel is placed right to capture the most amount of light, and you should have no other problems.
Additionally, the color is naturally white, and each spotlight is equipped with 30 lumens of LED lamp beads.
What Could've Been Better?
It is best to read the description of the product well before purchasing. This option is pretty bright, but it will only last for eight hours or less. Hence, it will turn off sometime in the middle of the night, which can be a problem if you are going to use them as security lights.
Buying Guide For The Best High Output Solar Spot Light
By now, you must have noticed that most of the lights are pretty similar, with minor differences among them. This might lead to confusion, and you may be unable to make a choice. In this section, we will talk about the factors that need to be kept in mind while making a choice. These should help you distinguish among the top products, so read carefully.
1. Illumination Distance
What is the area that you want to illuminate? You might want to highlight a tree in the garden, or you might want to throw light on the pathway. The illumination area varies for different solar lights, and you should select one that will fit your purpose.
In case you want a light for garden plants, then check for solar garden lights online which may work better for highlighting specific spots.
2. Weather Proofing
Since these are outdoor light modes, they need to be resistant to bad weather conditions. This is especially true for areas that see rough weather often. So, while purchasing, please check for the IP rating and only buy products with a high IP rating.
According to us, IP65 should be your starting point, and you can choose any solar spotlight, which is above that rating. Anything below that will not last for a long time.
3. Light Modes And Types
You will generally find cool white light, warm light, and other light color options when it comes to solar spotlights. Now, if you wish to add a warm glow to the backyard, warm yellowish light can be used for accent lighting. On the other hand, the cold white light will be brighter and will work better as a security measure.
Then there are options where you can toggle among a few colors. These work very well for festivals and pubs. You will also find solar path lights which can help in lighting up pathways leading up to the house. However, if you wish to install solar lamp posts, then there are separate options that can be placed on the streets.
High Output Solar Spot Lights FAQ's
What Is The Maximum Distance That A Solar Spotlight Can Illuminate?
You can light up an area that is 100 feet away from the light with very high-quality spotlights. Please check the distance the light can cover before purchasing so that all the dark zones are well-illuminated at night with the lights you buy.
Does a Solar Spotlight Have A Motion Sensor?
Some spotlights can have motion sensing technology which will turn on the lights automatically for about 20 seconds in case movement is detected. This is generally done by a PIR motion sensor that can detect and scare intruders when needed.
These can sense movement from 55 feet away, but again, these motion sensors will not be present in all solar spotlights.
How Long Does A Solar Panel Take To Charge?
You will have to install these solar panels in a sunny outdoor space for them to generate and store energy. Now, to get fully charged, it will take around 12 hours of exposure to the sun. However, you might need to charge for two days initially if the solar panel is not of very high quality.
Conclusion
This has been quite a long read, and we will give you a moment to take it all in. But before we can leave you to it, let us take you through our top choices one last time. The URPOWER 4 LED Solar Lights Outdoor, is a great option if you are looking to light up the porch in the evening.
With this, we have reached the end of this guide, and it is time to say goodbye. You will find othersolar-powered dusk-to-dawn lights on the internet which can also help you out.
Hidden gun storage furniture is anything that can covertly store firearms within it.
It can be in the form of a couch, entryway bench, or even a gun concealment clock! You can store other valuables in it too, but its primary purpose is to hide a firearm.
Unlike gun safes, gun concealment furniture is easier to access, which is why they’re so popular.
But if you’re confused about which one to get, let’s get started with this guide on the best hidden gun concealment furniture. We’ve even included a brief buyer’s guide to help you purchase the ideal hidden gun storage furniture, according to your needs and preferences.
Listed below are the Best Hidden Gun Concealment Furniture:
PS Products: A versatile clock with a concealed compartment for hiding valuables, the PS Products Concealment Clock is elegantly designed to blend with any decor. A notable downside is its packaging which unfortunately hints at the clock's concealed feature.
Sauder: The Sauder Lift-Top Coffee Table is distinguished by its hidden compartment large enough to hold a sizable firearm. Its rustic finish suits any decor, but it requires a relatively complex assembly that could be inconvenient.
American Furniture: This piece from American Furniture Classics 504 Entryway Bench provides extraordinary storage capacity for up to 5 long guns. Despite its impressive storage and seating functionalities, packaging and product condition on delivery have been points of concern.
Tactical Traps 35S: Tactical Traps' 35S Compact Concealment Cabinet stands out with its strong security feature, using a state-of-the-art RFID system. Its assembly is straightforward and quick, though the quality of the included foam could be improved.
Bellewood Cabinet: The Bellewood Customizable Nameplate Gun Storage Cabinet impresses with its customizable design and secure storage feature. Its flexibility and customization are its key strengths, but the complex installation process, particularly the confusing video guide, is a notable weakness.
Here's the list of the 9 Best Hidden Gun Concealment Furniture, perfect for discreetly storing firearms and other valuables in stylish and accessible ways.
1. PS Products Concealment Clock
First up on our list is the concealment clock from PS Products, which is a nifty way to hide your gun. It's elegant outlook and practical shape make it fit in with pretty much any kind of décor. This won’t just tell the time but will also keep dangerous and valuable items away from prying eyes.
One of the things we liked about this product was its smooth finish. It is made of engineered wood with a mahogany stain and is easy on the eyes. You can place it on a desk, bookshelf, or mantelpiece, and its sturdy base will ensure that it won’t tip over and fall.
Further, the clock face panel can be opened to reveal a felt-lined compartment that stores money, jewels, and important documents. There is also a keyhole at the back of the unit, which helps keep the clock panel securely closed by using magnets.
We also like how even though the unit has been designed primarily as a hiding spot for a small weapon, it is efficient at telling the time and uses an AA battery. Like any traditional clock, it uses roman numerals and keeps time with a precise quartz movement.
We liked how the product was big enough to accommodate a small gun easily. However, when we received the package, it came in a brown box with “Concealment Clock” emblazoned on it. We felt that such lettering gave the game away, and the packaging should’ve been more discreet.
What We Like
Fits in with any kind of decor
Protects belongings from scratches
Doubles up as a clock
Smooth finish
What We Don't Like
Non-discreet packaging
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 13.25 x 9.5 x 6.25 inches | Weight: 5.29 pounds | Style: Classic | Shape: Rectangle
2. Sauder
The following entry is a lift-top coffee table by Sauder, which is also one of the pricier items on our list. It measures 21.13” x 52.81” x 5.06”, weighs 70.5 pounds, and is ideal for keeping a large-sized firearm within its hidden compartment.
First off, we liked the rustic finish of this coffee table. It has been meticulously carved and polished from all sides to give it an elegant look, which makes it ideal for your bedroom or a lounge. It has also been crafted with the latest styles and color trends and has a beautiful char pine finish.
In addition to that, the top part of this coffee table can be lifted to reveal a hidden storage that can be used to keep a firearm if you have one. You can also use it to store television remotes, board games, blankets, and other household items.
What’s more, the table also has open lower shelves which can be used to keep magazines, showpieces, and other essential items on display. The top of the table is sturdy, and if you sit on the ground, you can easily use it as a writing surface or keep a laptop.
Though this product was a great addition to our den, we did notice one thing that could be worked upon. Since this is an expensive product, we expected minimal effort to put it together. However, the assembly was a little complicated and time-consuming, to our dismay.
What We Like
Rustic and polished look
Sturdy
Can store larger-sized firearms
Fits in with any kind of decor
What We Don't Like
Assembly was tedious and time-consuming
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 43.15 x 19.45 x 19.02 inches | Weight: 65 pounds | Style: Transitional | Shape: Rectangle
3. American Furniture Classics 504
This stately piece from American Furniture Classics is next up on our list, and we must say, it is awe-inspiring. This measures 54 x 17 x 30.5 inches, weighs 95 pounds, and has been manufactured in Vietnam! It’s also a little on the pricier side.
This product is a multipurpose entryway bench that is both attractive and functional. The seat measures 48.5 x 15.75 inches and is easily large enough for three people to sit on! You can keep it near the entrance of your house, and it can be used to store things, as well as sit.
One of the key highlights of this product is the cleverly-designed, lockable storage. This storage area has a removable accessory tray and can store up to 5 long guns. This is more than any product on this list, so if you hunt, for instance, and have a lot of firearms, then this product is for you.
We also liked the finish of this solid wooden bench, which additionally has wood veneers and a remarkable slat design. Moreover, the storage area is lined with felt, ensuring that whatever you keep inside remains scratch and dent-free.
We paid a lot for this product, so our expectations were high. However, to our chagrin, we saw that the box was severely damaged on arrival, and due to wear and tear, the product itself was visible. Additionally, the seat of the bench had a hole! We ended up having to get it replaced, which was quite tedious.
What We Like
Multipurpose
Removable accessory tray
Can store up to 5 long guns
Storage area is lined with felt
Attractive finish
What We Don't Like
Package damaged on arrival
Seat had a hole
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 54 x 17 x 30.5 inches | Weight: 95 pounds | Style: Classic | Shape: Rectangle
4. Tactical Traps 35S Compact
Tactical Traps is a reputed American company known for making high-quality concealment cabinets. The 35S Compact is no different and measures 22.5” x 10.2” x 4”. It also has a smart storage space inside that can safely store your firearms away from prying eyes.
We were mighty impressed that the hidden compartment could only be accessed with a state-of-the-art RFID system. So this means that the secret trap door located within the cabinet could only be accessed with a key card. How cool is that! This product wowed us with its superior functionality and top-notch security.
Interestingly, the unit also has a backup mechanism in place. This means that if you were ever to lose the card, the emergency lock-out protection could help get you back in! This is a great way to keep dangerous firearms away from the reach of children.
Another thing we liked was that despite its purpose, the unit could blend into the décor of any room. It is made of handcrafted wood and has a smooth, layered finish. Additionally, it can also be assembled within just 10 minutes without needing any extra support or sheetrock cutting.
The product’s exterior was just as expected, and the key card also worked well. However, we did notice that the foam that came with could’ve been of better quality and was a tad flimsy. As a result, we needed to upgrade it.
What We Like
Attractive LED display
Comes with trimmable foam to fit weapons, magazines, etc.
Emergency lock-out protection
Blends with every kind of decor
Takes only 10 minutes to assemble
What We Don't Like
Foam could’ve been of better quality
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 10.25 x 22.5 x 4 inches | Weight: 10.03 pounds | Style: Modern | Shape: Rectangle
5. Bellewood Designs Hidden Gun Storage
Bellewood is a brand that makes locally-manufactured quality products. This product is a hidden gun storage cabinet that masquerades as a customizable nameplate and is made of real wood. It measures 3.5” x 9.5” x 18.5 inches and is available in multiple colors.
We liked the elegant, wooden design of this product. In addition to that, it also featured a pine and stained finish, which was quite aesthetically pleasing. The makers of this cabinet have crafted it to fit right in with any kind of décor!
Yet another thing we liked about this was the customizable foam insert that could be additionally procured if told to the manufacturer. Interestingly, the foam consisted of numerous perforated squares that could be easily parted to hold any item.
What’s more, the unit also came with soft-close, slow-motion hinges that ensure that the cabinet door doesn’t slam and draw attention. There’s also a handy integrated magnetic lock that makes sure that only people with the locking key can open the cabinet. This keeps dangerous firearms out of the reach of children!
The cabinet can be mounted on a wall and comes with an installation and usage video to help the users to mount it. However, we did feel that the video could’ve been a little easier to understand, which would’ve made the mounting process less complicated.
What We Like
Wall-mountable
Blends in with any kind of decor
Secure and comes with a locking key
Protection from scratches and dents
What We Don't Like
Complicated installation video
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 18.5 x 10.5 x 4 inches | Weight: N/A | Style: Modern | Shape: Rectangle
6. PS Products Mantel Concealment Gun Clock
Now we have yet another concealment clock from PS Products, which has a unique design. It appears to be a classic mantel clock but features a hidden storage compartment. This can be used to store firearms, valuables, and important documents. The dimensions of this clock are 16” x 5.5” x 9”.
Primarily, we liked how this clock doesn’t give the game away and looks indeed like a real clock unless you know better! It is decorative and fits right into most kinds of décor. The unit is made of engineered wood and has a mahogany stain finish, which gives it an elegant and appealing vibe.
The hidden storage is located behind the face of the clock and is ideal for keeping handguns away from prying eyes. It can be unlocked using a hinge and magnetic clasp. What’s more, the storage space is lined with felt to protect your belongings from scratches and other kinds of damage.
Though marketed as hidden storage, the clock is functional as a clock too and features a quartz movement. It runs on two AA batteries that are helpfully included with the product itself!
Since the clock is marketed as a hidden storage unit, we expected that the fact that it has a small space inside wouldn’t be apparent. However, we were disappointed to see that the lock that secures the space was visible to the naked eye if one looked a little hard. Repositioning the clock is a makeshift remedy for this issue.
What We Like
Attractive
Blends in with every decor
Made of engineered wood with a mahogany finish
Batteries included with the product
What We Don't Like
The lock of the hidden storage is a little too evident
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 7.5 x 14.5 x 4 inches | Weight: 2.2 pounds | Style: Classic | Shape: N/A
7. Casual Home 615-65
Casual Home is a brand that is four decades old and is reputed for making furniture that lasts the test of time. This particular product is part of their Kennedy Collection, which is focused on creating long-lasting concealment furniture with a timeless appeal. This unit measures 15” x 46” x 30” and is made of solid wood.
One of the things we appreciated greatly about this table was that it is sustainably sourced. The Casual Home 615-65 strikes the perfect balance between environment-friendly and consumer-friendly and has a durable design that is attractive and functional.
In addition to that, the table does a great job of blending into the décor. It gives off a very unassuming and innocuous appearance, and the drop-down compartment stays squarely tucked away unless it's explicitly unlocked.
The unit also ensures that all the belongings you choose to store in the hidden storage remain insulated from dents and scratches. It features a felt-lined drawer that provides a soft resting space for your firearms. The hidden storage is also easy to access but not too easy either- which ensures that your firearms don’t go into the wrong hands!
The table blends in perfectly with the décor, and its dimensions are that of any standard coffee table. However, we felt that the hidden storage space was far too less compared to the large size of the table. So, it wasn’t a viable storage space for a mid to large-sized firearm.
What We Like
Sustainably sourced
Durable
Blends into the decor
Protection from dents and scratches
What We Don't Like
The size of the hidden storage compartment was too less
Yet another quality product from Casual Home is the 615-77, a nightstand with hidden storage. It measures 25” x 20” x 27” and is made of wood. It can efficiently hide your firearms so that they are right beside you in the bedroom should anything untoward occur.
To begin with, we liked how the hidden compartment is easy to access yet not obvious due to its smooth, gliding surface and magnetic trigger design. Moreover, the compartment inside is lined with felt that protects any belongings you keep inside from scratches.
In addition to that, the nightstand has two drawers and a large open shelf. These can accommodate your other bedside essentials like books, keys, and wallets. This ensures that you can keep potentially hazardous and private items away from prying eyes without raising suspicion.
Another thing we liked about this product was its rich mocha finish and sophisticated design, allowing it to blend seamlessly with any kind of décor. It blends classic with the modern while providing long-lasting durability and security.
The product was pretty easy to assemble and looked great when finished. However, the screws provided to assemble it were a bit short and ended up stripping out the hole. We were lucky enough to have longer ones, but we hope the manufacturers take this into consideration.
What We Like
Lots of space to keep bedside essentials
Rich mocha finish and sophisticated design
Durable
Protects valuables from scratches and dents
What We Don't Like
Short screws that strip away the hole
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 25 x 20 x 27 inches | Weight: 47.5 pounds | Style: Modern | Shape: Square
9. Tactical Traps 52R Original
This gun shelf from Tactical Traps is useful for keeping any firearms you store away from the reach of children and other strangers. The exterior of the shelf measures 46” x 13” x 5”, and the product as a whole weighs 9 pounds. Additionally, it is made of wood and can be mounted on a wall.
Tactical Trap is a reputed brand that makes top-notch products, and this shelf is a prime example of that. It has a hidden storage space that is easily accessible with a modern RFID locking system. So, a key card is used to access the secret compartment, making it perfect for storing a firearm.
We also liked the dark walnut finish of this wooden shelf, and it looks attractive. Its versatile aesthetic makes it ideal for use in any space, and it blends right into every kind of décor. Furthermore, it looks and feels high-end and can be installed in just 10 minutes.
It also has a mechanism to help you access the secret space if you lose the key card. Additionally, an LED light provides ample visibility if you’re trying to operate the hidden gun safe in the dark.
The shelf comes with foam that lines the hidden space to soften any inside items. However, we felt that the foam could be a little more perforated, which would make it cleaner and tighter than the current one they have.
What We Like
Secure
Protection from getting locked out
Attractive finish
LED for use in low light
What We Don't Like
The foam wasn’t as soft
Material: Wood | Dimensions: 46 x 13.5 x 5 inches | Weight: 23.3 pounds | Style: American | Shape: Rectangle
What Is the Best Hidden Gun Concealment Furniture?
In the realm of furniture designed for concealed firearm storage, subtle differences in factors such as materials used, dimensions, weight, style, and shape can affect the suitability of each option to an individual's needs. The following table is a comprehensive comparison of some notably exceptional hidden gun concealment furniture. Each item is evaluated based on the material it's made of, its dimensions (measured in inches), weight (specified in pounds), along with its style and shape characteristics.
Buying Guide For The Best Hidden Gun Concealment Furniture
1. Usability
All the products on our list are diverse and can be used in different home areas. They aren’t exchangeable, and some are additionally wall-mountable. We personally prefer storing our firearms on the wall, so we’d recommend the Casual Home 615-77, which expertly hides the firearm and holds other essentials too.
2. Size of the firearm
Maybe you have a small handgun. Or, maybe you own a long-sized weapon. We feel that storage space for a long firearm could accommodate a small one too, which is why we recommend the American Furniture Classics.
We’ve finally reached the end of our list, and we’re sure you must be spoilt for choice! But as we mentioned above, keep in mind the size of your firearm and the space available in your house while deciding what to go for.
According to us, the PS Products Concealment Clock provides maximum value for money and offers handy storage space. But, if you own a longer firearm, then the Sauder is a great fit.
We hope our guide helped you make up your mind. We’ll see you again soon with another one of these!
The best solutions are usually right there in front of you, exposed, in plane sight. This applies to kitchen storage as well, unused space can sit under the sink, under the upper cabinets or near your fridge. The solution showcased below is perfect for storing knives at your grasp, highly organized, hidden from children for safety. The pull-out knife drawer can be realized easily and it can save valuable counter space.
How to create the knife drawer
First thing first, materials, you will need 8 linear ft. of 3/4 in.x 1-3/4 in. hardwood that matches your cabinet, 2 linear ft of 1-1/8 in. hardwood, 1 ft. x 2 ft. of 1/4 in. hardwood plywood and one pair of 12 in. full extension drawer slides as a mechanism.
Carefully measure the space under the cabinet, this will ensure the quality of your end result. Now cut the supports (G) that will fit this space and protrude almost 1/16 in. underneath the cabinet. Carefully size the drawer by subtracting approximately 2-1/2 in. for the slides and 1-1/2 in. for two fixed slides (D). From front to back the dimension should be the minimum required for a 12 in. drawer slide.
Next step is cutting the drawers`components (A, B, C, E ). Assemble the drawer by using pocket screws, finish nails or glue. Rout the bottom end of the drawer frame with a 3/8 in. carefully rabbeting the bit set 1/4 in. deep. You can square the corners with a chisel. Next nail in plywood bottom with 3/4 in. brad nails. A centerline of 3/4 in. from the bottom edge on the fixed sides (D) and the drawer sides (b) should be drawn next. Screw the drawer slides now and flush to the front.
To ensure durability and grip both glue and screw the under-cabinet supports to the fixed slides. Install the entire drawer assembly next. Glue the drawer pull (F) , probably in the center behind the drawer front and finish the drawer in the end to match your cabinets. Congratulations now you have finished an extraordinary assemble that will enhance your living quality for you and your family whilst improving your cooking experience by eliminating the counter knife support.
What do you think about the Hidden Cabinet Knife Drawer? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below.
Tired of trying to find the best heat-resistant glue for metal objects to fix? Some substrates demand stronger adhesives to be bonded, and this is where heat-resistant glue helps. These adhesives bond different materials and are essential to many industrial, commercial, and manufacturing applications.
As these adhesives can resist extreme temperatures, they are extensively used for automobiles, batteries, and various electrical items that need to operate in high-temperature conditions. These adhesives are also suitable with various other materials like rubber, ceramic, etc.
Let’s take an example of bonding metal to wood; here heat resistant adhesive is a must. Because without proper adhesion, the metal or wood can tear off. If you search for highly-rated glue for metal to wood, you can find most of them are heat-resistant.
But, with all that information, you must be wondering which is the best heat-resistant glue that will fulfill all your needs. You can opt for super glue that works on metal, but remember, not every adhesive for stainless steel is resistant to heat. That’s why we have compiled this list to help you choose the best heat-resistant glue among all the options out there.
So, without further ado, let’s get started!
Listed below are the 5 best heat-resistant glues for metal from our list:
J-B Weld ExtremeHeat: This heat-resistant metallic paste from J-B Weld provides a strong bond that can withstand high temperatures, replacing the need for torch welding. Its main advantages include its environment-friendly, non-flammable formula, versatility in metal repair, and capacity to seal and repair pipelines and appliances extensively.
Rutland Silicone Sealant: This heat-resistant silicone adhesive works excellently in highly humid areas. It creates permanent rigid and flexible bonds with various materials, including metals, plastics, rubber, and ceramics, and its dark color helps it blend in with surfaces such as granite and stone countertops.
Henkel Corporation Loctite Stik n' Seal: Distinguished for sticking and sealing in extreme conditions, this adhesive from Henkel Corporation is ideal for outdoor objects. It resists harsh weather, moisture, UV rays, and extreme temperatures. It bonds a range of materials, even wet surfaces, making it perfect for outdoor repairs.
J-B Weld 8297 HighHeat: Known for its high performance, J-B Weld HighHeat epoxy glue is versatile and known for bonding various materials under extreme temperature conditions. Its high resistance to temperature fluctuations, fast curing time, and post-curing versatility are its main selling points.
KDGENG Metal Repair Gel: An excellent welding substitute, KDGENG's metal repair gel creates a strong, permanent bond on smooth, clean metal surfaces. Set apart for its high-temperature resistance and ease of use, it provides a durable bond suitable for repairing anything made from metals.
Here is the list of the 5 best heat-resistant glues for metal that can be used to securely bond metals together, even in the toughest conditions.
1. J-B Weld ExtremeHeat - Best for High-Temperature Repairs
The first heat-resistant glue we have for you is the 37901 heat-resistant metallic paste from J-B Weld, a brand well-known for manufacturing metal adhesives. This heat-resistant metallic paste was developed as an alternative to torch welding, and as promised by the brand, it can withstand temperatures as high as 1300 °C.
This J-B Weld high-temperature resistant metallic paste is formulated to repair metals like steel, iron, and other metal surfaces at maximum temperatures. This easy-to-use glue is non-flammable as it contains no solvents or VOCs, making it environment-friendly.
Also, this adhesive is water-based, which means it will not harm your health if you are exposed for a long time. It’s also very lightweight and requires less time to create a stronger permanent bond than steel.
The best part about this glue is that it provides a powerful bond after being cured. And, the cured glue can go through drilling, machining, or sanding. Moreover, this glue is also suitable for repairing crevices, tiny gaps, cracks, and holes in pipelines or appliances, etc.
One major drawback of this metallic paste is that it doesn’t handle expansion well. Many customers have pointed out that even though the glue provides strong adherence, it cracks open where the expansion happens in exhaust manifolds and fireboxes, which is an inconvenience.
What We Like
Inexpensive product
Fast-bonding formula
High-temperature resistant
Environment-friendly
What We Don't Like
Cracks under expansion
Quantity: 1 Container | Volume: 3oz | Set Time: 1 Hour | Cure Time: At Least 24 Hours | Dry Color: Gray | Resistance: Withstands Up to 1000°F
2. Rutland Silicone Sealant - Best for Humid Areas
The heat-resistant silicone glue from Rutland can be an ideal choice if you are searching for an adhesive that can work in extremely humid areas. This silicone adhesive will work to create a permanent bond and seal any item.
This silicone adhesive from Rutland forms rigid and flexible bonds and works well with a range of materials including metals, plastics, rubbers, and even ceramics.
So, whether you’re looking to seal a gap between your stove and the counter or trying to repair a chimney, this is the product you can bank on. It cures to form a tough and strong seal, which ensures the longevity of the joints.
We also like how the formula is water-based, which means any stains or spills can be wiped away easily. The dark color ensures it blends in with surfaces such as granite and stone countertops.
The one flaw we found was that the product emits a nasty smell like vinegar upon application. However, the good news is that it goes away after some time, so you shouldn’t have to bother about it for long.
What We Like
The dark color makes it less noticeable
Best for humid areas
Works on smooth surfaces
Easy to apply
What We Don't Like
Smells like vinegar
Quantity: 1 Tube | Volume: 2.7fl oz | Set Time: N/A | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Dry Color: Black | Resistance: Withstands Up to 500°F
3. Henkel Corporation Loctite Stik n' Seal - Best for Outdoor Objects
The next item on our list is the Henkel Corporation 1360784 Stik n' Seal adhesive, which has a Flextec formulation that bonds surfaces faster than any ordinary household adhesive. Its low odor, which contributes to a safer work environment, sets this product apart from other glues available on the market.
One of the many reasons why we like this product is because it creates long-lasting bonds even in the most extreme conditions. This adhesive has excellent resistance to harsh weather, moisture, UV rays, and extreme temperatures, making it a reliable product for fixing outdoor objects.
Also, this heat-resistant adhesive seals and repairs almost all materials, including glass, mirror, ceramic, plastic, wood, fabric, concrete, metal, and porous surfaces. It’s also capable of creating a solid bond on wet surfaces.
This adhesive is an excellent option for sealing or repairing wooden frames and other household materials. Besides that, you can use this glue for creating crafts and DIY projects at home because it provides a superior bond that is hard to break.
The one problem we faced when using this glue is that while dispensing it from the applicator, it tends to roll into a glob. This can quickly harden and block the applicator opening, making it tough to use.
The J-B Weld High-Heat 500 Degree Epoxy Glue is a versatile, high-performance adhesive designed for bonding various materials under extreme temperature conditions. Known for its strength, heat resistance, and durability, it has become a top choice for individuals and professionals alike. We put it to the test and evaluated it based on the factors that matter most to users.
The J-B Weld High-Heat 500 Degree Epoxy Glue performs exceptionally well in bonding different materials such as metal, plastic, PVC, wood, concrete, ceramic, tile, and fiberglass. Its strong formula creates a high-tensile-strength bond that withstands temperature fluctuations.
With impressive continuous heat (450°F) and intermittent heat (500°F) resistance, it remains functional under demanding conditions.
The glue requires just an hour to set and about 8 hours to cure fully, providing convenience to users who may want to sand, paint, or drill the coated surface. Its fast curing time and post-curing versatility are standout features.
The only noticeable drawback of the J-B Weld High-Heat 500-Degree Epoxy Glue is that it does not dry clear. Instead, it cures to a machine gray color, possibly affecting the aesthetic of certain applications. However, if appearance is not a primary concern, this issue should not deter users from choosing this high-performing adhesive.
This set of glues from KDGENG is an excellent substitute for welding as it can repair cracked or damaged metals without any blemish. Formulated to create a strong and permanent bond, you can use this adhesive to glue all smooth and clean metal surfaces.
The KDGENG metal repair gel is a premium adhesive that can withstand high temperatures of up to 150 ℃. This glue provides an extremely solid and long-lasting bond when it gets fully cured. Just give it 24 hours, and it will become strong enough to be machined.
Furthermore, this adhesive is easy to use. You just need to mix the two pastes, apply the mixture to a surface, and allow it to dry for a few hours. Note that you must follow the volume ratio of 1:1 for the glue to cure effectively.
Another great aspect of this product is that it can be used for repairing anything made from metals, such as filling in casting defects, cracks in plumbing, or even fuel tank repairs. Overall, this is one of the better metal adhesives on the market today.
It was hard for us to identify a limitation of this product. But in the end, we discovered that this product doesn’t have a scraper to mix the two products and apply it to a surface. The only solution to this is buying or DIYing one.
What We Like
Aging resistance
Waterproof insulation
Easy to use
Suitable for all metal surfaces
What We Don't Like
Scraper not included
Quantity: 2 Tubes | Volume: 3.52oz Each | Set Time: N/A | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Dry Color: Light Gray | Resistance: Withstands Up to 302°F, Resists Aging, Waterproof Insulation
What is the Best Heat-Resistant Glue for Metal?
In this section, we present a detailed analysis of the finest heat-resistant glues tailored for metal applications. The subsequent table outlines a comparative study that focuses on essential characteristics, including Quantity, Volume, Set Time, Cure Time, Dry Color, and Resistance.
Withstands Up to 302°F, Resists Aging, and Waterproof Insulation
Buying Guide for the Best Heat-Resistant Glue for Metal
You might have picked the glue that meets all your requirements by now. If not, then don’t worry. We are far from the finish line. To ensure you end up with the right glue, below are some FAQs and a buyer’s guide that will answer all your doubts about heat-resistant glues.
A. Higher Temperature Resistance
Before buying any metal glue, you need to check its ability to resist breakdown at higher temperatures.
The best heat-resistant adhesives are formulated to resist higher temperatures exceeding 300 ℃. So, it’s best to ensure that the metal glue you buy has the highest heat resistance.
B. Drying Time
Another significant factor you must consider before buying any metal glue is drying time. This will depend on the type of project you are working on, but the faster the drying time, the more efficient the work will be.
C. Exposure to Environmental Elements
You must know that environmental factors might affect the bonded surfaces. Metal glues should stay put if the repaired surface is exposed to dust, water, heat, and other elements. However, some adhesives crack when they are exposed to extreme heat.
For this reason, when choosing the best metal adhesive, it’s essential to keep weather resistance in mind. Any glue that’s not weather-resistant is one you should avoid.
What are heat-resistant adhesives?
Heat-resistant glues are formulated to resist higher temperatures of over 300 ℃. These adhesives are alternatives for welding metals which is a costly as well as a risky process.
Are heat-resistant adhesives durable?
Heat-resistant adhesives are highly durable sealants that retain their strength even when exposed to extreme temperatures. They can also withstand aggressive environments because of their thermo-oxidative stability and their resistance to chemical reactions.
Are hot glue and heat-resistant glue the same?
Hot glue is partially heat-resistant. This means the temperature resistance varies depending on the formulation.
In recent times, the use of various types of epoxies for a wide range of applications has skyrocketed.
Epoxy has become a panacea for all creative quests, from repair to home decor and even art. Since there is such a wide range of uses for epoxy, manufacturers have also started offering different types of epoxy products for other projects. There are all-purpose epoxies, weatherproof epoxy products, heat-resistant epoxy resins, and many more.
J-B WELD HIGHHEAT: A hand mixable two part epoxy putty stick...
CURE AND SET TIME: After kneading the two part formula...
Selecting the correct type of epoxy is not easy, especially for those who are first-time users. This fact is especially true if you are looking for heat-resistant epoxy for your project. There are several factors to be considered. This article will help you learn how to find the right type of heat-resistant epoxy, helping save both your time and effort.
Let us get down to it then!
All About Heat Resistant Epoxy
Is Epoxy Resistant To Heat?
Epoxies are a class of chemicals that includes adhesives, plastics, and other similar materials. Since it is a vast class of compounds, different epoxies come into use in almost every industry.
One of the most common uses of epoxies is as an adhesive, usually in structural and engineering applications.
The most common epoxy resin available on the markets is usually used for DIY projects, such as repair work, art pieces, jewelry making, etc. This standard epoxy is resistant to heat up to a specific temperature and distorts if the temperature rises further.
High-temperature epoxy resins are a different type of product that is specially manufactured to withstand extreme heat. Such epoxies are usually required for applications where high physical strength is needed, as these compounds can withstand high stress without getting distorted.
You can easily find heat-resistant epoxy resins on the market, suitable for DIY projects such as making coasters. These resins can endure a reasonable amount of heat but are not ideal for extremely high temperatures.
How Much Heat Can Epoxy Resin Endure?
The standard epoxy resin available for home projects can withstand temperatures ranging from 150°F to 300°F for a short duration. On the other hand, heat-resistant epoxy can endure extremely high temperatures of up to 600°F. The resistance varies slightly depending on the product and the manufacturer.
What Is A High-Temperature Epoxy Resin?
Heat Resistant Epoxy Resin is a particular type of compound specially manufactured for industrial applications, such as automobiles, aircraft, etc. It is also used for larger projects like coating kitchen countertops to protect them from heat.
Industrial applications include mechanical and electrical repairs, generally in aircraft and automotive industries. Other industries where this epoxy resin is highly usable include communications, marine sectors, industrial control equipment, etc.
High-temperature epoxy resin is also used in structures and composites. In such applications, a bonding agent, sealer, or coating agent is generally used. Therefore, the epoxy needs to be highly durable and long-lasting for such purposes.
Using this epoxy along with a high-temperature surface coat helps create tough, durable, and high-resistant equipment.
Temperature Limits For Epoxy Resin
The standard basic epoxy generally used for DIY projects can withstand low heat temperatures ranging from 68°F to 195°F. If it is subjected to temperatures higher than this, its molecular structure will start to change.
It can assume a rubbery surface instead of its solid glass-like texture. This leads to softening of the epoxy and distortion in its shape. That is why it is highly recommended to use a potholder or coaster on epoxy surfaces to keep articles such as hot beverages.
The situation is entirely different in high-temperature epoxy resin, as it is specially manufactured to withstand temperatures up to 600°F. As mentioned above, this range depends upon the individual product as well as the manufacturer.
Companies generally manufacture high-temperature epoxies with added fillers such as quartz. It is also common to reinforce such epoxy resins with elements like titanium, enabling them to endure extremely high temperatures.
J-B WELD HIGHHEAT: A hand mixable two part epoxy putty stick...
CURE AND SET TIME: After kneading the two part formula...
Benefits Of Using A High-Temperature Epoxy Resin
There are several advantages that a high-temperature epoxy resin offers. It enables applications that are not suitable for regular epoxy. Some of these advantages include:
It is the perfect product for creating incredible designs and finishes for tabletops and countertops.
The epoxy resin is ideal for use on various surfaces in the kitchen, bathroom, table, etc., renovation or restoration.
Stone Coat Epoxy resin is one of the most durable resins and provides excellent durability and strength.
It is also flame retardant, helping prevent fires and slowing down their spread.
One of the best things about this product is that it offers a highly polished finish and an even and flat surface.
The manufacturer has altered the epoxy formula to make it resistant to UV rays as well, making it suitable for surfaces exposed to sunlight.
Finally, the product is food-safe, allowing you to use it conveniently in the kitchen.
There are also high-temperature epoxy resins available that are vegan and cruelty-free.
High-temperature resin epoxies work well with silicone molds and are an excellent option for artwork.
The clear-drying property makes such resins suitable for a wide variety of applications.
Such resins are also highly resistant to chemicals like sulfuric acid, marine environments, humidity, and corrosion.
Disadvantages Of High-Temperature Epoxy
High-temperature epoxy makes it possible to complete extremely high-temperature projects at home. However, there are a few things regarding the product that you should take into account:
The high-temperature epoxy may acquire a yellow tint after curing, making it unsuitable for projects that require a transparent appearance.
In some instances, additional heating methods may be required during the curing process, increasing the overall time to complete the project.
High-temperature epoxy resins are generally more expensive than basic epoxy.
Prolonged use of epoxy can also lead to skin infections and allergies such as dermatitis.
Even a slight deviation from the provided instructions affects the heat resistance capacity of the resin.
Preventing Reduction In Temperature Resistance
There are several methods to reduce the temperature resistance of the epoxy resin. The first thing is to ensure that the mixing ratio is correct, as any change in that can alter the nature of the resin.
Similarly, it is essential to adhere to the manufacturer's instructions, such as the time required for mixing the resin and hardener.
Adding additives such as pigments, colors, or ink automatically reduces the resin's temperature resistance. To prevent this from happening, apply a clear topcoat that will improve the epoxy's heat resistance properties.
Some Useful Tips For Working With Heat Resistant Epoxy Resin
For getting the best results, it is always advisable to follow the manufacturer's instructions as provided with the product. Deviating from the instructions will result in an undesired outcome. Here are some valuable tips to help you through the process:
It is crucial to mix only the amount of resin required for the project to allow enough time for proper application.
Proper preparation is necessary before starting the project, as time is critical during the process.
Using a worktable of the correct height will help avoid back pain while and after working.
Wipe the workspace clean using Isopropyl Alcohol to remove dust particles before starting.
Both the temperature and humidity can have unwanted effects on the final product.
Cold temperatures can cause the product to acquire a sticky or waxy appearance.
Warming the resin before mixing with the hardener can prevent the epoxy from getting a tacky texture in colder temperatures.
While working on a large flat surface, use a trowel or leveling tool to spread the resin evenly.
If using a paintbrush during the process, ensure that it is of good quality to prevent shedding any bristles.
Another option is to use a brush with dark bristles, which will be easier to spot and remove from the mixture.
If the mixture has bubbles, remove them using a toothpick or blowtorch. Hold the blowtorch about 20 cm away to prevent dimpling.
While using a blowtorch, ensure that you start it at some distance away from the project to prevent dust particles from blowing onto it.
If there are any alcohol inks added for coloring the resin, avoid using a blowtorch to remove the bubbles.
Use a blow dryer at the highest heat setting to remove bubbles from colored resins, though this process requires more time to complete.
After completing the project, please leave it to cure in a dust-free place.
Remember that adding pigments or powders to the resin will change the chemical structure of the resin, reducing its toxicity and heat resistance.
Make sure to add a clear topcoat to enhance the heat resistance of the project.
For cleaning up wet epoxy that is leftover, use acetone with a clean cloth.
In case the epoxy has dried up, use a blowtorch to heat it and a flat trowel or screwdriver to scrape it off.
J-B WELD HIGHHEAT: A hand mixable two part epoxy putty stick...
CURE AND SET TIME: After kneading the two part formula...
Best High-Temperature Epoxy To Purchase
The choice of high-temperature epoxy depends on the surface to be coated, and it needs to be able to withstand heavy use and extremely high temperatures. Stone Coat is one of the most popular brands offering an excellent high-temperature epoxy resin.
About Stone Coat Epoxy
The basic epoxy resin commonly used for DIY projects is not suitable for highly high-temperature applications. Stone Coat Epoxy makes it possible to complete such tasks efficiently.
Working With Stone Coat Epoxy Resin
Stone Coat Epoxy Resin is an excellent product for Do It Yourself home projects. To learn how to use it properly, look for step-by-step instructions and video tutorials that will help you through the entire process.
Besides DIY enthusiasts and hobbyists, this product is also convenient for contractors and designers. With this superb product, it is possible to completely renovate old tabletops and countertops, making them more durable and functional.
One point to keep in mind is that the maximum pour depth for each coat is ⅛ inch (3 mm).
Advantages of Stone Coat Epoxy Resin
Stone Coat Epoxy Resin is one of the best high-temperature epoxy resins on the market. Using it offers several benefits, such as:
It helps save money on the renovation of old tabletops and countertops when you take the DIY route.
The entire process of using the product is easily explained through an easy-to-understand training video.
The epoxy resin is entirely environment-safe
It does not contain any VOCs (Volatile Organic Compounds)
Using this product will provide you with a completely scratch-resistant surface, highly durable and easy to clean.
Surfaces where this product is used, such as tabletops and countertops, can withstand temperatures as high as 500°F.
You also get a non-porous surface that is completely clear.
Steps To Follow While Using Stone Coat Epoxy Resin
Here we lay down some steps that are required to be followed while using Stone Coat Epoxy Resin.
Accurately measure the hardener and resin in a 1:1 ratio.
First, mix the compounds thoroughly for the required amount of time, then add colors and additives, followed by the mixing process again.
Use a flat leveling tool and a blowtorch to remove any bubbles after applying the color coat.
Wait for 24 hours after applying the color coat before applying the clear coat.
Use sandpaper to sand down the surface and a wet cloth to wipe away the dust.
It takes around seven days for the project to get completely cured.
Once the surface is ready for use, ensure that you keep it clean and avoid scrubbing.
Final Words
While the basic epoxy resin is good enough for most DIY projects, heat-resistant epoxy is the only solution for extremely high-temperature applications. Generally, these are only used for industrial applications, but some manufacturers such as Stone Coat Epoxy Resin also make them available for home projects.
There are several advantages of using high-temperature epoxy resins, and you get fantastic results if the instructions are correctly followed. High-temperature epoxy resin can help remodel, renovate, and restore old surfaces to give them new life. We recommend using it for all high-temperature DIY projects.
We are signing off now. Be sure to leave a comment below!
Pedro Friedeberg was one of the most famous designers from Mexico, known primarily for his surrealist works that included ancient and religious symbols.
One of his most well-known pieces, the Hand Chair with Foot, became a cultural symbol in the 1960s and 1970s. It was essentially a wooden chair designed in the shape of a hand, with the palm acting as a seat and fingers for the back and sides.
Most experts agree that this is his most groundbreaking artwork to date. On that note, Friedeberg’s hand chairs serve as an excellent furniture piece if you want to add some vintage style to your home décor.
And due to the popularity of this iconic carved unit, you can find similar items from other manufacturers. To help you find the one that best suits your needs, here is a list of some excellent hand chairs for your home.
This hand chair undoubtedly takes inspiration from Pedro Friedeberg’s Hand Chair with Foot and resembles a hand with the palm facing the front. It is made of a solid granite block and has been hand-carved with the utmost skill and care.
According to the seller, this piece was constructed during the 1970s and is still in excellent condition. After all, being built from granite, this chair retains its solid and stately appearance, making it suitable for outdoor use as well.
If you are looking for miniature hand chairs, then this pair of vintage carved hand chairs is a perfect choice. Needless to say, the size makes them ideal for use as children’s chairs, sculptural decorations, or even conversation pieces.
As for the units themselves, these chairs are made of wood, and its origins can be traced back to the late 1970s. And since these are available in a set of two, you can use them as functional seating or just as home décor.
Perhaps one of the best-looking hand chairs on the market, the Silver Hand Chair offers a unique look to your living space. This hand chair was manufactured in the Mexico region during the late 1960s and has retained its excellent quality.
Besides being hand-carved to perfection, it comes with a soft silver finish that sets it apart from similar products on the market. This silver appearance provides an elegant accompaniment to other pieces of furniture and accentuates your living space.
This piece is a hand chair that takes inspiration from Friedeberg’s sculptures, but also creates its separate identity. That said, the fingers that form the chair’s back are narrower and straighter than those on other hand chairs, creating a more sophisticated look.
It is made of hand-carved wood, and even the base has been designed as a shirt cuff with buttons. What’s more, its distinct folksy look provides an edge that sets it apart from other projects by Friedeberg.
5. Carved Walnut Pedro Friedeberg Style Hand Chair
While most hand-foot chairs are not designed with comfort in mind, serving more as decorative fixtures, this Carved Walnut Hand Chair is an exception. It has a more extensive, thicker base than most other hand chairs, allowing you to rest comfortably.
The manufacturer has used high-quality walnut wood to hand-carve it, giving it unique wood grain patterns. As an added tip, you can create a contrasting theme by using this hand chair with a white background.
6. Sculptural Wooden Hand Chair In The Manner of Pedro Friedeberg
One of the hand chairs manufactured in Mexico during the 1960s, this sculptural wooden hand chair is the perfect addition to your furniture collection. Despite being over 60 years old, it still manages to retain its original warm platina. So, if you are a collector looking for a unique product from the 1960s that pays tribute to Friedeberg’s works, this is the one to go with.
7. Pedro Friedeberg Mahogany Wood Hand Chair Surrealist Mid-Century Modern
You’ll be delighted to know that the following product is one of the original pieces from Pedro Friedeberg. It is made from high-quality mahogany wood and is a great piece for decorative purposes.
Despite being a product from the 1980s, it is still in excellent condition and a perfect piece for decorative purposes. Not to mention how the artist’s signature in black ink is still visible at the bottom as a proof of authenticity.
8. Rare Editioned Bronze Hand And Feet Chair By Pedro Friedeberg
This hand and feet chair from the ‘80s is one of the best examples of Pedro Friedeberg’s surrealist works. Instead of a single hand, this chair features two hands and feet joined at the center.
It has a cast of bronze and a design that represents Mexican folklore tradition to perfection. What’s more, it is one of the rarest pieces that survive today, with only nine rare-edition chairs being produced originally. You can also find Friedeberg’s signature on one of the legs.
9. Pedro Friedeberg Style Carved Hand Chair Sculpture
If you are unwilling to spend a hefty sum on getting one of Friedeberg’s original designs, this Carved Hand Chair Sculpture is a great alternative. It is an eye-catching sculpture that will help you accentuate any space effortlessly.
The sculpture is made of premium quality wood and can serve as a great conversation starter. This functional sculpture can also be used for seating purposes, with the fingers serving as back and armrests.
10. Mexican Carved Hand Chair In The Style Of Pedro Friedeberg
Those who are looking for a studio-carved hand chair are sure to love this hand chair. It was crafted in Guadalajara, Jalisco, Mexico, during the 1960s. The chair comes with rich details, such as an intricately carved love line and lifeline. It even has richly detailed fingernails, folds, and joints of the palm.
Additionally, the base is in the form of a two-button cuff with a decorative vine that adds to the beauty of this sculpture. This sculpture is ideal for use in all types of settings, both outdoors as well as indoors.
11. Carved Hand Chair In The Style Of Pedro Friedeberg
This hand chair is an excellent mid-century modern product belonging to the 1970s. Just like the previous product, this one also has some finely crafted details. The fingernails on this hand chair are exceptionally crafted, and it is also made of superb quality wood.
As far as carved furniture is concerned, this is one of the most delicate pieces on the market. It is one of the hand chairs manufactured in Germany and is still one of the most exotic pieces to get.
The Gold Hand Chair is another piece of art from Friedeberg’s original works. It has a wooden base covered with a gold leaf and is a fantastic example of the artist’s skill. It makes for the ideal interior decoration item and is a must-have for collectors of rare sculptures and decorative pieces.
This hand chair comes with a certificate of authenticity signed by the artist. Additionally, you can find the signature at the base of this Pedro Friedeberg hand chair.
Black is the perfect color if you are going for an understated look, and this hand chair in black is especially suited for that purpose. It is available as part of a two-piece set, but you can also purchase only one.
Besides serving as a great showpiece, this chair can also be functionally used for sitting purposes. For areas such as porches, this hand chair in black can help create the perfect look. You can even use this superb hand chair in your living or dining rooms, or out on the porch.
It is much easier to find Friedeberg’s hand chairs than his hand and foot chairs, which is why this carved Mexican walnut hand foot chair is one of the rarest products to find. This chair was produced by Friedeberg in Mexico City during the late 1960s using the best quality walnut lumber.
The walnut wood also provides an excellent appearance to the hand and foot chair. It also comes with a branded signature of Friedeberg at the base of the sculpture.
The Gilt Hand Chair is one of the hand chairs that is made to order by the artist. It is made of wood, with a gold leaf covering for a gilded appearance. Besides making for a stunning piece of artwork, you can also use this hand chair for sitting purposes.
The base of this gilded chair has an unusual flat surface, and the chair is accompanied by Friedeberg’s signature as well as a certificate of authenticity. This chair can be customized according to your preferences, with different colors, materials, and styles.
As the name implies, this iconic hand foot chair is one of the most well-known hand and foot chairs. The sturdy and solid wooden base has a coat of red paint that stands apart from the rest of Friedeberg’s sculptures.
The artist’s signature appears on the thumb of the chair and has also been burned into the chair at the bottom. Unlike most hand and foot chairs This hand foot chair was also manufactured in Mexico and is the perfect symbolization of the 1960s era.
Final Words
With that, we’ve reached the end of our list of the best hand and foot chairs on the market. These hand and foot chairs not only serve as excellent décor pieces but also provide great functionality.
Not to mention how some of them are incredibly rare and very hard to find. For collectors and art enthusiasts, this list might come in handy for finding coveted items. Anyhow, these hand and foot chairs complement all types of settings, both indoors and outdoors.
So, if you are planning to redecorate your home, get a hand and foot chair that suits your style.
Related Links
To carve wood would translate into removing layers of wood in order to obtain a particular shape envisioned, it is the reverse of wax or clay sculpturing, practices in which the material is added and then shaped to generate the desired form, in wood carving material is subtracted.
Carving is a technique known to mankind for thousands of years yet in recent years with the mass produced items the traditional practice of hand carved doors becomes a niche form of art for the enthusiast only. Immense authenticity and originality defines a hand carve item and to emphasize on this sentiment we have curated a selection of brilliantly intricate hand carved doors meant to feed your imagination.
An old door that stood the test of time, it shaped memories exposed through the withered paint on its surface has now been used as a canvas, the tree illustrated brings forward the pure wooden essence of the material in a highly sculptural and graphic form, a piece of art.
Architectural artifacts of the past emphasize the world with such wonders everyday, all around the world the historical city centers showcase exemplary doors towards the past.
Hand carved doors are commonly used by the rustic design line, in contemporaneity they`re commonly envisioned for wooden cabins, rustic chalets often portraying wildlife or the natural habitat in which the construction resides.
Memories of the past, messages and stories infused into wood carved doors that have beautified our existence for centuries and will continue do so for years to come.
Trees sculpt the windows of a hand carved door, a common element, they represent the pure essence of the material, a reverence to it and the surrounding natural environment in which these piece of artwork often reside.
A whimsical entrance that sculpts trees around painted glass, ensemble that seems inspired by the realm of Tolkien, it can emphasize an extraordinary fairy-tale ambiance.
via indulgy.com
Natural stone and wood kept together by iron, a much appreciated recipe from the past.
Wood carving is something unique, intricate, and spectacular, a door of this kind encapsulates the experience of the sculptural in a beautiful piece of art that will change your facade to an extraordinarily beautiful extent. How do you see wood-carved doors and what`s your favorite design from the gallery above? We would love to hear from you!
Saws have been in use for centuries and like everything else, have evolved with the advent of technology!
We're sure your dad's garage will have these tools tucked in somewhere. After all, their functionality has made them akin to a family heirloom.
It isn’t surprising in the least, though, that these saws are often confused. The hack saw and bow saw, in particular, are usually used as substitutes.
Although they are very similar in appearance, they have different cutting needs. With its fine-tooth, the hack saw is mainly meant for cutting metal, whereas the bow saw, with its wide blade, is designed for trimming wood.
We understand how indistinguishable these two saws are and have decided to help you by compiling this guide. Here, you will find everything you need to know about the differences, functions, and advantages of these two types of saws.
So, without further ado, let’s cut to the chase!
Difference Between Hack Saw And Bow Saw
We don’t want to straightaway jump into details without giving you a brief overview of the two saw types. Out here, we have listed their significant differences.
Function
The fundamental difference between the two saws lies in their purpose. The hack saw is used to cut metal, steel, and some plastic materials, as mentioned earlier. Even though it can cut wood, it is not as efficient as the bow saw, which is designed especially for woodwork. It can cut logs, firewood, prune trees, and carve wood as well.
Design
At first glance, the two saws might look very similar. However, their blade types are poles apart. The blades of a hack saw are serrated and small to ensure precision. The bow saw has a coarse wide blade that can cross-cut branches.
Despite their differences, both tools are manually powered, need proper blades, and you are required to follow the same precautions while using them. Furthermore, both these tools have an ergonomic design and are easy to operate and carry around.
Now that we’ve laid out the fundamental differences, it is time to delve individually into these two saws and their features.
What Is A Hack Saw?
The hack saw has a metal frame and comes with a thin blade that is best suited for cutting plastic, steel, and metal. Since these three materials are used almost in every sphere, the hack saw becomes a versatile tool with numerous uses. Not just this, it can also cut wood.
Now, it’s time to talk about the blade. The hack saw can have multiple blade options with different configurations. The TPI or tooth density of the blade ranges from 14 to 32 teeth per inch. It has jagged edges and points forward since the hack saw operates on the principle of pushing stroke instead of pulling stroke.
The material used to make the teeth is vital because it improves the cutting and tooth life. Usually, the teeth are fashioned either out of high-speed steel or high-carbon steel.
If you want to cut large items, aluminum or some other soft metal, you must use the 14 teeth per inch blade. The standard tooth density of the blade for cutting metal is 18. Moreover, a blade with 24 TPI can easily cut steel plates, whereas the 32 TPI blade can cut hollow sections, pieces, and tubes.
Moving on, we must talk more about the hack saw’s distinctive bow-shape, which holds the blade under tension. It is fashioned out of metal, usually steel, and has a strong handle, which comes with pins for attaching the blade. The standard blade has a length that varies between 250mm to 300mm, but if the saw’s frame is adjustable, it allows for various blade lengths.
Understanding The Hack Saw’s Uses
Now that we’ve spoken about the hack saw's blade and frame, it’s time to talk about its uses. It is a handy cutting tool and can be used efficiently for a variety of tasks. We’ve listed examples of a few things that can be cut using this tool:
Electricians and plumbers often use hack saws for cutting plastic conduits as well as plastic pipes.
Can cut stainless steel items like steel pipes, bars, or rods.
This hand-powered tool sizes copper pipes, shortens curtain tracks and helps in roller blind adjustment.
Can also cut wires and cables; since most of these wires have copper or other similar metals, the tool can cut through them with ease.
Before you start working with the hack saw, choose the perfect blade for the task. Moreover, you should securely place it on the frame for safety reasons and smooth operation.
Believe it or not, these tiny steps will make your job much more comfortable. Also, the blade is readily available and can be changed with little to no effort.
The hack saw is an exceptionally efficient and economical tool and can be used in sawing a wide range of materials. Low capital investment is required in their operation, and the tool’s maintenance cost is also low.
Furthermore, it is compact and portable and allows you to do the job at any time and any place.
When trying to make a very detailed cut, a hack saw will give you much more precision than a power saw ever could. You can focus, be slow, and very deliberate.
Frequently Asked Questions About Hack Saws
What Is The Best Way To Use A Hack Saw?
We're sure you think using this tool is pretty simple, but we'll stop you right there because this cutting tool requires perfect focus and accuracy.
The best way is to secure the blade on the frame and point the teeth forward. The blade should be rigid, and you must always cut using long, stable strokes. Also, use the entire length of the blade to get precise results.
How To Maintain A Hack Saw?
The hack saw is made of metal and should always be cleaned and dried after each use. It can also be lightly oiled as a further precaution and frequently inspected to ensure all bolts, nuts, and blades are in proper order.
Furthermore, store the tool in a cool, dry place to avoid rusting.
Why Are Different-Sized Teeth Used For The Blades?
Different-sized teeth offer different levels of cutting power. Larger blades with fewer teeth are better suited for tough materials. For more refined work, we have smaller blades with more teeth.
What Material Is Used For Making The Blades?
Typically, hack saw blades are made of high-speed stainless steel. This is because they are tough and abrasion-resistant. Due to their accuracy, strength, and resistance to breakage, they are used in making tools and cutting blades.
What Are The Different Types Of Hack Saw Frames?
Hack saw frames are usually of two types- solid and adjustable. The solid frame can accommodate only a standard blade length. In the adjustable frame, we can fit varying lengths of the blade.
What Is A Bow Saw?
A bow saw is an ancient tool. It's been used by carpenters forever and there's a good reason for it.
It is a crosscut saw, which comes with a metal frame. It is ideal for woodwork, especially for straight or curved cuts. Unlike the thin hack saw blade, it has a broad blade attached to the handle, far less dense and whose tension can be adjusted using a twisted cord or a turnbuckle.
The blade of this cutting tool is removable as well but is not readily available. This is one reason why the hack saw is often preferred over it. However, some good-quality blades get sharpened easily.
Bow saw usually require two different types of blades-one meant for cutting dry wood and the other for greenwood. Some blades serve both purposes.
The tool has a sturdy frame and usually comes with a knuckle protector. It is easy to cut wood of nearly any size or thickness, and the results will be way more precise than what a hack saw could offer. It can cut firewood, branches, hardwood, and softwood flawlessly. However, the bow saw cannot cut steel or plastic.
Furthermore, unlike the dense TPI of the hack saw blade, the bow saw blade is comparatively less dense. Besides TPI, it also relies on tooth angle to get a precise cut. Ideally, 60 degrees angle can cut hardwood, and 45 degrees angle is recommended for softer woods.
Before we move on to its uses, we’d like to talk about the tool's working mechanism. It needs to be moved back and forth across the surface that needs to be cut, in short, swift strokes.
Understanding The Bow Saw’s Uses
There are many advanced tools available today, but the bow saw’s efficacy and simplicity remain unmatched. Given below are a few examples of things that the bow saw can cut:
Bow saw is often used by carpenters since it can cut through wood quickly. It helps in the construction of chairs, tables, and similar types of furniture.
Moreover, it assists in gardening work. It can easily trim overgrown branches from your plants.
This hand saw can also prune bushes and shrubs with ease.
The cutting tool can saw logs with accuracy.
You can take the bow saw on your camping trips. The wood that is cut using this tool can make a wood stove or a fireplace.
The bow saw is known as the woodworker’s essential tool. So, it is highly unlikely that you won’t be satisfied with the results once you start using it for intricate woodwork.
Besides, they are sturdy and efficient and do your work without wasting any fuel or energy.
It is a man-powered device, and even though working with it is pretty easy, don't get carried away; you must always be vigilant and prioritize safety.
Frequently Asked Questions About Bow Saws
What Is The Best Way To Use A Bow Saw?
The best way to use a bow saw is to secure your hand with cut-resistant gloves and use a pencil and ruler to mark the part that needs cutting.
Once that is done, hold the saw firmly at the right angle and use short rhythmic strokes to cut the wood.
There’s not much to it except precision and experience.
How To Maintain A Bow Saw?
Proper maintenance of the tool will increase its lifespan. Therefore, you must clean the handle and blade, dry it off, and then apply some oil for lubrication. The saw should be stored carefully and preferably hung.
Which Type Of Saw Is Best For Cutting Curves?
Bow saws cut curves quite efficiently and are used in wood carving as well. Besides, circular saws work efficiently too.
What Are The Type Of Blades Found In Bow Saw?
There are two types of blades found in bow saw- peg tooth blades designed to cut hard, dry wood and peg and raker tooth blades that cut through wet wood.
What Are The Types Of Bow Saw Frames?
Steel is the most popular frame material due to its sturdiness, but sometimes wood is used too.
Conclusion
That’s all from us, folks! We hope this guide helped you understand the fundamental differences between hack saws and bow saws. To utilize a saw to its full potential, it is essential to understand what purpose each one serves.
Although both have their unique functions, there is no denying that the hack saw has broader applications. However, unlike the hack saw, which tends to leave hacking marks behind, the bow saw cuts much cleaner.
It is essential to be vigilant while using either of these two saws to avoid any kind of injury. That’s why we’ve given detailed instructions on how to use these tools efficiently.
So, now that you know everything about the two saw types, we hope that you'll get them out of the storage, and start using them very soon.
Rain gutters are an integral part of most homes, especially in areas that receive heavy rainfall. We're here to help you choose the right gutter.
Gutters are not only a necessary means to keep rainwater away from your home. The primary benefit of a gutter is to keep your home safe from water damage; however, there are several other benefits of installing them.
If you have been thinking about installing gutters in your home but are unsure of the right kind, don't worry. We have curated a comprehensive guide to help you learn about the different types of gutters, and finally, pick the right one for your home.
So without further ado, let's get started!
Gutter Types
How Does A Gutter Work?
It doesn't take a genius to figure out how gutters work. Essentially, these handy devices collect rainwater which slides down slanted roofs and channels water into the ground. This is done with the help of the long downspout of the gutter.
Of course, most of the time, gutters help collect much more than rainwater. They also help trap dead leaves, twigs, dust, and other debris. Although they are one of the essential aspects of a home, they are largely ignored during maintenance and installation.
Most homeowners might argue that their homes do not need a gutter; however, its absence can be detrimental.
If you are thinking about buying a new home, consider installing the right gutter on your roof. Without this, your home may end up suffering several types of water damage, flooding, and other conditions.
Without the right gutter system, rainwater will likely collect on your roof, causing mold, rot, and extensive damage. Furthermore, the rainwater that manages to slide down from the roof will end up pooling at the foundation of your home. Again, this leads to several water-related damages and conditions.
Does Your Home Need A Gutter?
Before we dive into the section on the different types of gutters, let us determine whether or not your home could benefit from one. As such, experts recommend installing gutters, as they have plenty of benefits. However, we will let you decide for yourselves.
Here are a few questions to consider which will help you determine whether your future home requires a gutter installation or not:
Does Your Roof Have An Overhang?
Most home roofs are built with an overhang to protect the home from damage. Typically, an overhang should measure at least two feet or more. However, if your new home does not have an overhang or it extends only a few inches, you need to consider installing a gutter.
Without an adequately long overhang, any rainwater that trickles off your roof will likely collect at the foundation of your home. This not only damages the foundation but can also cause severe damage to your basement.
As the rainwater seeps below the surface, the structural integrity of your home is compromised. Over time, it can lead to significant issues for your home and the surrounding area.
Not to mention, the collected rainwater can also damage flowerbeds and other plant life near your home.
Do You Live In An Arid Climate?
You might be wondering why you need to install a gutter in arid climates. Well, consider the fact that most of the moisture and humidity in the area gets naturally evaporated. Moreover, there is very little rainfall, which can cause severe drought-like conditions.
In situations like these, it is beneficial to save as much water as possible. Installing a rain gutter in these climatic conditions can help you trap rainwater, which can be used at a later stage for various applications.
That said, those living in arid climates can consider skipping a gutter installation if they wish.
Does Your Area Receive A Lot Of Rainfall?
Conversely, if you live in a region that experiences heavy rainfall, installing a rain gutter is a must. Without this, you risk damaging your home. Not to mention drenching anyone who happens to walk by your house!
Does The Surrounding Landscape Slope Upwards?
All you need is a basic understanding of gravity to know why it is vital to install a gutter if the surrounding landscape slopes upwards. Suppose your future home is in the middle of or at the bottom of a region where most of the surrounding landscape slopes upwards; rainwater will likely pool near your home during specific periods.
This can cause extensive water damage to your home as well as the surrounding areas. To prevent this, you need to install gutters that will strategically direct rainwater away from your home and deposit it at an adjacent downward-sloping site.
Types Of Gutters
There are dozens of gutter types to choose from. However, the kind of gutter you decide to get for your home does not depend singularly on its aesthetics. Instead, you need to consider its functionality.
In this section, we will talk about the different gutter types. We have divided them into categories based on their shape, the material used to make them, their construction, color, and size.
Based On Shape
K-Style Gutters
We begin the list by introducing you to the most popular type of gutters for homes - K-Style gutters. These gutters have been used in most homes for over 50 years because of their reliability, ease of installation, and functionality.
A fascinating tidbit about this gutter is that they do not get their name because of their resemblance to the letter "K." This is a common misconception which most people have.
In actuality, K-Style gutters get their name from the fact that they are listed as option "K" in the national association, which lists the common types of gutters available.
These gutters are immensely popular due to their aesthetics. It might sound strange to some people, as you don't generally expect gutters to be aesthetic. However, K-Style gutters typically have very decorative fronts and curved designs, making them a relatively aesthetic addition to your home roof.
These gutters are found in various shapes and sizes, giving homeowners plenty of options to choose from. Furthermore, they are said to look similar to crown moldings, which are optional decorative pieces that many homeowners add to their ceilings.
Pros
Aesthetic design
Easy installation
Durable and long-lasting
It can hold more water than other gutter styles
Cons
Susceptible to corrosion
Half-Round Gutters
Moving on to our next style, we want to talk about the half-round gutters. As the name suggests, this gutter style looks like a tube cut in half.
These gutters are the next popular choice after K-style gutters. Although they are not as popular as the previous type, homeowners looking for a functional gutter that isn't overly flashy will appreciate this one.
These gutters are extremely useful in trapping rainwater effectively and channeling it towards the ground. That said, its open style also makes it prone to trapping dead leaves, twigs, and other unwanted debris.
If you opt for half-round gutters, keep in mind that you need to regularly clean and maintain it. We admit it; regular gutter cleaning can be overwhelming, not to mention messy and complicated. We recommend hiring professional gutter cleaners who can come over once in a while to do the job expertly.
Those who have a keen eye for detail may notice half-round gutters featuring in most historic or traditional-style homes. These gutters were immensely popular prior to 1960, after which K-style gutters became the rage.
Pros
Traps rainwater effectively
Adequate space to store large amounts of water
Simplistic style
Customizable options
It can be installed with hidden hangers
Cons
Prone to trapping unnecessary debris
The curved design does not sit flush against boards
Fascia Gutters
If your home does not have a pre-installed fascia board, fascia gutters may be an ideal option. This is because fascia gutters play the dual role of acting as a gutter as well as a fascia board. So, you don't need to worry about separately installing the board if you don't already have one.
Moving on, fascia gutters are immensely popular because of how easy they are to customize. Homeowners who care deeply about personalization tend to opt for fascia gutters. Furthermore, these gutters generally have a sleek and contemporary appearance, making them ideal for modern homes.
A common issue most homeowners face is with their rafter rails. Not only do they compromise the aesthetics of your home, but they also leave space for water or small animals to enter.
Installing a fascia gutter eliminates this issue. Once you install these gutters, the edges of your rafter rails will not be visible. Not just that, the gutter does not leave any space for water or animals to enter, making it safer for your home.
Lastly, fascia gutters are not sold in separate sections like most other gutters. Instead, they come as a long stretch of aluminum that is installed on your roof. Although this makes installation slightly more tricky, not to mention expensive, it produces a robust and seamless bond.
Pros
Seamless design
Easy to customize
Prevents water seepage and damage
Hides rafter rails
Cons
Costly professional installation
European Gutters
If you like the minimalist appeal of half-round gutters but are looking for something a little more decorative or durable, consider European Gutters. These gutters look very similar to half-round gutters but feature an additional lip. The lip protrudes and is distinctly visible, the look of which many homeowners seem to like.
Another distinct feature is its prominent half-round hanger. These features add an extra layer of class and appeal to your traditional gutters, which is why they are a popular choice amongst homeowners.
You can also opt for European gutters made of copper, which are known to age well. These gutters initially have a shiny, distinct appearance when they are first installed; however, as they age, they get a distinctive patina that is visually pleasing.
Another reason to opt for these gutters is their durability. Typically, European gutters have a solid construction and are built with high-endurance materials. This makes them ideal for regions that experience severe rainfall, storms, and wind.
The sturdy construction of European gutters enables them to withstand adverse climatic conditions. They are less likely to suffer damage or get cracked, ripped, or torn in adverse weather conditions.
Finally, if you are tired of little critters building their nests and homes in your gutters, don't fret. The unique design of European gutters makes it tricky for small animals to build their homes, as it does not have the same level of protection as other gutter types.
These gutters also allow more rainwater and debris to flow towards the downspouts. This means that they are less likely to get clogged and require periodic cleaning and maintenance.
Pros
Wider curves allow more water to flow
Less likely to clog
Not ideal for animals to build their homes in
Aesthetically pleasing
Cons
Not conducive with gutter guard systems
Victorian Ogee
As the name suggests, the Victorian Ogee gutter system is inspired by 19th century Victorian gutters. Although the original style of gutters was made of cast iron, modern Victorian Ogee gutters have several other options.
That said, these gutters follow the same style and aesthetics of the original ones, making them ideal for installation in traditional homes.
One of the most significant advantages of these gutters is that they are very low maintenance. You also have several sizes and options to choose from, so you can customize them to fit your home perfectly.
This is especially beneficial for those who are looking to install new gutters into their homes or replace their old ones.
Victorian Ogee gutters are also known as "Old Gothic" gutters. It is evident that they get this name due to their distinctive, old-fashioned, Gothic appearance. If you are a fan of old, Victorian architecture, these gutters can be the ideal addition to your home.
A few essential factors to note about them are that they cannot be bought off the shelf. As such, you need to find the right professional to custom-build them for your home. Furthermore, these gutters are typically shallow, which means that they cannot handle massive downpours.
The gutter style is ideal for small homes or homes built in a region that doesn't experience heavy rainfall. So, those living in arid climates who are fond of old-style, traditional gutters can consider this a perfect addition to their homes.
Based On Material
Aluminum
Aluminum gutters are by far the most common material used for making all types of gutters. The primary reason behind this is that they are lightweight and easy to install. They are also available in different thickness options, giving you the freedom to choose the right one for your home and environment.
Those who care about color coordination will also love the versatility of aluminum gutters. As such, you will find these in several color choices. You can customize them to any size, shape, and color you wish.
Let's not forget, aluminum is extremely affordable and can be easily found in most local hardware shops or online stores. Furthermore, this lightweight material is easy to install, making it ideal for DIYers.
Of course, you can always opt for professional installation services, but even that will not cost you too much.
Aluminum gutters are mostly weather-proof and can withstand all types of climatic and temperature conditions. Furthermore, they are not prone to rust and corrosion, eliminating the need for costly repairs and replacement.
Pros
Availability of colors
Easy to customize and install
Affordable
It does not rust or corrode
Cons
May dent easily
Vinyl
If you thought aluminum gutters were affordable, check out vinyl ones. These gutters typically cost less than aluminum while holding similar properties. They are incredibly lightweight and easy to install, making them very popular for DIY gutter installation.
Another incredible thing about them is that they are available in an array of colors. However, if you don't find the right vinyl gutter for your home, don't worry. You can easily have them painted any color you wish, perfectly matching the aesthetics of your house.
A common issue with aluminum gutters is that they are likely to dent or bend. However, that concern is eliminated with vinyl.
Vinyl gutters are made of very durable plastic that can withstand heavy rainfall, storms, and winds. Moreover, they are not prone to corrosion and rust, which is certainly an advantage you’d like in gutters.
A major advantage of choosing colored vinyl gutters is that they are less prone to showing scratches and marks. In most cases, unpainted vinyl gutters are excellent for those worried about scratches being visible.
Please note that if you opt for painted vinyl gutters, scratches may likely show up on them.
All said and done; there are a couple of things to keep in mind when opting for vinyl gutters. For starters, they are prone to fading when exposed to constant, direct sunlight.
Moreover, ensure that you don't purchase cheaply constructed vinyl, as this will make the gutters prone to sagging with age. They can also get brittle if they are exposed to continual adverse climatic conditions. That said, this is not something you need to worry about if you opt for high quality vinyl.
Finally, vinyl gutters snap together very easily during installation. While you can install these gutters by yourself with ease, we recommend getting professional help.
Pros
Easy to install
Very affordable
Color options available
Anti-rust and corrosion
Cons
May fade with sun exposure
Zinc
Moving on to the next material, you have zinc gutters. Although these gutters will cost you significantly more than aluminum or vinyl, they are incredibly durable, solid, and built to last for at least five decades.
Keep in mind that zinc gutters are likely to last for 50 years with proper care and maintenance; however, their longevity is slightly compromised if you live near the ocean. This is primarily because of salt in the air that affects the integrity of zinc over time. Although they are not ideal for these regions, you may still consider them as an option.
In most cases, zinc gutters also contain small amounts of titanium and copper. Moreover, these gutters are generally left unpainted and do not come in a variety of colors like other gutter materials.
However, this can actually work to your advantage. As zinc ages, it develops a distinct and appealing patina that enhances its aesthetics. Of course, it is essential to stick to regular cleaning and maintenance routines to ensure that it ages well.
You may find zinc gutters featured in high-end or traditional, historic homes. This is primarily because of how reliable and durable the material is and how well it ages. Furthermore, since these gutters can last for decades, they are considered a smart investment.
That said, we must mention that zinc gutters almost always require professional installation. This is because their joints have to be welded using professional tools, and it may be hazardous to attempt doing so on your own without professional help.
Pros
Long-lasting and durable
Aesthetic
It does not rust or warp easily
Ages well and develops a beautiful patina
Cons
Requires professional installation
Copper
The next alternative you can explore for your home gutter is copper. Since these gutters are more expensive than aluminum or vinyl, most people avoid installing them. But look closely, and they do have several advantages of their own.
Installing copper gutters has a set of benefits that are worth the price. For starters, you don't need to worry about painting copper, as it is popular for its natural color and sheen. That said, keep in mind that it develops a slight greenish patina as it ages.
Many people prefer the natural, old-world appeal of aged copper, so this greenish tinge isn't necessarily a bad thing. Moving on, another benefit of installing copper gutters is that they are not prone to mold, mildew, fungus, and rot. Just ensure that they are installed correctly by a professional, and these common conditions will be the least of your worries.
Pros
Ages well
It does not require an additional coat of paint
Sturdy and long-lasting
Not prone to developing mold, mildew, or fungus
Cons
Not the most inexpensive choice
Galvanized Steel
Galvanized steel gutters are made of steel and covered with a thin coating of zinc for extra protection and durability. These gutters have a very simplistic appeal; moreover, their shiny look can make them appear quite classy.
Typically, galvanized steel gutters are solid and can withstand adverse climatic conditions. That being said, we should also mention that this material is slightly more prone to rusting, so it is essential to maintain them well over time.
Furthermore, although these gutters are known for their high endurance and strength, they are prone to minor scratches. Unless you maintain them well, they may get easily damaged due to rust.
Homeowners who plan on installing galvanized steel gutters should be prepared to partake in a regular cleaning and maintenance routine. You can do this yourself or hire professional help. Otherwise, you’ll have to spend on frequent repairs and replacements.
Another vital factor to keep in mind is that it is best to get them professionally installed. Of course, there is no harm in doing it yourself, but incorrect installation can lead to rainwater getting pooled near your home due to improper channeling and drainage issues.
Pros
Aesthetic and stylish
High strength and endurance
Long-lasting
It can be painted over
Cons
Prone to rusting if not maintained and cleaned frequently
Galvalume
If you liked the look and appeal of Galvanized Steel gutters but are looking for an alternative that isn't prone to rust, consider Galvalume gutters. The first thing you need to know about it is its composition.
As you may already know, steel is one of the best options for gutters. This is due to its inherent strength and durability. However, galvalume steel uses a patented coating made of zinc, aluminum, and silicone that enhances its strength and resilience.
Moreover, this patented coating is known for its anti-rust and anti-corrosion properties. The zinc particles also add to its resilience, ensuring that your gutters last for decades without much issue.
Unlike Galvanized Steel gutters, you don't need to worry about the reaction of the material when it is exposed to heavy rain or sunlight. Furthermore, it is relatively easy to customize this material and build the most appropriate gutters for your home.
Pros
Strong and resilient
High endurance to weather conditions
Aesthetic appeal
Easy to customize
Cons
Requires expert installation
Based On Construction
Sectional
As the name tells you, sectional gutters consist of numerous sections that are joined together to build a gutter system for your home. Typically, several sections are taken and trimmed down to fit each other perfectly. The various sections are then joined using connectors.
One of the advantages of sectional gutters is that they can be easily manipulated to fit any home. No matter how long or wide your roof is, sectional gutters can be customized to fit each home perfectly.
Installation of these gutters is extraordinarily straightforward and convenient, and many DIYers do it on their own without professional help. That said, these gutters are prone to leaking if not installed correctly, which is why we recommend hiring an expert.
Pros
Easy installation
Can be cleaned and maintained without hassle
Affordable
Can be customized on the spot
Cons
The connecting portions may cause leaks if not installed correctly
Seamless
The other alternative to sectional gutters is opting for seamless gutters. As you may guess, seamless gutters automatically eliminate the worry of leaks and seeps, thanks to the absence of seams or connectors.
These gutters are typically custom-made to fit each home. As such, they are costlier than sectional gutters but may provide more value over time. Seamless gutters are made of one large piece of material and only have connectors at the corners, joints, and downspouts.
Furthermore, these gutters are typically very strong and are built to last for decades. You can also choose between a plethora of colors. This gives you more flexibility over the final look you wish to achieve.
Pros
Reliable and leak-free
Color options available
Custom-made to fit your home
Sturdy materials used
Cons
Expensive
Based On Size
5-Inch
The most common gutter size you will find on the market is 5-inch gutters. This is most commonly found in K-Style gutters. Fortunately, this gutter size is adequate for most homes as it can easily handle rainfall, leaves, and other debris collected in the gutters.
However, if you live in a region that experiences heavy rainfall, you might need to opt for larger gutters.
That said, if you want to stick to 5-inch gutters for convenience or aesthetics, there is another solution. Opt for wider downspouts which can carry more water away from your home.
6-Inch
6-inch gutters are not the largest size gutters you can opt for. However, these large gutters are often adequate for most homes that cannot make do with 5-inch ones.
You may find 6-inch gutters for most half-round gutters as this size is the most convenient for the shape. If you think you might require more oversized gutters, we recommend speaking to a professional about it.
Several factors like the amount of rainfall you receive, its intensity, and the pitch of your home can determine the correct gutter size. Keep in mind that larger gutters do not always mean better drainage. In fact, opting for gutters that are too large may be detrimental and can affect the aesthetics of your home.
Based On Color
Bold
Unless you live in an HOA that restricts bold gutter colors, you can opt for any color gutter you desire. Keep in mind that certain gutter materials cannot be painted; however, most of them can.
Consider the general color scheme and aesthetics of your home before choosing a bold gutter shade. You can ask an expert about this as they might be in a better position to recommend the right gutter color for your home and personality.
A bold gutter shade can instantly add to the aesthetic appeal of your home, distinctly transforming its appearance.
Neutral
Opting for a neutral gutter shade instead of a bold one doesn't mean you aren't adventurous. In fact, several neutral colors can look better than bold, bright shades. The right neutral tones can instantly add class and appeal to your home, especially if you can complement it well with the rest of your domestic decor.
Gutter Type Buyer's Guide
Now that you know all about the different gutter types, you may be wondering which one to choose. With the availability of options, making the right decision can often be overwhelming.
Fortunately, we have curated a guide to help you choose the right gutter type for your home. Take a look!
Longevity
When choosing the right gutter type for your future home, consider how long you want it to last. If you don't mind replacing it once every few years, you can opt for aluminum or vinyl. These are relatively inexpensive to replace, and you can switch gutter styles if you need to.
However, if you want to make an investment that will last you for decades, consider more durable and reliable materials. Copper and zinc are ideal materials to opt for, while galvalume is also a good option.
In terms of the gutter type, it is best to take professional advice when choosing this. Although you may like the aesthetics of a certain gutter style, it may not be suitable for your home.
Need
You also need to consider whether or not a gutter installation is required for your new home. Those living in arid climates have a choice not to install them. However, if you live in a region that experiences rainfall, we recommend installing one.
We have added a short guide in the section above that will help you determine whether your home requires a gutter or not.
Ease Of Installation
Do you enjoy DIY installations, or do you prefer to leave it to the experts? Either way, it is a vital consideration when choosing the right gutter for your home. Certain gutters call for professional installation, so keep this in mind when selecting them.
Budget
Last but not least, you need to consider a budget when choosing the right gutter for your home. Some gutters are affordable and long-lasting, while others are more of an investment.
Conclusion
With that, we are finally ready to wrap up our guide.
Hopefully, this helped you understand the different gutter types in the market. When choosing the best gutter type for your home roofing, consider its durability, aesthetics, and whether it is suitable for your region and environment.
If you have any further questions, feel free to leave a comment below. Until then, take care!
Centuries ago, chairs were a symbol of class and pride! In fact, the earliest chairs found in Egypt were only used by the highly reputed and wealthy members of society.
Cut to today and chairs are an essential part of our household. Based on comfort and style, there are a plethora of variants to be found. And one of our favorites is the bean bag chair.
These comfy seats can easily become a part of any setup, be it at home or the office. So, having one shouldn’t be only a thought anymore. But what if, instead of rushing to the store, you make one at home?
Yes, you can very well do that! Making a bean bag chair is easier than it sounds. Even if you aren’t a DIY lover per se, try your hands on this one. So, we’ve curated this ultimate guide about making a bean bag chair.
Without further delay, let’s dive in!
Guide To Making A Bean Bag Chair
The history of bean bag chairs dates back to 1969 with their invention by a group of Italian designers. Then called ‘sacco’, these chairs were designed to have a pear shape and were stuffed with thermocol balls. As its popularity grew, designers came up with news shapes and sizes to provide maximum comfort for varied body types.
Manufacturers today rely on washable fabric and eco-friendly filling to ensure a longer life span. Not only can this type of material be cleaned easily, but it’s also more resistant to regular wear and tear. However, in doing so, they don’t overlook the style factor!
Similarly, you can also make a bean bag chair for optimum comfort, that too, without compromising on style. All you need is patience, basic sewing knowledge and some handy materials, mostly lying around the house.
In the following sections, we walk you through the basic steps of making a bean bag chair. But before that, here are the materials that you will need:
Outer fabric
Filling
Scissors (preferably the tailoring ones)
Pencil for marking
Measuring tape
Needles/sewing machine and threads
Zipper (if you want the zipped type)
Material & Filling Preference
When selecting the fabric, make sure that it's durable and feels comfortable on the skin. For this reason, users generally prefer to opt for denim or fleece. Additionally, they also add to the aesthetic appeal of the bean bag chair.
Likewise, the filling should be equal parts comfortable. While you can always opt for polystyrene or polypropylene beans, shredded muslin fabric or old clothes can also be a good alternative. Apart from that, you can also invest in shredded memory foam. Whatever be the filling, it should provide the right amount of support according to your preference.
One way of doing so is adjusting the quantity of filing being stuffed, but don’t choose materials that will form lumps under your body weight.
Steps For Making A Bean Bag Chair
Now that you have an idea about how to select the material, let’s take a look at the steps involved:
Step 1
For the first step, cut two rectangles and two circles of your preferred fabric. The size of these cutouts will depend on the overall size of the bean bag chair. In our case, each of the circles had a circumference of 170 inches, and the rectangles had dimensions of 87 inches x 32 inches.
If you’re not confident about your measurement skills, you can also opt for a sewing pattern with the required dimensions.
Step 2
Place the two rectangles in a way that the corresponding sides face each other. Line the edges as perfectly as possible and secure them with pins. Once done, begin sewing with one of the shorter ends. The resultant fabric should be a rectangle with three open sides.
The important thing to keep in mind here is that while lining the sides, make sure that the right or ‘pretty’ sides of the fabric are facing each other.
Step 3
Next, take a circle and pin its edge to one of the longer sides of the sewed rectangle. Here again, ensure that the right sides of the two fabrics are facing each other, and start sewing. For best results, try to keep the seam allowance between a quarter and half an inch. However, in case of heavier fabrics, the seam allowance should be larger than that.
After sewing the entire circle along the rectangle’s long side, sew the shorter ends of the rectangle together.
Step 4
Similar to step 3, take the second circle and line it with the other long end of the rectangle. This will form the base of your bean bag chair. But this time, don’t sew it all through the edge. Leave sufficient room for the filling to go inside the chair.
While you may also sew this opening after filling the bean bag, we’d recommend installing a zipper here. This will make it easier to replace the filling as and when required.
Step 5
In case you’re adding a zipper, secure the zipper with pins on the open edges of the chair’s bottom and zip it shut. Then unzip it to about a finger’s length. Don’t open all the way through. Take one side at a time, and begin sewing. As you move forward, continue unzipping the zipper a little bit at a time until all of it is sewn in place.
Since all the fabric has been stitched with the pretty sides facing inside, put your hand through the zipper, hold the fabric and bring it out. This will put the right side on display. Then add the filling of your choice and shut the zipper.
Your bean bag is ready!
Some Important Tips
Before we leave you to make the necessary preparations, here are some words of advise that will make the entire process even more convenient:
Try to get hold of a sewing machine for faster and more accurate sewing.
To make perfect circles without a sewing pattern, take a pen and tie a string to its nip. The length should be the radius of the desired circle. On the open end of the string, secure a chalk or marker. Place the pen in the center of the fabric, and hold the string taut. Move the chalk around to complete a full circle.
By following the above steps, you can also stitch an insert bag. In that case, make sure that it's smaller than the bean bag.
Final Words
That wasn't too difficult, was it?
With basic sewing skills, making a bean bag chair won’t be the most challenging job. So, start practicing! After all, there’s a certain charm about handmade furniture.
On that note, it’s time for us to say goodbye. Hope you had as much fun reading this guide as we had putting it together. We’d love to hear from you in the comments down below.
The natural habitat has a tendency of slipping in into our concrete lives in one way or another despite our attempts to surround ourselves with artificial materials. Our roots and ancestry lead us back to the heaven nature offers and depicts and we slowly but steady start to re invite greenery indoors. Today we are talking about tips and tricks of growing olive trees indoors, a specimen that has gained huge popularity over the recent years do to its high dry air and soil tolerance and extreme adaptability to any home environment, making it a very beautiful and delicate house plant. In their natural habitat, the olive trees thrive at heights of 20 ft(6 m) but indoors space will limit yours at about 6ft tall(1.8 m), pruning keeping the plant under your control in a compact beautiful shape. The gray green leaves infuse a delicate Mediterranean atmosphere to your home, suitable to Scandinavian decors, modern ones or classical alike. Small white flowers will complete the perfect magic of the olive tree in summer, followed by its delicious fruit we all love so much and appreciate.
Guide To Growing Olive Trees Indoors
Pruning Tips and tricks
Maintaining your olive tree compact and perfectly arranged uses the pruning technique used in the maintaining of all fruit trees. You have to use a pair of sharp pruners to cut the stem at a 45° angle, 1/4-inch above a leaf node (where a leaf attaches to a stem). As a result, the tree will branch right below the cut, thus thickening the tree's crown.
Each spring new growth appears moment when you are supposed to prune the tree again to obtain a beautiful shape and keep the plant itself healthy.
Re-potting the plant should be done in spring season in pots that allow a proper drainage of the soil. Too much water in the soil will result in root rotting and plants dying.
Useful facts about olive trees
Origin: Mediterranean region
Height: the olive tree can reach up to 10 ft (3 m) when grown in a container. If you leave in an apartment you can opt for a dwarf variety that can reach up to 6 ft (1.8 m).Use the pruning technique to keep the tree's crown compact or opt to shape the olive tree drastically to obtain an olive bonsai.
Light: The olive tree prefers full sun so make sure to rotate the plant to obtain an even growth on each side and to allow the plant to get as much sun as possible all around.
Water: During spring season the olive tree is in the growth phase.Make sure you water thoroughly and allow the the top 5 cm of soil to dry out between watering. During the winter season when the plant stagnates and is dormant water rarely.
Humidity: The olive tree can resist very dry environments.
Temperature: Opt for an average to warm 65-75°F/18-24°C temperature. You can keep your tree under the summer sun without problems and It will tolerate a minimum of 40°F/4°C during winter.
Soil: You can choose a cactus soil mix which is high in sand, highly draining.
Fertilizer: Apply every 2 weeks in spring and summer with a balanced liquid fertilizer diluted by half.
Propagation: You can grow an olive tree from seeds or you can try to propagate through stem although it it fairly difficult. During spring take stem tip cuttings, dip cut end in hormone rooting powder and place in moist potting mix.
Now that we have found out a few tips and tricks on how to grow an olive tree indoors, lets delight our senses with the delicacy and splendor an olive tree brings in your abode. Enjoy!
An airy neutral interior design will accept and claim an olive tree beautifully.
Galvanized buckets and the olive green will make a wonderful contrast, delicate in its beauty.
Dark stained wood nestling life in this serene decor.
Pastel tones and old plants illustrations are completed with a wicker basket containing the delicate olive tree.
An olive tree placed near your bed will freshen up the atmosphere.
Dress up your olive tree pot in a white cloth sack.
A stone pot for a tiny bonsai olive tree.
An olive tree will complement a modern minimal approach to interior design.
Create a composition out of your relaxation spot by including an olive tree.
Neutral tones can be balanced with an olive tree tone.
Bring to life a dull corner.
An all black and white decor deserves a subtle color insertion.
Coppery or gold tones complement the olives.
Wicker, natural fibers, discreet gold hues and an olive tree to complete the design.
Green tones and grey hues match each other with grace.
The real Mediterranean vibe brought in a home.
Fresh Scandinavian interior decor hosting greenery and life.
Weathered wood with incredible texture loves the addition of delicate olive green.
Exposed concrete walls and floor allowing the furniture and decorations speak for themselves.
You could even create an olive corner with various sized plants.
Notice how beautiful the contrast between the stone pot and the olive tree leaves is.
Have we made you curious about this exotic plant? Feel free to share your thoughts in the comment section below.
Curious to know more about the popular Guardian Protection Home Security? Could it be the right choice for you and your family?
Well, these questions will take some time to answer as this home security system has numerous features and benefits. After going through its excellent customer feedback, we were intrigued to find out what the hype was all about.
Is this home security system apt for everyone to use, or does it cater to specific target audiences? What are the benefits it offers, and do they outweigh its flaws? We are here to discuss these questions through our in-depth review.
Of course, our review and guide aren't based solely on customer reviews and our research. We also tested it out for two weeks before coming to a conclusion. We understand how vital home security is to you and want to introduce only the best system for your family's safety.
So, sit back, and let us tell you all about our findings.
Guardian Protection Home Security Review
About the Brand
Guardian Protection strives to make life just a little easier for you by giving you one less thing to worry about - your family's safety. The company prides in its customized approach to each customer, providing personalized solutions from their experts. With 24/7 monitoring, rest assured that Guardian Protection is working hard for your security, even when you are sleeping.
The company was founded in 1950 in Pittsburgh, providing security to jewelry stores. Within the next two decades, its popularity shot up, making its way up to the Inc 500 list of the fastest-growing companies in America.
As they improved their technologies and customer service, it was not surprising to see them rising through the ranks. From featuring in the list of the top 100 security system companies in SDM Magazines to receiving the Monitoring Center of the Year Award in 2015 and 2022.
Currently, Guardian Protection is the largest privately-held security company with over 1,000 employees and 265,000 satisfied customers.
Pricing And Standout Features
Guardian Protection strives to create packages for everybody - whether you live alone, with your family, travel frequently, or need security for your business. Moreover, you can customize the packages to fit your specific needs.
Here is a breakdown of the basic packages:
Standard Package - $34.95/mo
Essential Package - $49.99/mo
Premium Package - $499 upfront
Features Offered
Guardian offers several features that equip homeowners and business owners to keep a strict eye on overall security and safety. These features and technology have been developed to create a seamless integration with your smartphones and other smart devices. While their smart home security systems are relatively standard (and slightly expensive), there are a few which we really liked.
Wireless Systems
Almost everything we own is now wireless - from our phones to speakers, charging devices, computers, and even our home security. All of Guardian Protection's systems and features are wireless. No drilling into walls, no messy wires, and no opportunity for criminals to cut the cords.
Tamper-Proof Sensors
A relatively small but essential feature introduced by Guardian Protection is their Tamper-Proof sensors. These sensors immediately set off alerts if anyone tries to disable them. It will alert you discreetly about an invader trying to tamper with your systems so that you can take immediate action.
24/7 Professional Monitoring
This is probably the most important feature you can have on your home security system. The 24/7 professional monitoring keeps your home security system connected to their servers and monitoring centers. In case of any emergency, the agents are immediately notified and can take action within seconds.
Touchscreen Controls
Built to look and function like a tablet, the Guardian IQ2 Touchscreen Control Keypad is a great feature. The built-in panic button, weather display, and picture snap features are highly coveted and loved by customers.
The Different Systems & Equipment
Now that you know a little bit about the standout features offered by Guardian Protection, you're probably curious to find out more. Well, let us tell you about the different systems they offer, along with their advanced equipment and technology.
Smartphone & Device Control
An excellent feature offered by Guardian Protection includes their smartphone and device control system. With a simple setup process, your home security system will be synced with your smartphone, computer, laptop, and other devices such as your smartwatch, tablet, etc.
You can efficiently set up customized security features and alerts for your home security system. The integrated systems allow you to keep track of your home security, no matter where you are in the world.
Moreover, the Smart Home Automation system allows you to keep track of all your passwords, schedules, alerts, reminders, and much more. A simple push of a button or a swipe on your screen can control all the features no matter how far away you are.
Indoor Wi-Fi Cameras With Night Vision
Do you spend a lot of time away from your home? Or maybe you're planning a long trip and need to keep an eye on your property. The indoor wireless camera with night vision will equip you to do that effortlessly.
The night vision cameras work beautifully to provide crystal clear video images that you can watch on your devices' screen. Furthermore, the video footage is recorded so you can go over it any other time.
Geo-Services
Want to arm or disarm your system, but you're still far from home? Or maybe you need to turn off the lights at home, which you forgot to do on the way out? With the Geo-Services system, you can.
Control all your home security as well as home command features right from your smartphone, no matter where you are located. Moreover, you can draw a virtual fence around your property and arm certain security features while you're away, just for added protection. With the geo-services system, the security systems can get activated or deactivated based on your smartphone's location.
Video Analytics
Wondering what that pesky creature is that's chewing up your shrubs when you're not home? Are you suspicious that a stranger is walking around your property or trying to enter in your absence? With the outdoor camera system, you can watch exactly what's going on when you're not around.
It not only detects any movement but also records it in crystal clear quality. Moreover, the night vision feature does the same - even in the absence of daylight or artificial lights.
Mobile Alerts
One of the most advanced and popular security features offered is the Mobile Alert system. Customers can personalize their home security system and sync it up with their smartphones.
You can now receive immediate alerts on your mobile phone in case of any alarms, sensors going off, or any other emergency. It allows you to act on the spot without wasting a second, increasing safety and security for your home.
Guardian Protection Equipment
Depending on the kind of package you decide to purchase, you will be given some of the best, most advanced equipment to facilitate your home security.
The standard equipment includes the following:
Fire/medical security
Geo-Service
Mobile arm/disarm
Smash & crash protection
Text & email alerts
24/7 monitoring
Along with these, you can also get additional security equipment, as mentioned below. All these features and equipment add to the safety and security of your family or business.
110-dB Siren
Carbon Monoxide Sensor
Guardian IQ2 Panel
Room Temp Sensor
Smart Door Lock
Smart Garage Door Opener
Smart Thermostat
Video Doorbell
Smoke & Heat Detector
Indoor Camera
Outdoor Camera
Glass-Break Detector
Now that you can see the impressive list of systems and equipment offered to you by Guardian Protection, you can pick out the ones you might need the most. However, keep in mind that while the immense selection is great, it can also turn out to be quite costly if you're not careful.
To keep things within a budget, it is crucial to make a list of all your requirements first, and your budget, and then pick and choose from the options. Get the best home security you need without burning a hole through your pocket.
Why Buy This Product?
Hopefully, the exhaustive list we created above helps you decide what kind of features and security systems would best fit into your needs. One of the best things about Guardian Protection is the fact that every customer has the luxury of personalizing their security systems.
This gives you the freedom to choose what you want and leave the rest and gives you control over your budget. Now that you know what kind of features and equipment to expect, here are some compelling reasons why we think you should buy this product.
Professional Installation
While the installation process is not free of charge ($99), the entire process was extremely professional and effortless. A Guardian technician is sent over to your home within a few days after you subscribe to their home security system. Each technician is highly trained and an expert at their job, so you can rest assured that you will receive top-quality service and products.
The installation process itself is relatively quick and does not require any intervention from your end. The expert professionals will complete the installation process in no time, making your home safe and ready.
Excellent Customer Service
One of the most important aspects of any home security system is its customer service. What good is home security if you cannot get in touch with their executives any time you require help?
Fortunately, the Guardian Protection team is always ready to help you. They provide reliable 24/7 customer service, which is prompt, accessible, and available at all times. That being said, if you are someone who enjoys the DIY approach, you might find their service slightly lacking.
While their customer support is impeccable, they don't have much in terms of How-To articles, troubleshooting guides, or tips on how you can work your way around the system independently. Of course, this isn't much of an issue when you weigh it against their prompt and reliable service.
Guarantees
Another compelling reason why we think you should buy Guardian Protection is the generous guarantees they offer. Surprisingly, you won't find many competitor brands in the market that provide the same guarantees as Guardian.
One of the guarantees offered by them is a $500 cover for your insurance deductible, in case you have a break-in into your home or office while their services are armed and monitored.
We especially like their Home Relocation Guarantee, which promises you a free installation and setup in case you decide to move to a new home (and continue subscribing to their home security services).
If you don't have your own home and frequently rent and change residences, you will appreciate this guarantee. Of course, it is advisable to speak to their customer service representatives to get details on the guarantees and services.
Long-Lasting Equipment
When purchasing a home security system, it's obvious that you want it to last you for years to come. Guardian Protection has built all its systems and equipment, keeping this in mind. Not only are their products durable and long-lasting, but their services are also easy to use and accessible.
One of our favorite features was the IQ2 touchscreen controls, which allowed us to arm or disarm our home security system using easy touchscreen controls. Along with that, we also loved the Home Automation features, which were excellent for day-to-day use in and outside our homes.
Never again will you suffer the consequences of your absent-mindedness! With easy controls on your smartphone or tablet, you can control all the switches and alarms of your home - even when you're away.
Wallet-Friendly Options
We understand if you are one who prefers functioning on a budget. Not everyone has extravagant funds that they can spend on lavish home security. Guardian Protection earned our respect with their customizable options and budget-friendly subscriptions. Of course, if you can afford to pay a higher amount for increased security, you can always change your subscription details.
The entire process is easy, and you will be guided by their brilliant customer service team at all steps.
What Could've Been Better?
After going through our extensive review, you surely won't be surprised to know that Guardian Security is the largest privately-held security company amongst competitors. That being said, we understand that nothing comes without its flaws - and so does Guardian Protection.
We had a few bones to pick, the first being that they don't have any options to purchase their security systems online. To do this, we had to speak to a customer service representative. Now, this wasn't a terrible experience; in fact, it was the opposite. However, we would've liked to have the option to do it online.
The second issue we had was that their website did not contain any informational articles, guides, or troubleshooting options to have a DIY experience. Again, we appreciate the fact that their impeccable customer service provided us with assistance at any point during the day or night. For some customers, the absence of DIY options could be a turn-off.
Lastly, we noticed that although their 24/7 monitoring and response team were very prompt, they took a few seconds more than competitor companies did. If we were to make a comparative study, we would mention this as an issue, but otherwise, it seems fair.
Pros
Excellent customer support
Long-lasting, durable equipment
Budget-friendly as well as lavish security options
Generous guarantees
Advanced Guardian IQ2 Touchscreen Control Keypad system
Cons
Cannot purchase their system online
Lack of informational articles and guides
Guardian Protection Home Security Buyer’s Guide
We hope we have answered most of your questions regarding Guardian Protection Home Security. We have almost come to the end of our guide, but before we leave, we would like to tell you a few factors you should consider before buying a home security system.
Professional Monitoring
When looking for a home security system, it is crucial to purchase one that provides 24/7 professional monitoring. While self-monitoring is always an option, it is not a feasible one. The reason you would buy home security is so you can rest assured that your home is safe when you are away.
If you need to monitor your home every few hours, it eliminates the entire point of opting for additional security.
Budget
We acknowledge that most people need to run their lives on a budget. Unless you have set aside a substantial amount of money for home security, you're probably looking for budget options in the market.
It is important to go through all the features, equipment, and systems with a fine-tooth comb. You can opt-out of anything which you feel you don't require in your home. Additionally, you can add a few more features or systems if you think it is necessary. Have a budget in mind beforehand, so you don't end up spending an exorbitant amount.
Complete Smart Home Setup
Most people have made the wise choice to switch to smart home devices. These not only make our lives easier but are also necessary in terms of home security and protection.
When choosing the best home security system, opt for one which offers a complete smart home setup. You should be able to sync all your smart devices to your security system so you can control everything with the touch of a button - no matter where you are located.
Customer Service That Just Keeps On Giving
Customer service is arguably one of the most important aspects of any purchase. So when it comes to your home security, make sure you pick one that customers have reviewed to have excellent customer service.
You should personally have a chat with their customer support team, so you have a fair idea about how they function. When you are in need of help, you should be able to rely on their excellent customer support team.
Guardian Protection Home Security FAQ
Is There A Contract Involved?
Yes. Guardian Protection Home Security offers various contracts which last from 36-months to 5-years, depending on customer needs. Surprisingly, their contracts last longer than contract lengths provided by most of their competitors.
Is There Any Money Back Guarantee?
No, there is no money-back guarantee. However, as we mentioned earlier, there is a $500 cover toward your insurance deductible, which they offer in case your home gets broken into while their systems are active and monitoring your home.
How Can You Cancel Guardian Protection Home Security?
If you wish to terminate your contract with Guardian Protection Home Security, you can do so by getting in touch with their customer service representatives. They are available 24/7 over the phone, and it is effortless to get in touch with them for any assistance you require.
That being said, we should mention that their cancellation policy is pretty strict. Typically, customers are locked into a minimum one-year contract. In case you wish to cancel your security system, you will be obliged to pay termination fees, which might be a little high. It makes more sense to wait and complete your contract with them.
Are Their Systems Wireless?
Yes, all of Guardian Protection’s systems are wireless. You don’t need to worry about drilling into your walls, dealing with messy cords and wires, or even the risk of criminals cutting the cables to your security system.
What Are Their Response Times?
Unfortunately, this is an area where we think Guardian could do with some improvement. Although their response time is less than 60 seconds, which is excellent, it is still slower than industry standards.
What Are Their Video Capabilities Like?
Guardian Protection offers both indoor wireless video cameras as well as outdoor ones. Moreover, they are equipped with night vision so that they provide you with crystal clear, color images and videos even during the night.
However, they offer just one indoor and one outdoor camera. If you wish to equip more in your home or office, you will have to purchase additional equipment from their company.
Is There A Self-Monitoring Option?
Unfortunately, no. The only monitoring options they have are their excellent 24/7 monitoring systems, watched over closely by reliable professionals. Although there is no self-monitoring option, we must point out that their remote monitoring was impeccable and had no system flaws.
Do They Offer Professional Installation?
Yes. Guardian Protection offers professional installation services that are prompt, reliable, and inexpensive. You have to pay a one-time fee, which will cost you $99. With their Home Relocation Guarantee, you will enjoy the benefit of free installation and setup if you decide to move homes.
What Is The 7-Day Orientation Period?
Guardian understands that it often takes a few days for homeowners to get comfortable with their new security systems. Keeping this in mind, they have developed the 7-day orientation mode, which allows you to get comfortable with your new system’s functions and features. During this period, you don’t need to worry about any false alarms and related fines.
Once you feel comfortable enough to turn off the orientation mode, the home security system will work as expected. They will be obliged to alert emergency responders in case of any emergency.
However, keep in mind that Guardian will alert the emergency responders in case you have monitored smoke or carbon monoxide detectors. This will be done regardless of your orientation mode being turned on or off.
Guardian Protection Home Security Verdict
We understand how important home security is, and so does Guardian Protection.
Their systems have been designed by experts who have their own families and understand the ever-present need for safety and security. Keeping affordability in mind, they have created various systems and subscriptions which are apt for all kinds of buyers.
After using their home security system, we were pleased with the overall performance. Even the slight flaws they had did not outweigh the tremendous benefits we enjoyed from their security system. As such, we believe that Guardian Protection is an excellent choice for most people.
This brings us to the end of our guide. Until next time, stay safe!
Isn’t it heartbreaking to see stains and dirt collecting around your bathroom tiles and on your favorite tabletop? Today we are telling you how to prevent it.
Bathroom tiles becoming slippery and kitchen countertops getting stained is nothing new to homeowners. But it is necessary that you know how to protect these beautiful accessories that you have installed in your house.
Today, we are going to take you through the 7 best grout sealers that can help you tackle the problem. In this guide, we are going to discuss the products in detail, along with their respective pros and cons. We also have a buyer’s guide at the end to help you better understand what to buy.
So, without any further delay, let’s dive right in!
Listed below are the Best Grout Sealers For Shower:
Aqua Mix Sealer: The Aqua Mix Sealer's Choice 30882-4 is exceptionally user-friendly and quick drying, this Sealer's Choice is food-safe for kitchen application, despite requiring multiple coats due to thin consistency.
Black Diamond Stoneworks: The Black Diamond Stoneworks NG-PT Granite Sealer is noted for its versatile surface compatibility and compact spray bottle design. Dark granites may show a cloudy residue post-application.
Miracle Sealants 511QT6: The Miracle Sealants 511QT6 Sealer offers deep, long-lasting protection across broad surfaces and boasts a slip-resistant feature, albeit at a higher cost.
StoneTech: The StoneTech CECOMINOD080896 Heavy Duty Grout Sealer distinguishes itself as a multi-surface non-acidic sealer that provides a natural look after drying. It is less ideal for larger areas due to its coverage limitation.
Miracle Sealants GRTSLRAEROCS: The Miracle Sealants GRTSLRAEROCS Grout Aerosol Spray is praised for its swift, invisible protection across a diverse range of surfaces. Its packaging quality is an area highlighted for improvement.
1. Aqua Mix Sealer's Choice 30882-4
For anyone who is looking for a water-based formula that is perfectly suited for sanded grout, the Aqua Mix Sealer's Choice is an excellent option. It is super-convenient to use and delivers a crystal-clear look once it dries up.
To know more about the product, keep reading!For us the most important thing is the ease of use and this item aces it. It can be used by amateurs and professionals alike without any prior knowledge. Even if you have not used it before, you can use it to seal grout without much hassle.
Moreover, you can use this formula anywhere you need to without having to worry at all. It sinks deep into the grout but ensures that it does not get discolored. Nobody likes formulas that are acidic and risk discoloring the grout.
The formula is also food safe, and thus you can use it in any place you please, even in the kitchen, without the risk of poisoning. Also, the mixture dries up and cures pretty fast. In less than 48 hours, it delivers a clean and almost natural look. It is an excellent choice if you are looking for fast results.
After using this product a few times, we can say that there are hardly any complaints that we can make about the result it delivers. However, we have to tell you that the formula is a little thin, and you will have to put a few coats to get the desired result.
What We Like
It can be used by everybody
Safe around edibles
It does not discolor the grout
It dries up quite fast
What We Don't Like
The product is a little thin
Suitable Surfaces: Sanded Grout | Dimensions: 5.5 x 2.5 x 7.8 inches | Weight: 2 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
2. Black Diamond Stoneworks NG-PT Granite Sealer
The Black Diamond Stoneworks NG-PT Granite Sealer is a blessing for all looking for a formula that is more than a grout sealer. In case you are working on a project where different kinds of hard surfaces need protection, it is a multipurpose sealant like this one can come to your aid.
The bottle in which the product is packaged is extremely convenient to use and very portable. It is a 16 ounces spray bottle that is quite compact and very suitable if you need to get light touch-ups or work on small projects.
Furthermore, what makes it multi-purpose is the non-toxic and non-corrosive formula. Because of this, you do not have to restrict yourself to using it on just grout. You can very well use it on granite, cement, or other kinds of stones that might need surface protection.
On top of that, the fact that it is food safe makes it suitable for kitchen tops. You can add that extra layer of protection to your kitchen granite to prevent scratches and also make it skid-proof. Additionally, the application is very simple: just use the sprayer on the desired area and wipe off the excess formula.
Some users have complained that it leaves a cloudy trail when used on dark-colored granites. This is not new to grout and granite sealers. However, to prevent such a problem, we suggest that you spray the product on a small area of the granite or the grout before using it on the entire area.
What We Like
Great packaging
It can be used on multiple surfaces
Prevents scratches
Very simple to use
What We Don't Like
It makes the stone look a little cloudy
Suitable Surfaces: Granite, Cement, Stones | Dimensions: 4 x 2 x 8 inches | Weight: 1.2 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
3. Miracle Sealants 511QT6 Sealer
Next up on our list, we have the Miracle Sealants 511QT6 Sealer. This is quite different from the regular formulas that are available on the market. It takes the grout depth into consideration and seeps deep within to provide more extended protection to the grout and the surrounding tiles.
What really stood out for us about this product is the long-lasting protection that it provides. This sealer is a solvent-based formula that goes deep into the grout layer and thus provides longer-lasting protection from decay and damage.
It is most suitable to be used in areas that become slippery due to regular water usage. Because of the slip-resistant finish, it provides the tiles, you and your kids can play in the rooms too without fearing a fall.
Moreover, it can also help you to reduce the time and energy that you spend on cleaning. It deposits a protective coating on the grout and the surrounding tiles, thereby reducing the chance of them catching stains. With this, your tiles will look brand new for a very long time.
Well, we have been using this product for a while now, and we must say we’re pleased with the performance. However, we need to mention that it is a little pricey as compared to the standard ones available on the market. But the result it delivers is totally worth the price.
What We Like
Provides long-lasting protection
Prevents slipping
Protects from stains
Quite easy to use
What We Don't Like
A little pricey
Suitable Surfaces: Tiles | Dimensions: 7 x 3 x 4 inches | Weight: 1.75 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
4. StoneTech CECOMINOD080896 Heavy Duty Grout Sealer
The StoneTech Heavy Duty Grout Sealer is quite a popular name on the market because of the versatility it provides to the users. You can even try it on marble, and it will show no discoloration. The formula is non-acidic and can be safely used on a range of surfaces without you having to worry that it will damage them.
If you are worried about water or oil-based stains, this product can completely take care of that. One coat of this on your tiles and they will be resistant to stains and water spots for a very long period of time.
However, it is the versatility that this item offers which caught our attention in the first place. It is fit to give protection to grout and other varieties of stones such as granite, marble, ceramic, and the likes.
Moreover, its water-based formula is highly effective when it comes to protecting the grout against any form of stains caused by water or oil. It provides solid protective layers against stains, thereby reducing the effort that you have to otherwise put into cleaning them.
Additionally, once it dries up, it delivers a very natural look. When put on granite or grout, it does not make it cloudy or give it a bulky appearance. Your guests won't be able to really tell that you have applied a sealer!
The only glitch with this item is that it has a relatively smaller coverage in comparison to the other sealers that are out there. It can only cover 1,000 square feet of area and thus becomes quite unsuitable for commercial purposes. However, if you have a small bathroom or a residential area, the quantity is quite sufficient.
What We Like
Highly versatile
Increases the durability of the tiles and grout
Helps to prevent stains
Dries up quite fast
What We Don't Like
Quantity is less is used for commercial projects
Suitable Surfaces: Granite, Marble, Ceramic, Various Stones | Dimensions: 7.95 x 4.65 x 2.56 inches | Weight: 2 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
Looking for a fast and effective way to seal grout? The Miracle Sealants GRTSLRAEROCS Grout Aerosol Spray is here to your rescue. This item is unique in its capacity of providing an invisible layer of coating to your tiles and grout. Thereby keeping decay and stains away for a long time.
This item will totally eliminate the need to buy multiple sealers that you end up purchasing for different surfaces in your home.
You can use this indoors or outdoors, on new and old grout, and on a variety of hard surfaces and stones. The formula is designed to give protective layering to all such surfaces.
Moreover, the way this item is designed, the application becomes very convenient. It comes in a 15-ounce spray bottle that helps to keep consistent pressure to ensure that you get equal and even coverage.
You do not need any separate tool to apply the solution and can directly spray it from the bottle.
Additionally, we have to say that we were quite impressed with the coverage that such a compact sealer sprayer provides. It can easily cover 250 linear sq feet of area without much trouble, and that, too, provides an even coating.
The best thing is that it penetrates the grout layer quite fast and seals it for a good amount of time.
After using the item, we have no complaints about its performance. However, it would have been better if it was packaged well. The box it arrived in was not very sturdy, and there was a chance that the liquid could have spilled.
What We Like
Can be used on a variety of stones
Very easy application
Impressive coverage
Cures and dries up quite fast
What We Don't Like
Packaging can be better
Suitable Surfaces: Hard Surfaces | Dimensions: 10 x 2 x 5 inches | Weight: 1 pound | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
6. Tuff Duck Granite Sealer
We have almost reached the end of the list, and next up, we have the Tuff Duck Granite Sealer. We were quite impressed by the sheer strength that this sealer exudes. It creates a protective layer to prevent porous stones and grouts from catching stains and getting damaged.If you are working on a bigger project, what is needed is a solution that can provide a high-quality coat and also penetrate deep within the layers of grout and stones.
The quantity is good enough for you to take on projects as large as 800 sq feet. And even after you are done, you will have some leftovers. You can use this for touch-up purposes later.
Additionally, the solution contains a multi-purpose formula that works to protect both the grout and surrounding tiles from decay and stains. We say it is very versatile because it is suited to protect not just grout but a variety of natural stones that are porous in nature.
The sealer is designed to penetrate to the end layer of the natural stones and make sure that all the pores are covered to prevent moisture from accumulating. It also prevents unwanted bacteria formation.
We do not have any significant complaints against the product apart from the fact that it has a pungent odor. We suggest that you wear a mask or cover your face while applying it to the grout to avoid the strong smell. Also, consider moving your pets away from the area when you are applying the sealer.
What We Like
Can cover big areas
Provides a top-notch coat
Works on grout and tiles alike
Prevents bacteria formation
What We Don't Like
Has a strong smell
Suitable Surfaces: Porous Stones | Dimensions: 8 x 4 x 8 inches | Weight: 8.69 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: Yes
7. Clean-EEZ Grout Sealer
As a well-regarded product in its category, the Clean-EEZ Stone & Grout Sealer offers a user-friendly solution for sealing grout and unglazed natural stone tiles, particularly in the shower and bathroom. With a simple application process and a formula designed to resist both water and oil-based stains, this product aims to keep your tiles in pristine condition.
However, it's important to note that despite its above average 4.5 out of 5-star rating from over 1,400 reviews, some users have noted it may take multiple coats to achieve perfect waterproofing results.
Taking on the role of a user, we discovered multiple appealing aspects of the Clean-eez Stone & Grout Sealer. With its straightforward application method, all you need to do is apply it to the grout using a paintbrush, wait five minutes, and then wipe away any excess. This makes it an excellent choice for individuals who are new to DIY projects.
Secondly, its versatility extends to multiple areas of a home, including bathroom tiles, shower surrounds, and natural stone. Additionally, its low-odor formula was a refreshing change, thereby contributing to a more pleasant user experience.
Despite the numerous strengths of the Clean-eez Stone & Grout Sealer, there are areas for potential improvement. A significant sector of the user feedback observed that optimum waterproofing required 3-5 coats of the sealer, an effort that may be time-consuming and resource-intensive to some users. Streamlining the effectiveness of the product might save users time without compromising the sealing quality.
What We Like
Easy application for beginners
Works on various surfaces, including bathroom tiles and natural stone
Vivid colors
Low odor formula for user comfort
What We Don't Like
May require multiple coats for full waterproofing
Suitable Surfaces: Natural Stone | Dimensions: 10.35 x 5.28 x 3.43 inches | Weight: 2 pounds | Fast Drying: Yes | Strong Odor: No
What Are the Best Grout Sealers for Shower?
Grout sealers are instrumental in protecting your shower tiles from moisture, preventing mold growth, and prolonging their cleanliness and color. This article presents an in-depth comparison of some of the best grout sealers for showers available in the market. Characteristics such as their suitability for various surfaces, physical dimensions (length x width x height), weight, fast drying capability, and the presence of a strong odor have been examined.
Buying Guide For The Best Grout Sealers For Showers
Now that we have spoken about the features and the pros and cons of the 7 top grout sealers, we hope it will help you decide better. But we understand that you still might have some doubts lingering in your mind.
Knowing about the features is not enough, and there are a few more factors that you need to take into consideration when deciding to buy one. And in this section, we are going to take a look at some of these factors.
Let's see what they are!
Surface
When deciding which product to go for, it is very crucial that you first inspect the surface that you are going to use it on. In case you are working on a big project, we recommend that you opt for a gallon-size sealer.
How big of an area a pack of sealer can cover is clearly mentioned on the packages, and it is advisable that you read carefully before buying. To give you an estimate, a standard grout sealer should cover somewhere around 1000 ft to 4000 feet for every gallon of solvent.
Resistance To Oil And Water
While choosing an option, it is smart to go for one that is oil or water-resistant, or both. It is a rare combination, but if you are thorough with your research, you will surely find a good one.
If you are planning to use the grout sealer in the bathroom, where there is regular use of water, you should buy one that is completely water-resistant. On the other hand, if your goal is to provide protective layering to your tabletop or kitchen countertop, oil-resistant formulas are preferable.
Simply put, depending on the place where you use the sealant, you should opt for one that serves the purpose.
Longevity
What good is a sealer if it is not long-lasting? Well, re-application is always possible, but that becomes costly and time-consuming.
Go for one which is durable! We have seen that the non-penetrating sealers tend to relatively last a longer time span when compared to the penetrating formulas. However, penetrating solvents come with a range of benefits that you might not want to miss out on.
To find the ideal one, you will have to find a good balance. Jot down your requirements, and read through the descriptions of all the products mentioned earlier to see which one will be the perfect fit.
Grout Color
Depending on your aesthetics and décor, you can either opt for a sealer that provides an invisible look or one that has a hint of color. If you are not a great fan of your existing grout color, this is a great chance to get the color changed.
But if you have a colored grout line that you like, simply choose a transparent coat that only adds sheen to the lines. The major aim here is to not change the color but make the existing one look more shiny and attractive.
That's all my friends!
After going through this comprehensive read, we hope that you can make a better choice. We also hope that you had as much fun reading about the products as we had fun experimenting and compiling the information.
We promise to be back with more such interesting reads for you. But before we say our goodbyes, we would like to let you in on our favorites. Aqua Mix Sealer's Choice 30882-4 takes the award for being the best overall.
With that, it's a wrap. Let us know about your favorites in the comment section below.
Until next time, take care!
It isn’t surprising that lathes are known as the “mother of machining tools” because they can be used for diverse purposes.
And, if you’ve been working in the metal manufacturing industry for quite some time, you must have surely heard praises about the Grizzly lathe. For over 30 years, Grizzly Industrial has been manufacturing all kinds of machine tools, power tools, and hand tools. So, if you are considering a lathe from Grizzly Industrial, then you are most likely to end up with either the G8688 or the G0602.
To be honest, both these lathes are sturdy and highly durable. But, how do you know which will be the ideal one for you? To help you decide just that, today we’ll talk about the two lathes and discuss their features.
So, without further delay, let’s dive straight into the deets. Shall we?
Grizzly Lathe Review
The Grizzly Brand
Since 1983, Grizzly Industrial has been manufacturing top-notch tools and equipment for the metal and wood manufacturing industries. You can browse through the wide variety of tools offered by them to choose the best one for your task. All Grizzly tools are quite user friendly and allow you to complete your tasks in a breeze.
Speaking of durability, Grizzly Industrial tools are robust and well-built to tackle all your metal manufacturing tasks. Also, their machines have been awarded for excellent quality.
If you are worried about the prices, then let us tell you their tools are reasonably priced. Plus, their customer services are always there to assist you in case of any issues, which is a bonus.
Whether you are manufacturing with metals or working on a new construction project, a good lathe is the need of the hour to carry out your tasks in a smooth and efficient manner.
Both the G8688 and the G0602 by Grizzly Industrial are among the top-notch models for all your metal needs. Be it cutting, drilling, shaping, turning, sanding, knurling, or deformation, you can carry out any task you need.
These tools will help you in shaping those metal pieces without any hassle. You can trim off those extra parts with these machining tools and carve an excellent piece for your use. Further, due to their compact size, these mini metal lathes are extremely portable.
If you are a hobbyist looking for a good lathe for all your metal tasks, then the G8688 is an excellent option to consider. This mini metal lathe is one of the most durable options available on the market, thanks to the top-quality components used in manufacturing it.
Featuring a single-phase motor, it allows you to complete whatever metal task you have at hand smoothly and efficiently. Also, its 3/4 HP motor offers 110 volts for your metal shaping tasks.
What’s more interesting, is that it has been designed with a space of 12 inches between centers. So, whether you have to deal with bite-sized materials or medium-sized tasks, you’re good to go with this lathe.
To put it in a nutshell, the Grizzly G8688 mini metal lathe packs a lot of punch into a tiny tabletop package. Also, the handy features of this lathe are coupled with quite an affordable price tag. So, if you are a beginner, DIYer, hobbyist, construction contractor, or workshop owner, then this unit is perfect for carrying out all your tasks.
Key Specifications Of The Grizzly G8688 Mini Metal Lathe
Even if you are just a beginner with not much experience in metalworking, you can still use this mini metal lathe to carry out your latest project. Because of its compact size, you may store this anywhere you want.
What you’ll love about this lathe is that it has a thread dial indicator. This will particularly delight those who have just ventured into metalworking and find it difficult to detect the exact size of threads without a guide.
We must also mention this lathe’s variable speed, which starts at 100 RPM and shoots up to 2500 RPM. With this speed, be prepared to achieve more accuracy and perfection in all tasks. It even allows forward as well as backward motion.
Here are the key specifications of the Grizzly G8688 mini metal lathe:
Features a 250 watt, single-phase, 2.8 A/110 V motor
12 inches of distance between centers
7 inches swing over bed
Spindle speed varies from 0 - 2500 RPM
0.78 inches spindle bore (20mm)
Thread dial indicator
5/16 inches maximum tool bit size
Multiple thread pitches
2-34 inches cross slide travel
2-½ inch tailstock travel
Weighs 74 lbs with dimensions of 13 x 30.2 x 13 inches
Key Features Of The Grizzly G8688 Mini Metal Lathe
It would be unfair of you to expect this lathe to perform heavy-duty tasks. But you must not underestimate the device, for it performs impeccably with both medium and small size tasks as compared to others in the same range.
Its single horsepower motor is more than enough for hobbyists and the amateurs to carry out their tasks. Let’s have a look at the features of this lathe to know why it will be an ideal option for you.
Engine
We were caught on the hop when we saw this petite lathe carrying out so many tasks like the wind. No matter what task you have at hand, this lathe carries it out effortlessly. Although it might not be an ideal choice for heavy-duty tasks, it is an excellent option for small-scale jobs.
For novices, hobbyists, and amateurs, this single-phase motor of 250 watts will help you work quickly as a wink. Though we agree that its motor isn’t very powerful, it is definitely a cut above other comparable products.
Capacity
This mini metal lathe is a perfect example of the saying that big things in life often come in little packages. We were pretty pleased with its potential to maneuver turning techniques like beveling, facing, shaping, and bifurcating.
What we found more interesting is the versatility of this Grizzly lathe. If the amateur in you wishes to make screws, small rivets, or any other pneumatic tool, then you must trust this lathe for outstanding results.
Featuring a long spindle of 12 inches in diameter with 7 inches of swing diameter, you can make these objects for your home, and even for commercial purposes.
Variable Speed Control
If you are a professional using lathes for years, you must know the importance of variable speed in the lathe. Thankfully, the Grizzly G8688 mini metal lathe is featured with variable speed controls.
Also, its ability to scythe in both forward and reverse directions makes it an excellent lathe for all the beginners out there. As such, you can use it at no matter which speed you want. It is an ideal addition to your workshop if you are the one who has little experience with lathing.
Design And Longevity
The compact size of this mini metal lathe is quite appealing. Since not every workshop is large, the G8688 lathe is designed to fit your small workshop perfectly. Although small in size, it is highly durable and built to last.
While using this lathe, we did not notice any major vibration as is the case for other lathes. Although it just weighs about 74 lbs, it does an excellent job of absorbing vibration. If you have to carry out small projects, then this would be an ideal pick for all tasks.
Cutting threads and creating tiny brush pulleys is what we loved doing with this lathe, and we were quite pleased with the result it produced. Despite its compact size, it can tackle threads ranging between 8 to 72 TPI-33 inches.
Threading Gears
Though the threading gear of this lathe is made of plastic, you will find it significantly better than others on the market. You’ll find these gears come with a host of benefits such as corrosion resistance. Also, plastic gears are a treat for your ears, for they significantly reduce the noise.
The plastic threading gears perfectly complement the compact design of this lathe machine. Since it is explicitly designed for light metal turning tasks and for smaller workshops, you’d find these plastic threading gears a perfect fit.
What’s more, you will find that the gears are more forgiving than the metal ones as they are easy to replace. Also, we were quite pleased with the four-position turret post because it is ergonomically designed.
Performance And Power
Its compact size mustn’t be taken lightly, for this mini metal lathe delivers a powerful punch when it comes to metal turning tasks. You can throw any metal task at it from medium to large and see how it works. For the novices and the small workshop owners, this brings a lot of versatility to the table.
If you’ve been eyeing the G0602 Benchtop Metal lathe by Grizzly Industrial for a while, then you’ve stopped by at the correct place. This gilt-edged benchtop lathe is super easy to use and is superbly built.
Grizzly has designed this lathe with a robust motor so that you can get the ball rolling for all the tasks that you’ve got to accomplish. Plus, you’ll be delighted to use this lathe for all your turning tasks because of its 0% vibration feature.
Highly striking is its ability to carry out all the metal turning tasks you need; kudos to Grizzly Industrial for polishing up its tools. Moreover, this is an incredible tool with a backsplash guard, a 1 HP motor, thread dial, a dedicated switch for reversing the spindle, and a chip tray. It’s built with all the features you’d be needing for accomplishing any small metal turning tasks.
To put it in a nutshell, this model features all the power of a full-sized lathe with the convenience of tabletop storage. Its 14 amps of power will churn out your metal and wood projects like magic. Further, its user-friendly operation makes it an ideal pick for all the amateurs, novices, and experienced workers.
Key Specifications Of The Grizzly G0602 Benchtop Lathe
If you are just venturing into the field of metal turning and looking for a good lathe to carry out all the metal tasks, then you are good to go with the G0602 benchtop metal lathe. This 10 by 22-inch tabletop lathe works well with tough materials.
It allows you to work with a variety of materials, even plastic, without any hitch. This is only possible because of the tool’s bit which is versatile enough to bisect or shape a variety of materials. Also, you can adjust the rotation speed as you want.
On top of that, its V-way bed provides you with just the kind of support you need while dealing with metals. It also ensures that your lathe lasts almost a lifetime.
What is more interesting, only premium quality materials are used for designing this lathe, so we can vouch for its longevity and durability. As such, you can count on it for years to carry out all your metals tasks. Overall, it is highly versatile, and even allows you to mold engines.
Here are the key specifications of the Grizzly G0602 benchtop lathe:
Features a single-phase 1 HP motor
22 inches of distance between centers
9-½ inches swing over bed
Spindle speed ranges between 150 - 2400 RPM
25 mm of spindle bore
Inch thread ranging between 8 - 72 TPI
Maximum bit size of 1/2 inches
Metric thread ranges between 0.25 to 3.50 mm
6-1/2 inches cross slide travel
2-½ inches tailstock quill travel
Weighs 432 lbs with dimensions of 46 x 22 x 21 inches
Key Features Of The Grizzly G0602 Benchtop Lathe
Unlike the previous product, this lathe works well with tough materials. This makes it perfect if you have been working with lathes for years. Rest assured, you won’t be disappointed. Let’s explore the features of this lathe to know why it would be an ideal choice for experienced metalworkers.
Design And Longevity
Whether you have a construction project at hand or some DIY work, you can complete all related tasks that you want with this ergonomically designed lath. Adjusting the speeds, and changing the bits isn’t much of a hassle while using this lathe; you can do all of this easily. Also, its strong and sturdy V-way bed provides excellent support while working.
Although this benchtop lathe is slightly heavier than the Grizzly G8688, you can store it wherever you wish to after completing your work. Be it on the top of your old cupboard or somewhere in the garage, this lathe can be stored easily. Featuring a chip tray to gather debris and a backsplash guard for the oil, this benchtop metal lathe is a perfect addition to your workshop.
It is without a doubt an excellent lathe for metal turning tasks on the market. Also, because it is made from cast iron, the vibration generated is subdued straight away. This means you can work with your metal pieces steadily without any significant disturbance.
Variable Speed Controls
For those who look for perfection in every arena, this Grizzly G0602 lathe will please the perfectionist within you with its accuracy and precision. As against other lathes, the speed range of this lathe is quite impressive.
If you think switching speeds is a pain in the neck, then this device will let you switch from 150 RPM to 2400 RPM in no time and work smoothly without any hassle. While using this for metal turning, you can easily adjust the speeds as per your convenience. This ensures precision and accuracy in your tasks. Just turn the knob, and you are good to go.
The Gearing System
We found the gearing system of this benchtop metal lathe quite impressive. The Grizzly G0602 lathe is featured with a precise gearing system consisting of a spindle bore of 1-inch. This gearing system ensures that the lathe works impeccably without posing any hindrance while turning metals.
As already stated, the six variable speeds contribute to smooth functioning. You don’t need to fret about the speed since the gearing system takes care of that. Just select the appropriate speed setting, and you’re good to go.
Sturdy Motor
If you are a professional metalworker or a woodworker, then this would be best for all your tasks at hand. Since it features a powerful motor, you can use this benchtop lathe for turning tough metals. And on account of its 1 HP motor of 110 volts, you can carry out all the tasks with ease.
Unlike other metal lathes, this one has made turning out metals a relatively easy task mainly because of its robust and solid motor. So, we highly recommend this Grizzly G0602 if you are on the lookout for a lathe to work with tough metals without any hassle.
Grizzly G8688 vs. Grizzly G0602 - Which One To Choose?
Grizzly Industrial has been offering top-notch quality lathes for years, and the raving customer reviews stand testimony to this fact. Both the Grizzly G8688 and the G0602 lathe are outstanding lathes and perform impeccably well.
Both are robust and durable metal lathes. But, how do you choose between the two? So to make things easier, let’s explore the pros and cons of each in detail. After going through the following, you’ll have no doubts regarding which would be better for your particular needs.
Why Prefer The Grizzly G8688 Mini Metal Lathe?
The Grizzly 08688 lathe works exceptionally well if you have small or medium-sized metals to deal with. Moreover, its compact size makes it ideal for those who work in small workshops. It will allow you to perform all your small to medium-scale tasks in a breeze.
The variable speed ranges offer perfection in all your work. So, we’d recommend all the novices and amateurs to go with this lathe to carry out all their tasks easily.
Pros
Variable speed
Packed with a plethora of features
User-friendly
Compact in size
Cons
Unsuitable for tough materials
Why Prefer The Grizzly G0602 Benchtop Lathe
The Grizzly G0602 comes packed with a host of features that makes it an ideal choice for all the experienced workers out there. Its powerful motor makes it a durable product and it’s highly versatile due to its six variable speed options which allow you to work with almost any material.
Also, it delivers perfect cuts, making it an ideal choice for all the perfectionists out there. And, if durability is a significant factor in your purchase decision, then don’t worry; this product ticks all the right boxes in that department.
Pros
Highly versatile
Strong motor
Durable
User-friendly
Features six variable speeds
Cons
Slightly on the expensive side
Can be used only on top surfaces
Summing It Up
When it comes to lathes, Grizzly never disappoints us. Both the G8688 and the G0602 metal lathes are excellent tools for turning metals. As a result, it is extremely difficult to pick a winner between the two. While both the lathes enjoy certain advantages over the other, the Grizzly G0602 Benchtop Metal Lathe certainly outshines G8688 in terms of features and uses.
The Grizzly G8688 is perfect if you are a novice or an amateur dealing with small materials without much experience, while the G0602 goes well with tough materials. Ultimately, it all boils down to your needs and the nature of your task. Not to mention the fact that your experience level also plays a part in it all.
With that, we come to the end of our comprehensive guide; hopefully, you will be able to make an informed choice. And, keep your eyes glued to this space for more such informative content.
Airless paint sprayers have significantly improved the process of painting large areas over the years. As such, it is imperative to choose the right model.
Unlike traditional rollers, using a paint sprayer offers a ton of benefits. For starters, it creates less mess during painting while it helps in achieving an even application without much hassle.
However, with the availability of a ton of options on the market, choosing the right model that is durable and delivers precise results might not be that easy. So, to make things easier, we bring you two exceptional models from Graco, one of the leading manufacturers of top-quality paint sprayers.
According to DIYers and professional painters, the X5 and the X7 paint sprayers from the brand are the best-selling options currently available on the market. For this reason, we have provided a detailed comparison between these two so that you can finally decide which one to purchase.
Firstly, Graco is the leading manufacturer of paint sprayers in the United States. It is a billion-dollar company that makes paint sprayers from the consumer level to advanced spraying equipment.
Now, coming to these two products, they are under the consumer brand, Magnum. We found that they are made in the US and have 770 service centers spread across the country. Both are highly functional and help achieve even finishes with minimum overspray, which is why they are popular among DIYers and professional painters.
Magnum X5 vs Graco X7 Differences
Despite being products of the same brand, both these models are different from each other in terms of functionalities and other important features. In this section, we will be looking at some of the major differences between these two products so that it helps you choose one over the other.
The Graco X5 can spray up to 0.27 gallons of paint in a minute, whereas its counterpart can spray 0.31 gallons in a minute. This clearly shows that the X7 model is slightly ahead of the former in terms of spraying capacity and coverage.
Below is a comparison chart that will help you understand the differences between the two models better.
Graco Magnum X7 Graco Magnum X5
Maximum tip size: 0.017”Maximum tip size: 0.015”
Flow rate: 0.31 GPMFlow rate: 0.27 GPM
Hose: 100 feet longHose: 75 feet long
Weight: 26 pounds Weight: 19 pounds
Dimensions: 19” x 15” x 37”Dimensions: 14.5” x 12.75” x 19”
As you can see, there are quite a lot of differences between the two models. Even though the differences might not seem significant, it can drastically affect the results.
You will find that the Graco Magnum X7 is much bigger than the Graco Magnum X5 in size, making it an ideal choice for professional painters working on heavy-duty projects. Naturally, it is a bit heavier than the Graco X5, but you can move it around your project hassle-free, thanks to the built-in wheels.
While the Graco X5 supports a maximum hose length of 75 feet, the Graco X7 supports a maximum hose length of 100 feet. This means that the Graco X7 is a notch ahead in terms of mobility as well. However, as far as the power is concerned, both models deliver a similar output.
That said, to make things easier for you, we have reviewed both the Graco X5 and the X7 in detail in the next segment. You would be pleased to know that it was only after extensive research and testing that we have provided detailed reviews.
Just right for DIY Homeowners and Remodelers looking for...
Ideal for projects up to 10 gallons in size, allowing you...
It comes with fully adjustable pressure, which gives you the liberty to control the paint flow as per the project's requirements. This makes the product highly efficient, keeping the overspray to a bare minimum.
We should also mention the robust stainless steel piston pump, as it lets you spray unthinned paint at high pressure. Meaning, unlike most paint sprayers on the market, you don’t have to go through the hassle of diluting the paint with water before spraying.
Another advantageous feature of the product is its suction tube, which directly sprays from the paint bucket. It comes in handy when painting large projects but as far as the usage is concerned, Graco guarantees that it can spray up to 125 gallons per year.
Apart from this, it features a flush adapter, which you can easily connect to a garden hose for easy and quick cleaning in case of clogging issues. Hence, you can efficiently use its 0.38 mm nozzle, which is good enough for nailing medium to light painting projects.
Moving on, it supports a hose length of up to 75 feet. So, it is ideal for both outdoor and indoor projects, as it gives you the extra reach needed sometimes. Plus, with a flow rate of 0.27 GPM, it offers a stable operation, maintaining optimal painting speeds during your painting sessions.
Now, users worried about durability will love its stainless steel construction, which makes the product less susceptible to daily wear and tear. Hence, it stands the test of time with ease.
Lastly, coupled with the durable build quality is a 1-year warranty, ensuring that you no longer have to worry about leaks and defects; Graco has you covered!
Featuring a 0.43mm-nozzle, it can deliver smooth and precise finishes. This means it is suitable for painting a wide range of surfaces, including fences, decks, and home interior.
It sports a wheeled cart design, making it highly mobile, and allowing you to move it around effortlessly as per the project requirements. Also, it has a pressure capacity of 3,000 PSI, which in our opinion, is sufficient enough to handle the most complicated projects.
With a flow rate of 0.31 GPM, it can paint large surface areas easily. Now, this is something that professional painters will truly appreciate about this product. As far as the build quality is concerned, it is made of stainless steel, making it durable and long-lasting, just like the Graco X5.
What’s more, it can spray up to 125 gallons of paint per year like its smaller brother, thereby being consistent in its performance. Apart from this, it comes with pail hooks, letting you store paint cans on the apparatus of the product itself. This practical feature comes in handy when you need to refill the paint can when working on a large project.
Moving on, one of the best parts about this product is the PushPrime technology, which provides reliable and fast start-up with just a push of a button. This unique technology lets you start painting without any delay or unnecessary hassle. Coupled with this is an adjustable pressure control knob, which allows you to tweak the amount of paint being sprayed.
Lastly, it is backed by a 1-year warranty, which ensures that you don’t have to incur additional expenses for replacement or repairs.
Pros
Backed by a 1-year warranty
Can cover large areas with ease
Delivers precise and smooth finishes
Easy and fast start-up
Durable and long-lasting
Cons
May not be appropriate for painting small areas
Graco Magnum X5 vs Graco Magnum X7 Detail Comparison
Now that we have reviewed both the products in detail let us make a side-by-side comparison, so that you can decide which option would be perfect for you. We strongly recommend reading this part very carefully; otherwise, you might miss a thing or two.
Precision
When it comes to precision, both models deliver satisfying results. Both can cover a wide variety of indoor and outdoor surfaces. However, the Graco X5 is more precise than the Graco X7 because of its compact and lightweight design.
The tip of Graco X7 measures 0.17” in diameter, whereas the Graco X5 has a slightly smaller tip, measuring 0.15” in diameter. Having a larger tip ensures that it can spray more paint on large areas. So, in this regard, the Graco X7 is better than the Graco X5.
Power
Both the paint sprayers feature a maximum PSI rating of 3,000 PSI as far as power is concerned. Hence, both are capable of handling large painting projects that demand precision.
While the Graco X5 has a flow rate of around 0.27 GPM, the Graco X7 has a flow rate of 0.31 GPM. A slightly better flow rate of the Graco X7 helps it paint larger areas within a shorter period of time.
So, if you usually paint big, time-consuming projects, the Graco X7 paint sprayer would be a better choice for you than the Graco X5. Similarly, the X5 would be the ideal choice if you get small projects that aren’t that time-consuming.
Size
The Graco X5 is smaller than the Graco X7 in size. The Graco X5 sports a stand underneath, whereas the Graco X7 is mounted on a wheeled cart, which makes it easier to move around at convenience. Nevertheless, both the models are easily portable, allowing you to take them to the worksite without any hassle.
You should consider the requirements of your project and the importance of mobility while working on that project and then make your decision.
Durability
Talking about durability, both models are made using top-grade stainless steel. This means that you can expect both of them to last a very long time despite consistent usage. Also, one of the best things about stainless steel is that it is anti-corrosive in nature, which means you don’t have to worry about rust formation.
Overall, both the X5 and X7 from Graco can be used for prolonged periods, which is why both the models are highly sought-after by professionals as well as DIYers.
Usability
In terms of usability, both paint sprayers perform smoothly. They are easy to handle and feature the special PushPrime button, which allows for a faster start-up than most other options out there. Also, they are engineered very well to prevent clogging and to reduce overspray.
It does not matter if you are a seasoned pro or a novice venturing on your first painting project; using both the paint sprayers is easy. Overall, both the Graco X5 and the Graco X7 are highly comprehensive, which is why they are such popular paint sprayers in the paint industry.
Airless Paint Sprayer Buyer's Guide
Let’s face it; choosing the right airless paint sprayer that meets all your project requirements is not all that simple. In this section, we have mentioned a few important points that you should keep in mind in order to make an informed purchase.
Easy Clean-Up
You should always go with a model that is quick and easy to clean.
Usually, painting tools are quite difficult to clean, mainly because they come in contact with a wide variety of compounds that can affect the color and create clogging inside. This is why you have to factor in your cleaning equipment and the frequency of the product’s use. In the case of an airless paint sprayer, the nozzle requires the most attention.
So, if you are a professional painter, you may want to go with a model that allows for an easy and faster clean-up.
Project’s Location
The location of the project is an important factor that you should consider when buying an airless paint sprayer. This is because some paint sprayers are just not appropriate for indoor use.
Since spraying paint involves letting out paint particles into the air, it possesses various health risks. Furthermore, certain models may not be rated for being operated inside the house. Hence, it's best to keep a check on the product listings in order to be sure.
Likewise, you should know the type of power outlets you might have access to in the worksite. Airless paint sprayers need some form of power source to work. Some models have extended reach than others, so you need to keep these factors in mind to ensure that you can paint the project without any difficulty.
Compounds Used
Another crucial factor that will be determining your purchase is the kind of compounds you want to use since not all sprayers have the potential to function with every compound. That said, you should always go with a model that supports almost all the compounds, including thin latex paints and residential paints.
We would strongly advise you to read the airless paint sprayer's operational guidelines before purchasing to confirm whether your compound works with it or not. Also, you might need to dilute your compound a bit to bring down the viscosity level so that it can be sprayed smoothly through the paint sprayer.
Control
Painting projects require broad coverage, when painting fences and walls, or fine precision detailing, when painting cars or staining a cabinet. As such, you should always consider the kind of project in hand, and then purchase a model that lets you finish them effectively.
Nowadays, most airless paint sprayers feature variable settings that let you alter the spray fan’s size to a large width for greater coverage or a narrow width for detailing. So, you should check the maximum and minimum width of the model you intend to purchase to ensure that it meets the project's requirements.
Ease of Use
Ease of use is always a vital factor when you are purchasing any type of tool. And an airless paint sprayer is no exception. Not only does it influence your safety, but also your ability to finish the task efficiently.
When it comes to airless paint sprayers, you should always choose a model that fits in your hand properly. You should be able to work with it for longer periods at a stretch without discomfort or hand fatigue. Therefore, consider the product’s weight and build quality before buying.
Plus, you should avoid going with models that come with a paint container attached to the gun as they are generally very heavy and can hinder your work. It is always best to go with a model that pulls paint directly from the paint tub, as they are a lot comfortable to hold and help in delivering precise results.
Portability
Portability might not be the first feature that comes to your mind when talking about airless paint sprayers; however, it is just as essential as the other features. In airless paint sprayers, portability does not work the same way as it does in other cordless tools, as they need to be connected to a power source to function.
So, for airless paint sprayers, portability generally comes down to their power cords and the paint hoses they feature.
If you are moving a lot while painting the project, consider going with a model that supports over 20 feet long hoses. This will allow you to move around while working without moving the base from one place to the other.
Added Features
Like any other tool, airless paint sprayers also come with some added features that enhance their performance. Most of the models let you tweak the flow of the spray in circular, vertical and horizontal shapes, and the spray fan’s size as well. Plus, with some models, you even switch out the nozzles to produce different effects.
How To Maintain Your Paint Sprayer
Since buying a paint sprayer requires quite a bit of investment, it is imperative that you learn how to maintain it. Maintaining your paint sprayer will not only make it last longer but also keep its efficiency levels and performance high. In this section, we have shared some tips that will help you maintain your product.
Strain The Paint
You must strain your paint in order to prevent debris from clogging the nozzle and the spraying tips. You can do it by simply pouring paint through the stainers to the paint bucket before spraying.
Look Out For The Valves
Taking care of the valves is a must when it comes to maintaining an airless paint sprayer. A polished valve keeps the sprayer in a better working condition, and aids in priming. Make sure that you clean the valve assembly thoroughly with water and a bristle brush.
However, if you notice the paint sprayer dripping after cleaning it, it is time to replace the valves.
Ensure The Paint Doesn’t Come In Contact With The Motor
While painting, ensure that the paint doesn’t come in contact with the sprayer’s motor. If there are some accidental spills and splatters, clean them up immediately. This is because any paint that accumulates on the exterior surface of the motor starts acting as an insulating cover and can cause the product to overheat.
So, to prevent this from happening, you can use a motor cover while you are working. It will protect the exterior of the motor from paint that might come in contact with it.
Keep The Filters Clean
Ensure that you clean the filter screen of your paint sprayer from time to time. You can use a light bristle brush to get rid of the debris from the screen. Also, there is a filter that prevents debris from entering the gun’s tip; make sure you clean that as well if you see the spray patterns getting distorted.
Don’t Forget To Use Fluids
If you are not going to be using your airless paint sprayer for more than a couple of days, ensure that there is no water inside the pump. Since most of the product’s components are made of corrosive materials like steel, they can easily rust if kept in contact with water for prolonged periods.
Furthermore, make sure that the water does not freeze in the pump; otherwise, it may cause irreparable damage to the paint sprayer. This is why you should use industry-grade and manufacturer-recommended fluids before storing your paint sprayer to avoid these issues from taking place and confirm that it is in good shape.
How To Use A Paint Sprayer Efficiently
Here are some tips on how you can use a paint sprayer efficiently.
Mix The Paint
Mixing the paint allows for a smoother experience when using a paint sprayer. So, ensure that you stir the paint well before spraying. Not only does it prevent clogging, but it also helps in delivering a smooth finish to your project.
Wear Protective Clothing
Make sure that you wear protective clothing so that the paint doesn’t come in contact with your skin. Also, wear face masks to prevent inhaling the toxic fumes from the paint. We also strongly recommend wearing eye protection, as you would not want to expose your eyes to dangerous fumes.
Mind The Weather
You should never paint while it is raining outside, as the water can ruin your project. We would suggest that you keep a check on the weather updates, so that you can plan the painting session accordingly.
Keep A Close A Watch On The Settings
Change the nozzle settings to suit the requirements of the project. A broader setting covers a larger surface, whereas a narrow setting is required for a precise finish. To achieve a superior effect, make sure that you keep the sprayer’s tip 6 to 12 inches away from your project’s surface.
Clean-Up
Nobody wants to leave a mess behind when they are done painting, so clean-up is a must. We strongly recommend you go through the sprayer’s instruction manual in order to clean it up nice and easy. Furthermore, ensure that there is no clogging inside your sprayer; otherwise, you will face problems spraying paint the next time.
Practice
This is important for people who are starting new. The best way to practice is to paint old walls. If you think the results are sloppy, keep trying until you get good at it. This will help you master your skills greatly.
How To Minimize Overspray
For any airless paint sprayer, overspray is a major problem that needs to be solved with ingenuity. Here are tips on how you can minimize or control overspray.
Proper Arrangement
It doesn’t matter if you are a professional or an occasional DIYer; some mistakes are bound to happen because of lack of attention. As such, it is mandatory to cover your furniture and other essential items with tapes, newspapers, or plastic sheets before starting the spray painting process.
Method
Ensure that you keep the spray gun at a distance of at least 25 cm away from the project’s surface. Also, try to hold the tip at a perpendicular angle towards the surface. Keep in mind that in order to achieve a better finish, you need to pull the trigger and move the spray gun from side to side simultaneously.
Size Of The Nozzle
Consider the project’s size and then select the nozzle size accordingly. For example, if you are painting a room, a medium-sized nozzle would do just fine. However, if you are painting the exterior of a home, you will need a larger nozzle in order to complete your task quickly and efficiently.
Selecting the right nozzle for the right job can reduce the overspray to a great extent.
Pressure
You must never apply excessive pressure, as it is one of the major causes of overspray. Always ensure that you are using a device that has an ideal pressure setting; the spray fan pattern should have constant coverage of the project’s surface. To perform this, you can raise the pressure slowly until you get an even surface coverage.
Create Your Own Spray Booth
This is one of the most effective ways in which you can reduce overspray. Creating your own backdrop or a spray booth helps in preventing paint from spreading all over the project. To create a spray booth, you have to tape numerous sections of cardboard together and keep it behind the project you are working on.
Note that the size of the paint booth will vary from one project to the other. Hence, the bigger the project, the larger the paint booth.
Graco X5 vs X7 Comparison
What type of extension cord should You use with the Graco Magnum paint sprayers?
We strongly recommend going with a 12-gauge extension cord that is under 100 feet long.
What are the types of compounds that can be used with the Graco Magnum paint sprayers?
Both the Graco Magnum X5 and X7 can spray a wide variety of compounds, including primers, stains, solvent-based and water-based paint. Basically, all the compounds that can be easily cleaned with mineral spirits are compatible with the two models. Now, as far as the compounds that don’t work are concerned, they include elastomeric, texture-based materials, and solvent-based lacquers.
What is the price of the Graco X5 and the Graco X7?
Both the models are available on the market at under $500.
How to know if a tip is worn out?
In the initial days of purchase, spray tips provide an oval spray pattern. However, with time, the tip starts to wear out, and the oval shape slowly transforms into a circle, spraying more paint into a smaller area.
Another way to know if your tip is worn out or not is if you start observing the effects of tails or fingers. Usually, a RAC V tip, like the one that comes with the Graco X5 and the Graco X7, will last for approximately 125 gallons per year.
However, it greatly varies on the type of paint that is being sprayed by the painter and the pressure at which they are spraying.
What is Graco X5’s and X7’s country of origin?
Graco is an American brand that takes immense pride in manufacturing all its products in the US. In fact, you are going to find logos of the American flag on both these devices.
What are some other popular brands of airless paint sprayers?
Apart from Graco, some of the other popular brands of airless paint sprayers are : –
Wagner
HomeRight
Dusichin
Why does my airless paint sprayer’s motor keep turning off automatically?
When you release the trigger, the motor will turn off. Again, when you pull the trigger to spray, the motor will turn on. This is how airless paint sprayers function; it eliminates the loud constant noise generated by the motor and increases the longevity of the device.
However, if the motor runs when you release the trigger, that means it is not primed.
How often is it required to clean my airless paint sprayer?
You should clean it thoroughly after every use.
Graco X5 vs X7 Verdict
With that, we have come to the end of our informative guide. Now, coming to the main question - which model is the clear winner? Well, we would have to say it is the Graco Magnum X5.
There are many reasons why the Graco X5 is a better option than the Graco X7. For starters, the Graco X5 is more lightweight, precise, and affordable than its upgraded version. Not to mention, its 75-feet long hose gives it enough mobility and is sufficiently long for reaching all the surfaces of your project.
Even though the Graco X7 looks like a better option, it is not. The 100 feet long hose does not seem important as it already sports a wheeled-cart design, which makes it easy to move around anyway. Overall, we feel that the Graco X5 is a notch higher than the Graco X7 in most aspects.
So, that’s all for now. Until next time, take care!
It’s 2022, and we have a variety of wood glues in the market, and some of them are stronger than the wood itself!
Specialized glues for various repair tasks have recently cropped up, so if you’re looking to do some joinery work, you could look into using wood glue instead of clunky tools. It may sound like a far-fetched dream, but you’ll be surprised at just how effective an adhesive can be!
But, there are many brands available in the market, so how do you figure out which one to get? After a lot of research, we narrowed it down to the Gorilla wood glue and the adhesive from Titebond, which are the leading products in this field, in our opinion.
So, without further ado, let’s jump into this guide on Gorilla wood glue vs. Titebond, and let’s see which one is the better pick of the two!
1.Gorilla Glue
First, let’s look at this wood glue from Gorilla, which is multipurpose and can be used on different kinds of wood. It is ideal for soft or hardwood surfaces and natural wood composites. Plus, Gorilla is a reputed American company known for making quality products, and this glue is no different!
This wood glue is also suitable for DIY projects and is one of the most popular products available in the field of wood glues. Interestingly, it looks white when you look at it in the bottle, though it has a slightly deeper shade when it dries.
Moreover, Gorilla wood glue is a PVA, water-based glue. As such, it is easy to use and fast-acting, taking only half an hour to clamp and one day to cure. It is a user-friendly adhesive, and you also have the option of sanding off extra glue that might have spilled over onto the surface of where you were working.
Another fun fact about this wood glue is that it matches type ii ANSI and HVPA guidelines. This means that it's a breeze to use the glue outdoors since it's water-resistant and unaffected by mold. In addition to that, it doesn’t contain any added dyes, making it relatively safe.
What’s more, it’s suitable to use around food items and in the kitchen since it has been approved by the FDA.
Steps to Use
Step 1
Ensure that the surfaces you need to glue together are clean and dry. Also, make sure that they’re evenly cut and free from dust specks.
Step 2
Give the gluing process a trial run before applying the glue. Hold the pieces together and mark out how you want them to stick.
Step 3
Next, you have to add just the perfect amount of glue to the wood surface. This is probably the most crucial step since using too little glue will not provide a strong bond. However, applying too much glue might make things messy and tedious.
Step 4
In order to achieve an even distribution of glue, squirt a bit onto one spot and use a glue brush to spread it.
Why Did We Like It?
First off, Gorilla Wood Glue is easy to clean up if there’s an accidental spill. All you need is water and a washcloth, and you’re good to go. We also like how the glue is ultra-non-toxic and, thus, safe for people of all ages to use. So, if your children need to use it, there’s nothing to worry about!
Another remarkable fact about this product is that it doesn’t corrode or lose its adhesion even if exposed to sunlight or rain. So, we can say that the gorilla wood glue is waterproof! In addition to that, it can withstand both hot and dry weather and thus, is heat resistant.
We also liked how it expanded once used, making it strong and long-lasting.
What Could’ve Been Better
Despite all the advantages of the gorilla wood glue, we did, however, feel that it isn't as durable. Sometimes it dries up in the bottle itself if it hasn’t been used for an extended period of time. A probable reason for this could be the fast curing time of the glue, which kickstarts the drying procedure the moment it's exposed to any air.
Another thing the manufacturers could work on is the fact that this product does not work as efficiently with projects that require gaps to be filled.
Important Points To Be Kept In Mind
The glue can’t be used for heavy-duty projects with a structural focus (like load-bearing) but can be used to reinforce mechanical fasteners.
The glue is to be strictly used with wood and can’t be employed to stick plastic together.
Since Gorilla Wood Glue is PVA-based, it doesn’t foam.
It comes packaged in an attractive bottle with a nozzle that prevents excess glue from squirting out.
2. Titebond Glue
The other wood glue on our list is this one from Titebond, which is well known for its outstanding results when it comes to heavy-duty woodworking projects.
One of its most distinctive features is that it takes very little time to set. It needs one hour to clamp, which is exceptional, considering that it can pull off heavy-duty activities seamlessly. Titebond also adheres to type i ANSI and HPVA specifications which means it has superior resistance to water.
Titebond, too, has been approved by the FDA when it comes to indirect contact with food, and it’s relatively non-toxic as well. This is a helpful feature to have in case children come in contact with the glue.
Additionally, if you’re a messy worker and tend to glue yourself while working, fear not! Titebond can be easily washed off clothes when it still hasn’t dried up. This is important because Titebond isn’t a transparent glue- it looks yellow while in the bottle but turns to a brownish color post-use. This factor is also quite thoughtful- due to its brown finish, it blends right in with the wood.
Another fun fact about this product is that it is PVA glue, and thus, it doesn’t expand or foam. As a result, Titebond provides better adhesion than other kinds of polyurethane glues available in the market.
Steps To Use
Step 1
Make sure that the wood surface is clean before you begin working with the glue. A portable band saw may be used to make the edges clean and sharp. We recommend against using a handsaw since that leads to uneven edges, which create issues when you try using the glue.
Step 2
Next, it is imperative to ensure that the wood contains a moisture content of less than 6-8%. Additionally, the humidity of the workspace also needs to be below 50% for optimum results.
Step 3
Once the preceding steps are followed, the glue is ready to be applied. Take care to apply just the amount necessary- not too much and not too less. Applying excessive glue will result in the adhesive spilling over and creating a mess, whereas scarce application will result in a weak bond.
Step 4
Once the glue has been squeezed out onto the surface, it must be spread as evenly as possible with a glue brush.
Step 5
Lastly, hold the newly glued surfaces together using a clamp, and make sure to apply just the right amount of pressure. The glue might ooze out from the joining point if you press too hard. Conversely, a lack of pressure will lead to a bond that might break.
Why Did We Like It?
For starters, we liked how the setting time of this glue is minimal, which also means it takes significantly less time to clamp. Titebond wood glue is also solvent-resistant and thus, can be used pretty easily outside.
A highlight of using Titebond glue to bind your wooden items together is that the bond produced by the adhesive is stronger than the wood itself! Moreover, it’s a piece of cake to clean up any extra spillage on the wood- it just needs to be sanded out. You can, additionally, use water to clean up any remaining mess.
What Could’ve Been Better
To our dismay, though the glue makes pretty strong bonds, it cannot be used in cases where a lot of loads is to be born or structural joining is needed to be done. Moreover, one must take care of the conditions under which they are storing the glue. If kept at a very low temperature, the glue begins to thicken.
We also ran into another problem while using this adhesive. Right around the glue joint surface, we noticed a stain. This marred the look of our project significantly and was rather disappointing.
Important Points To Be Kept In Mind
In case the glue gets on your clothes, dampen the area immediately and wipe it off while it’s wet.
Ensure that the moisture level doesn’t go above 10%.
How are the Wood Glues Similar to Each Other?
1. PVA-Based
The major similarity between the two wood glues is that both are used for wood-to-wood adhesion and are PVA-based. This means that they don’t foam or make the bond weaker on application.
2. Waiting Time
In addition to that, the waiting time for both glues is similar. You have to wait 24 hours before you can safely test the strength of the bond.
3. Reaction To Low Temperatures
Another likelihood between both the products is that none of them react well to low temperatures and might become ineffective if exposed to a cold environment.
How are the Wood Glues Different from Each Other?
1. Time Taken To Create Bonds
One of the key differences between the products is that the Gorilla wood glue takes longer to create bonds. Whereas, Titebond sticks almost instantly upon application and takes far less time.
2. Scope Of Use
Apart from that, the scope of use of both types of glue also differs from each other. Titebond works most effectively with grain surfaces, and Gorilla Glue performs well on surfaces that are cross-grained.
3. Color
Moreover, as we mentioned above, Titebond tends to leave a brown color once applied, whereas Gorilla Glue is whiter.
4. Shelf Life
Titebond also has better longevity since it has a greater shelf life. Unfortunately, Gorilla Glue tends to dry up faster because it reacts more strongly with the atmosphere.
5. Strength Of Bond
Perhaps the most crucial difference is that Titebond is superior when it comes to spreading the glue. It has more viscosity, which is why it percolates into the pores of the wood and creates a sturdy bond. Comparatively, Gorilla Glue is thinner and doesn’t spread as well.
So, this means that Titebond has a stronger bond than Gorilla Glue since the latter can get shaky at the joints after some time has passed.
Conclusion
So, how do both products stack up against each other? After an in-depth analysis of the features of both the adhesives, we can see that Titebond comes out on top. Though Gorilla Glue has its advantages, it ultimately loses to Titebond in terms of overall functionality.
Titebond bonds almost instantly have a lot of glue strength and provide a strong bond. When it comes to adhesives, time taken and the strength of the bond are the most important factors to be considered, and Titebond makes a clean sweep in both categories.
However, if you’re looking to get something that doesn’t have a distinct color, you could consider the Gorilla wood glue. Since it dries clear, it will ensure that the appearance of your project remains unsullied.
With this, our guide concludes, and we bid you adieu. We hope you found it valuable and unbiased, and we shall see you again soon with more of these.
Take care and stay safe!
Choosing the correct adhesive for your next DIY task can be a bit challenging.
There are endless options on the market, so how do you choose the best one for your task? We understand your dilemma, and so to help you choose the correct one, we’ve narrowed down our options to Gorilla Glue and Super Glue.
Honestly, the glues of both brands provide excellent adhesion and are versatile. Plus, they are the crafter’s favorite. They work as paper, wood, plastic, leather glue and much more. And so, deciding which one is the best of the two types of glue isn’t as easy as pie, particularly when both are the best. And so, deciding which one is the best of the two types of glue isn’t as easy as pie, particularly when both are the best.
And so, to ease your task, we’ll walk you through the two types of glue, what’s good and what’s bad. So that you can compare the two products and choose the best one for your needs.
So, without any further ado, let’s jump right into the deets!
Gorilla Glue Vs Super Glue
No matter what task you have at hand, there’s always a tool in the market to help you complete the tasks in a breeze. And so, for all the carpenters, woodworkers, DIYers, enthusiasts, or even hobbyists, there are adhesives to ensure a firm and durable bond to all your wooden projects.
And no matter what project you’re working on, firm and durable bonds are what you must be looking for. We decided to give a shot to the two of the crafter’s favorite brands, Gorilla Glue and Super Glue.
If you’ve been in the woodworking line for quite some time, you must be aware of the two brands. No doubt, the adhesives of both brands are of top-notch quality and are the go-to brands for all the crafters and woodworkers.
Both brands manufacture adhesives that are safe to use at home and are pretty much identical in terms of performance and efficiency. But, they are unique and also differ from each other in quite a few aspects. Of course, you would like to invest in a brand that will provide firm and durable bonds. So, let’s dive into the two products to know which one will be the best for your DIY tasks, simple repairs, and other woodworking projects.
A Glance At Gorilla Glue
Whether you are looking to fix delicate toys or your living room cabinets, Gorilla Glue is perfect for fixing anything and everything. Because of its strong adhesive strength, you can also seal porous surfaces with this.
Be it sanded woods, metals, ceramics, plastics, or glass surfaces, Gorilla glue can pretty much stick to whatever you throw at it. Plus, the wide variety of glues offered by Gorilla Glue is impressive.
If you want to mend the fences of the garden or quick fix the cracks on the door, you’ll have to go for the glue suited for outdoor applications. Not all glues can withstand all elements, and only outdoor glues can provide you with the much-needed durability and firm bonds to your surfaces.
As such, the Gorilla Glue Original works perfectly for mending the exteriors, thanks to its resistance to extreme temperatures. What’s highly impressive is that the glues of Gorilla brands create the toughest bonds when exposed to moisture or water on surfaces and act efficiently to create a lasting and durable bond.
Features Of The Gorilla Glue
If you are on the lookout for mending the cracked lights or wooden surfaces, then Gorilla Glue is perfect for tackling all your bonding needs. With its quick drying time combined with its sheer versatility, Gorilla Glue has transformed the world of woodworkers.
So, let us explore the features of Gorilla Glue to understand what makes it the go-to brand for all the bonding needs of the crafters and professionals.
Versatility
Plenty of brands offer glues of excellent adhesive strength, yet, everyone tends to go for Gorilla glues because they can bond almost anything. Whether it is wood, metal, plastics, rubber, leather, or any other material, Gorilla Glue’s excellent adhesion works efficiently to bond anything you want.
Because of its sheer versatility, this glue is a must-have for all your quick-fix, DIY tasks, and woodworking projects. Plus, Gorilla Glue does an excellent job in manufacturing a variety of adhesives for different bonding needs.
Irrespective of your needs, the Gorilla Glue is perfect for all your needs. Whether you are looking for a quick-drying glue or one with excellent adhesion strength, Gorilla Glues are ideal for all your bonding tasks. Also, you can use this for both exterior and interior surfaces.
Gorilla Glue is most preferred by crafters and professionals because of its versatile nature. From fast repairs to quick-drying, Gorilla Glue is an excellent choice for all your bonding needs.
Durability
One of the most striking aspects of the Gorilla Glue is its high durability. They are 100% water-resistant and can withstand the elements, so you can use them for bonding the exterior surfaces.
No matter what you’re looking to fix, you can trust Gorilla Glue for all the repairing and the DIY tasks. Its adhesive strength can bond your surfaces stronger than the wood itself. For any wood-to-wood tasks, the Gorilla Glue is an excellent option because of its exceptional bonding power.
Plus, while curing, the Gorilla Glue expands up to 3 - 4 times, resulting in strong and durable bonds. If you are on the lookout for non-breakable and long-lasting bonds, then Gorilla Glue will be an excellent choice for all your bonding needs.
Drying Speed
Gorilla Glue is quite popular among woodworkers and enthusiasts because of its sheer versatility. It has been designed to adhere to a variety of surfaces. The drying speed of the glue depends upon the temperature of your room or environment. However, it takes more or less 24 hours to dry completely.
After applying the glue on the surface, it requires clamping. Additionally, clamping with heavy substances will ensure better cinching. Plus, it dries natural wood color. Humidity and temperature also play a significant role in determining the curing time of the glue.
Gel glue formula: Our thick, no-run Gorilla glue gel formula...
All purpose glue: Gorilla Super Glue is formulated for...
This Gorilla Super Gel glue is our absolute favorite because of its fast-setting formula. Plus, its unique gel consistency makes it perfect for all kinds of applications. The Gorilla glue packs quite a powerful punch in its 20 gms of adhesive bottle.
Why Did We Like It?
We absolutely loved this glue’s unique gel consistency, which makes it perfect for vertical applications. It is extremely difficult to bond such surfaces without the adhesive creating a mess everywhere because of dripping. But thankfully, this glue doesn’t drip, thanks to its no run control formula.
Moreover, the glue dries pretty fast. It stands true to its claim of drying within 10 - 45 seconds without any clamping. Furthermore, it features an anti-clog cap so that the glue doesn’t dry up and can be used hassle-free.
Furthermore, it is highly versatile and can be used on a variety of surfaces. Be it ceramic, leather, rubber, wood, plastic, paper, and other similar surfaces. Also, the 20 gms of glue is sure to last long for only a few drops will bond your surfaces in almost no time. Whether you’re a DIY person, crafter, or hobbyist, this glue is perfect for all your bonding needs.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Gorilla Super Glue does an outstanding job in bonding almost anything and everything. However, the 20 gms adhesive isn’t an ideal option for professional woodworkers or even large projects. So, if you’re working on large projects, we recommend you buy in large quantities to ensure the tasks are completed smoothly, without running out of glue.
Pros
Works excellently for vertical surfaces
Nozzles do not clog
Dries almost in no time
Impact resistance
Cons
Multiple packs are required for large projects
A Glance At Super Glue
While Gorilla Glue works best for bonding the porous surfaces, the Super Glue will give you exceptional results on vertical and bumpy surfaces. Belonging to the Cyanoacrylate family (CA), the Super Glue is perfect if you have to bond small surfaces or those areas which call for extra precision.
Super Glues dries in a fraction of time and leaves a clear finish. And so, after spreading the glue, you need to act quickly while the glue is wet to ensure efficient bonding. Super Glue is available in a variety of sizes and forms. With such diverse varieties, you can choose the perfect glue for your bonding needs.
Those which are gel-based ensure more controlled application, thanks to their nozzles. They are ideal if you have to bond small surfaces or areas. The nozzles are designed in a way to let you control the flow of the glue.
But, if you’re looking for an adhesive for sealing and bonding challenging cracks or gaps, then Liquid Super Glues are perfect. Because of their thin consistency, they dry faster than gel ones. Also, you can apply them with a brush. Super Glue is a well-known brand, and its adhesives are most commonly used in the medical and industrial fields.
What’s highly striking is the unique bonding condition of these glues, thanks to their cyanoacrylates. These glues dry and bond best in the presence of moisture. They form tight bonds instantly when exposed to water or moisture. Plus, they are only minorly toxic, so you don’t have to worry much while using them.
So, because of cyanoacrylates, you can use this to bond the moisture-prone areas without worrying about the bonds. It forms tight bonds in almost no time. All in all, Super Glues are perfect for all your woodworking, DIY, and crafting projects.
Features Of Super Glue
Accidents do happen, no matter how careful you are. And when that favorite coffee mug of yours drops accidentally or somebody knocks over those precious ceramic pots, doesn’t your heart sink a little?
And so, Super Glue has designed various adhesives to fix all those common cracks and breaks. They are super easy to use, and their adhesive strength works efficiently to mend all the cracks and gaps.
So, let us dive into the features of the Super Glue to know why they’d be ideal for all your bonding needs.
Versatility
Because of their high versatility, they can bond any surface or material you want to. Unlike other glues, which have difficulty bonding uneven and bumpy surfaces, the Super Glue bonds those surfaces efficiently. As such, you can use this for your woodworking projects.
Also, the presence of moisture or water is necessary for efficient mending surfaces. And so, you can use them to bond porous surfaces. But, this isn’t much of a concern because the moisture in the air works in tandem with the glue to provide firm and durable bonding to your surfaces.
Super Glue is perfect if you’re looking for an adhesive to fix the cracks and gaps around your home. For all your DIY projects, crafts, and household work, this glue is excellent for it sticks almost whatever you throw at it.
Drying Speed
If you are a professional woodworker, you must know that no two types of glue have identical drying speeds. All the other glues that we tried dried after the evaporation of the liquid. However, this isn’t the case with Super Glue - it dries pretty quickly.
Super Glue dries immediately when it comes into contact with moisture. As such, this doesn’t mean you need to add water to make the Super Glue work because the moisture in the air is sufficient to let the glue do its job.
Since the super Glue is one of the fastest drying glues, this means you need to act fast enough on your surfaces to avoid any mistake while gluing.
No other glue in the market dries as fast as Super Glue. So, if you are in a hurry to complete DIY projects or looking for a quick fix, Super Glue is the perfect option to go for all your bonding needs.
Staying Power
Super Glue is compatible with almost any material and surface but mainly works best for uneven surfaces. Also, it dries in virtually no time. Its staying power further complements the versatility and the drying power of the glue.
DIYers, hobbyists, and crafters have been using this for ages because of its holding power. It can almost hold anything and everything because of its unique bonding characteristics. The high strength of cyanoacrylates makes it perfect for even exterior applications as it can withstand high temperatures.
Also, it does not require any heavy substance or pressure for clamping because of its high performance. So, whether you are a DIYer, hobbyist, or crafter, Super Glue is perfect for all your bonding needs because of its plenty of staying power.
INSTANT BONDING: Bonds quickly and securely with an...
VERSATILE ADHESION: Works effectively on wood, metal,...
Irrespective of your needs, this Super Glue 15187 is there to help you out with all the woodworking tasks. Its fast-drying formula ensures that your surfaces are bonded instantly. Additionally, the multi-pack is perfect for reusability.
Why Did We Like It?
The Super Glue is extremely useful in repairing any accidental fractures that might occur on your surfaces. It dries clear after application, thanks to its transparent color. As such, you can use this on anything you want without worrying about the stains.
Be it ceramics, pottery, jewelry, metals, fingernails, or any other material you want. Its ease of use makes it perfect for all DIY jewelry crafts, enthusiasts, and hobbyists.
What makes this Super Glue great is its precision applicator. You can apply the glue to any challenging cracks and gaps you want without worrying about dripping or damages due to the running formula. This allows you to work and bond materials with utmost precision.
Plus, any extra glue peeping out can be easily sanded away. Also, with its fast-drying formula, your materials will be bonded within 10 - 30 seconds. Lastly, this super glue offers quite a great deal. With the multi-pack of 12 tubes, they are perfect for reusability.
What Could’ve Been Better?
While testing the product, we did not come across any significant drawbacks. However, our only gripe is the packaging of the product. Although it comes in sturdy packaging, it is pretty challenging to slit the box.
But later, we figured out that the box is meant to be pulled apart into two pieces. Apart from that, the product works exceptionally well.
Pros
Dries clear after application
If excess can be sanded
Allows utmost precision while working
Bonds materials within second
Cons
Unpacking the glue is quite a challenge
Gorilla Glue Vs Super Glue Buying Guide
By now, you know almost everything about the Gorilla Glue and the Super Glue. But, have you decided which one’s best for your tasks? Of course, it isn’t that simple. With both the brands offering high-performing glues with excellent adhesive strength, it is pretty challenging to choose one.
And so, we’ve put up this buyer’s guide to help you decide between the two brands. We’ve discussed all the essential factors which you must consider while buying adhesives for your projects.
Interior or Exterior Use
The first and foremost thing that you should keep in mind is the nature of your application. Not all glues are formulated for both interior and exterior applications. Some are designed for the outdoors, and some for the indoors.
If you’re looking for bonding exterior surfaces, you must go for adhesives that are water-resistant and can withstand the elements. The Gorilla Original Glue is perfect for all exterior and interior applications because of its excellent adhesive strength.
Meanwhile, the Super Glue’s adhesives aren’t ideal for exterior uses but provide excellent adhesive strength for bonding minor repairs, cracks, and non-porous surfaces. So, if you’re looking for a versatile adhesive, the Gorilla Glue is what you must go for. The Gorilla Glue stands out in terms of versatility of application.
Toxicity
Irrespective of which brand you are using, adhesives can be dangerous. But, not all glues are detrimental to health. Because of their fast-drying power, most of them can stick to your hands, whereas others do not. And so, while choosing an adhesive for your use, you must consider its toxicity.
Gorilla Glue consists of harmful fumes which if inhaled, can lead to permanent lung damage. Also, they are dangerous to use around pets or kids. And so, it must be used in a well-ventilated space.
Meanwhile, the Super Glue is not as toxic as the Gorilla Glue. The fumes of the Super Glue aren’t as dangerous as the Gorilla ones, and they also do not cause any damage to your lungs. And so, the Super Glue stands above the Gorilla Glue in terms of toxicity. It is pretty safe to use and not as dangerous as the Gorilla Glue.
Cleaning
While working with adhesives, spills do occur, making bonding a messy affair. And so, while choosing glue, you must consider whether cleaning is a breeze or a challenging task. Mostly, the adhesives can be easily cleaned with a splash of water and a wet rag. However, there are even those which are difficult to clean.
While testing the two adhesives, we found the Gorilla Glue was relatively easy to clean. Rubbing a wet rag was enough to clean the spills. Meanwhile, the Super Glue isn’t as easy to clean as Gorilla Glue, but it isn’t impossible.
In case of spills, you need to pour rubbing alcohol on the surface and let it sit for some time for the glue to loosen its grip. However, in terms of cleaning, the Gorilla Glue stands above the Super Glue. And so, it will be ideal for all your household needs.
Gorilla Glue Vs Super Glue Summing It Up
With that, we have come to the end of our comprehensive guide. Both the brands manufacture top-notch quality glues, and so it is extremely difficult to pick a winner.
Both the Gorilla Glue and Super Glue have certain advantages over the other, and so, ultimately it all boils down to the user’s needs and preferences.
After extensive testing and research, we’d recommend Gorilla Glue because of its unique formula and versatility. Super Glue will be ideal if you’re looking for an affordable and less toxic option for fixing minor repairs or DIY projects.
Let us know your opinions in the comment below. Till then, take care!
Nobody loves to spend their weekends cleaning their backyard garden or porch. And that’s why any equipment that simplifies this job sells like hotcakes.
Pressure washers may not be the center of attraction of home maintenance tools. Nonetheless, these products come in handy while taking care of interior/exterior cleaning and maintenance tasks. And the fact that not everyone is truly aware of these products makes it even harder to shop for one.
But if you’re reading this, it’s evident that you’ve heard of the Honda GCV160 Pressure Washer somewhere before. Well, the GCV160 is highly recommended by professionals and hundreds of satisfied customers for being an absolute value-for-money product.
We also decided to board the wagon and personally test this much-talked-about pressure washer.
With that being said, let’s check out the things that we liked about it the most.
Gonda GCV160 Pressure Washer Review
We’ve known Honda as the Steven Spielberg of power tool brands - evergreen, and always ahead of its time. There’s hardly another global brand that has prioritized household needs more seriously than Honda, and what better way to prove it than dissecting the main features of the GCV160?
In short, this product is a surprisingly efficient medium-duty pressure washer that can simplify your house cleaning jobs with its superior performance. We’d recommend it to any property owner searching for reliable maintenance tools under a meager budget.
To paint a clearer picture for you, we’ve discussed some of its key features briefly, so let’s check that out!
Efficient Honda Engine
Beginning with the critical aspect of every pressure washer, we’re very impressed by how smartly the GCV160 motor is engineered to prioritize regular customer needs. Yes, this product features one of the smoothest Honda motors by far, which speaks volumes about its reliability.
Furthermore, the GCV160 motor stands out to be an efficient 4-cycle engine, which saves you from the hassle of mixing oil and gas. It’s pretty astounding how this product combines high-end performance and fuel-efficiency to finish your task within a surprisingly quick time.
It’s 161 cc motor is, without a doubt, an absolute beast of an engine that can produce a maximum of 2800 PSI operating pressure. Long story short, this unit provides enough force to make cleaning your dirty lawn or floors as easy as ABC.
Onboard Accessories
When it comes to versatility, the GCV160 is stacked with loads of accessories on board. First and foremost, its water release nozzles are attached to the front, which is supported with a nozzle guide on the rear. If you have never tried pressure washing before, you’re bound to find its nozzle guide extremely useful. Also, we’re thrilled to find out that this unit features multiple nozzles.
The three main nozzles are angled at 0, 25, and 40 degrees to deliver sufficient water pressure in hard-to-reach areas. The manufacturers also offer a soap nozzle to add a neat finishing touch to the job, which makes it an excellent companion for heavy cleaning and maintenance.
Last but not least, its onboard detergent tank is undoubtedly a much-needed upgrade we’ve wanted to see in pressure washers. Not only does it reduce the extra work for you, but it also mixes the detergent with water in a downstream fashion at a 20:1 ratio - that too, automatically.
Amateur-Friendly Control
You might be intimidated by its professional-level specs and performance, and wonder whether it may be suitable for beginners. Honestly, the Honda GCV160 bridges the gap between industrial-grade engineering and amateur-friendly user control. It’s so easy to operate that you could hand it to a 13-year old to clean the floors for pocket money!
Operating this product couldn’t be any simpler; you’d only require to press its large on/off switch to control its operation. Its pull cord is also a lot smoother, compared to most of the other pressure washers. It’s popular as a “single-pull cord” machine because it only takes a gentle and swift pull for the GCV160 to be straight off to the races.
Apart from that, controlling this model while pressure-washing isn’t rocket science either. You’ll find an easy-to-operate power control gauge on its lance, which lets you conveniently rotate and control how much pressure you’d require while cleaning a particular surface.
Key Performance
Although the Walt commercial-level pressure washer gives quite a stiff competition to the GCV160, this product beats the former at essential fundamental criteria. The thing is, it is quite lightweight for a medium-duty model, which sets it apart from most of its competitor models in the market.
That’s why professionals always recommend it, considering how easy and convenient it can be to carry around while working. Thanks to its ultralight body, using the Honda pressure washer for a long time doesn’t stress out your arms either.
And as we’ve mentioned already, its powerful Honda motor delivers sufficient power to finish medium-duty jobs precisely. We tested it by washing front yards, backyards, and patio tiles - and this product didn’t disappoint even a bit!
But that’s not all; apart from it’s operating pressure, its 2.3 GPM speed is enough to wipe out stubborn stains from cement surfaces, which makes it a total value-for-money product.
Maintenance And Warranty
This product arrives at your doorstep in a stainless steel frame, covered with hard plastic material for higher product durability and safety. We’re quite satisfied with how less it asks for maintenance.
Cleaning/fixing the GCV160 twice a month would suffice for it to operate precisely, so we’re giving it a thumbs up for convenience. Also, the manufacturers cover this product with a 3-year extended warranty period, so don’t be stressed about early damages.
What Could Have Been Better?
Apparently, its high-performance motor suffers from a heating issue. Most of the buyers have complained about how quickly its engine heats up after being used for a while, which makes it a bit inconvenient for long-term usage. Make sure that you’re not coming in direct physical contact with the engine, to be safe.
Being deafeningly loud has also been a prevalent issue across multiple Honda tools. We understand that powerful motors mostly tend to produce loud noise. However, it gives this unit a slight disadvantage compared to the Walt commercial-grade pressure washer, considering how quiet the latter is relatively.
Pros
Authentic high-performance motor
Lightweight and portable design
Fuel-efficient and smooth operation
3-year warranty period
Suitable for beginners
Cons
Can get pretty loud at times
Quick heating issue
Verdict
For those who value reliability and world-class performance the most, the Honda GCV160 serves as an appropriate product that turns monotonous cleaning tasks into fun activities.
Its motor efficiency is second to none, and its fuel efficiency adds the perfect icing on the cake. We’d recommend this pressure washer if you’re searching for durable equipment under a reasonable budget.
And this concludes our Honda GCV160 review. Which product would you want us to review next? Drop the names in the comments section below, and our next review might be about it.
Anyhoo, we’ll return soon with more useful and unbiased product reviews, so stay tuned!
Struggling to fix the ABS and PVC pipes in your bathroom? Try gluing the pipes together as it can work wonders while fixing plastic pipes.
However, don’t mix up the glue while using it because even though ABS and PVC are both plastic pipes, they are very different. Hence, you cannot use PVC glue on an ABS pipe and vice versa.
But, how does PVC glue differ from ABS glue, and how can you use this glue to fix the pipe fittings? We are here to answer all these questions and much more. In this article about glue that works on ABS And PVC, we’ll cover all the necessary details related to fixing pipe fittings with glue while talking about glue that works on ABS and PVC pipes.
So, without further ado, let’s get on with it!
What Are PVC Pipes?
One of the most popular alternatives to metal pipes is polyvinyl chloride or PVC pipes. This high-quality plastic pipe fitting is durable and soft, making it an ideal replacement for metal pipes. Furthermore, they are highly affordable, so you don’t need to break the bank while installing them for your plumbing system.
Also, you don’t have to face the issue of burst pipes or leaks with PVC pipes. Hence, they are commonly used in the main water supply line for supplying water to your kitchen and bathroom.
It is also widely used in sewage and irrigation systems. On top of this, the high-quality soft and flexible plastic material of the pipe makes it pretty easy to mold.
Naturally, a PVC pipe can fit anywhere in the building for plumbing work. Plus, the lightweight plastic material of the pipe makes it much easier to install compared to metal pipe fittings.
What Are ABS Pipes?
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene or ABS pipes are like the close cousin of PVC pipes. In terms of the plastic material of the pipe, ABS is very similar to PVC, but the former has a much softer texture and black color. And owing to the soft texture, ABS pipes can easily fit in small and tight spaces.
Also, ABS pipe fittings are highly durable and ideal for transporting cold water. So, they are often used in the plumbing system of drains and underground sewage lines. Plus, the ABS pipe is much better at carrying hot water than PVC pipe fittings. However, it is not resistant to temperatures higher than 160℉.
On top of this, ABS is a thermoplastic resin, which makes the pipe soft and eco-friendly. It has also been possible to manufacture ABS pipes from recycled plastic. On the downside, the ABS plastic material can be pretty noisy. Hence, most local codes don’t permit the installation of ABS pipes in buildings. But, these are very common in sewer and drainage systems.
PVC Pipes Vs. ABS Pipes
Both PVC and ABS pipe fittings are pretty easy to work with if you compare them with metal pipes. They are easy to repair and replace, and you can simply glue them up. However, they have some unique and distinct features that set them apart.
For instance, PVC pipe fittings are easier to cut through when compared to ABS pipe and are much easier to glue. In contrast, ABS pipes are more resistant to extreme temperatures than PVC.
On the contrary, you need a higher temperature for ABS glue to adhere to ABS plastic material while fixing ABS pipe. But, it is much more durable than any PVC pipe. Thus, you can choose to go for PVC or ABS based on your plumbing requirements.
Solvent Cement For Plastic Pipes
The modern plumbing system is mostly plastic. So, when you’re trying to fix any pipe in the modern plumbing system, it is best to have a clear idea about solvent cement primer or glue. Most plastic fittings are usually joined by using glue or solvent cement. Thus, better be safe and careful while using those because you don’t want to deal with any leaky water lines in your house.
Usually, glue is used to put together ABS, PVC, and CPVC pipes. But it is most commonly known as all-purpose cement or transition cement when you use it on different plastic pipes.
Most importantly, the plumbing cement is not interchangeable. Each pipe has its own cement, and you have to stick to using it while joining the pipes.
For instance, the green glue or the green cement works exclusively on PVC. It can also help join ABS with PVC, but it does not work only on ABS. So, even though you can use it to join PVC with ABS, you cannot use it to weld ABS pipes with each other.
Does PVC Glue Work On ABS Pipes?
We’re sure you’ve realized by now that there are distinct differences in the ABS and PVC plastic materials. Thus, never try to use PVC glue on ABS pipes. It won’t work, and you’ll be doing more harm than good to your plumbing system.
But say, you have a water drainage system containing both ABS and PVC pipes. Under such circumstances, you can use the green PVC glue to attach the two piping systems. You can only use this green glue to attach PVC with ABS.
Can You Interchange The Glue In Plumbing?
According to the modern plumbing rule, interchanging the glues is strictly prohibited. You cannot mix and match the glues while using them on different plastic pipes. The PVC glue is only for PVC pipes. And similarly, the ABS glue is only suited for ABS pipes.
The two plastics have different characters. So, you won’t be able to make the glue stick to the plastic materials if you use it on the wrong pipe. You can only interchange the glue when you’re joining ABS and PVC pipes together. Otherwise, you can’t do it.
PVC Glue Vs. ABS Glue
PVC glue or PVC cement works quicker than ABS glue. It adheres to the PVC pipe material faster and takes only 30 seconds for the PVC glue to dry up after its application on the PVC pipe. After 15 minutes, the glue hardens, following which you can use the pipes after two hours.
On the other hand, applying the ABS glue takes at least two hours to dry off completely, and it hardens after 24 hours. So, there’s no way you can use the pipe within that time for supplying water. But, on the positive side, ABS glue is much more durable and long-lasting than PVC glue.
Final Thoughts
Fixing pipes can be tricky if you don’t know what to do. Anyhow, after going through our article about glue that works on ABS And PVC, we hope you have a better idea about fixing PVC and ABS pipes using suitable glue.
Just make sure to take safety precautions when you’re working with such chemicals to avoid potential injuries. Wear your goggles or gloves for protection, and you should be fine.
With that, we’ll sign off. Take care, and we’ll see you next time!
![How to Color Clear Epoxy Resin [Coloring Resin 101]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/How-to-Color-Clear-Epoxy-Resin-1.jpg "How to Color Clear Epoxy Resin [Coloring Resin 101]")
![How Much Does Benjamin Moore Paint Cost? [Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/06/How-Much-Does-Benjamin-Moore-Paint-Cost-02.jpg "How Much Does Benjamin Moore Paint Cost? [Guide]")
![How Much are Snow Blowers? [Costs & Maintenance]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/01/Best-Snowjoe-Electric-Snow-Blowers-of-2020-02.jpg "How Much are Snow Blowers? [Costs & Maintenance]")
![How Long Does Polyurethane Take to Dry [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/12/polyurethane-4.jpg "How Long Does Polyurethane Take to Dry [All You Need to Know]")
via 
![Heat Resistant Epoxy 101 [A Guide for High Temperatures]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Heat-resistant-epoxy-2.jpg "Heat Resistant Epoxy 101 [A Guide for High Temperatures]")
![Hack Saw Vs Bow Saw [All You Need to Know] [Explained]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Hack-Saw-Vs-Bow-Saw-01.jpg "Hack Saw Vs Bow Saw [All You Need to Know] [Explained]")
![7 Best Grout Sealers For Shower [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Best-Grout-Sealers-For-Showers-1.jpg "7 Best Grout Sealers For Shower [Reviewed & Buyer's Guide]")
![Grizzly Lathe Review [Clear Winner?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Grizzly-Lathe-Review-01.jpg "Grizzly Lathe Review [Clear Winner?]")
